\ C ; # \
fl> a , | y % ¢ f ".. m \\\\\\\\§§
e f
> A.\ M f \\
RAC ! Ue N“ a (e
“Lag/w PH "at Duals f ham“ i“®\flm\“\§& ff a“)? f Fat HHV
on # t rrr Aaa --+." 344 xix»: i s a t r k n 4%" too A, & => joy fis
pty an r aa Q ii rrr AY Ta misfiés§\\ a 3 gq \t ‘ f ry S) Ce
dred T I \\\\C\\\§\§ omen mst isent. era ; ' e t! yate H i reat
as tee o B SP {als A / 3 \\\\\\\\\\\\\ $ .::§\\\\\§ HA xmuxfi$w§ ( 3:5.- 3 ..oWYbéfi» A49
Z
ith
\>\&§N
Me
+
LEOPARD HUNTERS OF URERGGA.
OF THE DARK CONTEINENT . .. - ass
Arab force, Tipo Tib. 'This ivory dealer had considerable knowledge of the
country, gained in frequent journeys through it, besides a large force of soldiers
and porters; hence his services were of the greatest importance to Stanley, who
was fearful that his present small force would be unable to make a passage
through the wild region it was necessary to cross. $
In the interview which followed their meeting, Tipo Tib told Stanley that
the " great river "-Lualaba-flowed directly towards the north until it emptied
into the sea, and that its shores were covered with dense woods, which were
inhabited by the most ferocious savages, reptiles and animals. He also declared
that he had made one trip through this dangerous region, in one part of which
his party found ivory so plentiful that a tusk might be purchased for a single
cowrie shell. But while the trade in ivory appeared most promising of enormous
profit, his party was not permitted to leave the country with their stores.. 'The
Wakuma, a large race, were very hostile, but to their enmity was added: the
implacable vengeance of a race of dwarfs, whose territory bordered that of the
Wakuma. These little incarnate devils descended upon the Arabs at night and
with their poisoned arrows fought so courageously that the Arabs were forced
to retreat with the greatest precipitation, and in the flight all save thirty of the
party were killed. | ;
_- But there were other evils besides savage cannibals, which the Wakuma
and dwarfs were represented to be, for Tipo Tip declared that in the adjoining
country of Uregga the dense woods harbored thousands of boa constrictors,
which, suspended from tree-branches, watched for the passing underneath of men
and antelopes, which these reptilian monsters greedily devoured. In these same
woods were also the greatest number of leopards, which, emboldened by hunger
and the fear they inspired in the natives, committed the most appalling ravages
among the people. 'The sokos, a species of chimpanzee, were also numerous
and attacked men without provocation, biting off their fingers and otherwise
maiming them. 'Tipo Tib avetred that travelling on the river was but little less
dangerous than on land because of the great number of wicked falls that it was
necessary to pass over, and which resulted in the drowning of nearly every one
that attempted their passage.
I THE STRANGE PEOPLE OF UREGGA.
After a lengthy interview with Tipo 'Tib, a contract was drawn up between
them by which Stanley agreed to pay the Arab $5000 for an escort of 140
guns and 70 spearmen a distance of sixty marches of four hours each, which
would be equivalent to nearly 500 miles. 'This force added to his own would
furnish him with such protection as was needed. _ .
The expedition now marched to Nyangwe, where another section of the
Arab party was encamped; Tipo 'Tib's party consisted of 700 persons when
united. Nyangwe is a village of 300 huts and nearly 2000 people; it is a great
market for slaves, and is the westernmost Arab trading station on the road from
the east. As the village is situated on the Lualaba river, Stanley here launched
pop marra ze
( 22 p y
i\|fl“fin e ---. E= e
e -- - (ee --- s
ee ~ == f = =
| <--- - .y//\J e --
r _ =>
g- e A
222 "_ ___-
> ~ llll\||m = Hiu #
sso -
n- s a _
. .|t
~-
- _ e
e e s
e ~
e ome se ~
ENXCOUNTER WITH A. BOA CONSTRICTOR.
z- -
Z2.
(256)
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 257
his boat, the Lady Alice; to make soundings He found the river studded with
large lslands and its mean depth, taken in thirty-six soundings, was eighteen
feet nine inches, while its breadth was from 4000 to 5000 yards, making it one
of the greatest rivers of the earth.
After five days' marching through dense, almost impenetrable forests where
they were compelled to hew their way with axes step by step, they came to
the country of Uregga, and halted to rest. The inhabitants of this country
live as secluded in their dark forests as the chimpanzees; but they provide
themselves with comforts unknown to other African tribes. Their houses, in
the villages, are all connected together in one block, from 50 to 300 yards in
length, and are covered with a kind of pitch. They furnish their homes with
many luxuries known to civilization, such as cane settees, beautifully covered
stools, sociable benches, exquisitely carved spoons, etc. The women of Uregga
wear only aprons four mehes square, of bark or grass cloth, fastened by cords
of palm fibre. 'The men wear skins of civet, or monkey, in front and rear,
the: tails downward. | It may lave been from a hasty glanee of a rapidly disap-
pearing form of one of these people in the wild woods that native travellers in
the lake regions felt persuaded that they had seen " men with tails."
In one of these villages, called Kampunzee, Stanley was much astonished
to see two rows of what appeared to be human skulls, and upon counting them
found there were 186. He asked the chief of the village the meaning of these
gruesome trophies, but a direct answer was avoided by a pretense that :the
skulls were those of sokos captured in the hunt. Stanley was none the less
satisfied that they were human, but to prove the matter more thoroughly he
brouglit several to England on his return and had them examined by Prof.
Huxley, who not only pronounced them to be human skulls but found on
nearly all the marks of a hatchet that had been driven into the head while
the victim was alive.
Five miles beyond Kampunzee the expedition came again to the Lualaba,
at which point Stanley renamed the river the Livingstone, by which it has
since been called. Here he made arrangements to cross the stream, and after
launching the Zady Alise he called on the natives of the opposite shore for
their assistance with canoes. After an offer of many presents the canoes were
furnished, but the moment the expedition had made a crossing the natives
attacked it with great vigor, but were driven off, without loss.
HORRIBLE EVIDENCES OF CANNIBALISM.
Havmg passed to the south shore of the Livingstone the exploring party
was now in the Ukusee country, among savages whose lives were apparently
devoted to slaughter, and whose choice meat was human flesh. Each village
street was ornamented with two rows of bleached trophies of eaten humanity,
forming a ghastly imitation of shell decorations along the paths of our parks
and gardens
'The obstacles to land travel had been so great while the dangers from
17
her-
=A
A
spss
Somests
///;
§
/
\
duunmiinin
aL
s § N R c
=t ./////J//I/flfi efl/y/l,
éfluflw & ///
\ ~ ”MW/l/ &
; & sexes Cees
sess
sss
jg“
prt
eal
tps
$8. 3+ dos
2a *=
ese.
~$ ';.“ ~.
rr gui
o- w- 1
3
ann mac 9
4
~~~
s I Tee rip
"n.," £- #
f La u
eles,
24s
7 p* as
-- .- Aip
a nere
sd Putte
A VILLAGE IN UREGCA
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. ; 259
ambushing parties seemed to be increasing, that Stanley decided to take to the
river and follow it down to its outlet, regardless of Tipo Tib's warning againt
the many falls that must be passed. After much difficulty and the payment
of a large sum in presents, the required number of canoes was procured, in
which the expedition embarked.
On November 26th they reached the village of Nakanpemba, which pre-
FIGHTING THEIR WAY THROUGH THE CANNIBALS.
sented the usual horrible picture of streets lined with human skulls, the dread-
ful relics of many a barbarous feast. Throughout this region the evidences of
cannibalism were so numerous that human flesh must have been a common
disk at every table.
260 HEROES OF THER DARK CONTINENT.
Tipo Tib's story about the many dangerous rapids that made navigation
of the Livingstone river so.perilous was soon found to be true. As the expe-
dition went on down the river, the first fifty miles were hardly covered before
they came to a rock shoal over which the water dashed in a mad and impetu-
ous manner, rendering passage impossible. It was therefore necessary to land
and carry the cances and Ludy Alie around the treacherous place, which
involved, besides great delay, the most exhausting labors.
f A DWARF CAPTURED.
While engaged in a portage of the boats, some of the men discovered a
savage little man concealed in some bushes near by, who being armed with bow
and poisoned arrows had evidently contemplated making an attack, single handed,
an nore - || |) 0) 11 - {1} 0 S C
<<-- -am - --- --- whom he con-
ceived to be
invaders of his
country.. .~ He
was. captured
and brought to
Stanley, who.
first - examin-
ing the arrows,
the »points of
which . were
ig] carefully rolled
#] in leaves, found
j them emitting
an odor very
like that ex-
haled by can-
« Sus
pecting them to be poisoned, he made a motion as if to inoculate the little
pigmy with the substance on the arrow points; at this the little fellow cried
out in great fear, and shouted "Mabil mabil" (bad, bad) so vociferously as to
prove conclusively that Stanley's suspicions were correct. }
This strange creature stood, when measured, four feet six-and-a-half inches
in height, and proved to be fully a head taller than the average of his people.
His head was large, his face decked with a scraggy fringe of whiskers, and his
complexion light chocolate. .He was exceedingly bow-legged and thin-shanked,
and was altogether a hideous looking fiend and ugly little savage brute, and as
to intelligence very little above the beasts of the forest. Stanley retained him
as a prisoner and guide for several days, but finally dismissed him and sent
him home with a haudful of beads and shells and some bead necklaces. He
had expected to be eaten, according to the custom of his country, and though
W
t
ul
u
see
te
dx Ares E ATT U
se ur -
Ij (-
Will v];
tit A8
I”!
I t
HME
l
at
STREET IN A CANNIBAL VILLAGE.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 261
his captors shook hands with him at parting, and smiled, and patted him on.
the shoulder, the dwarf could not comprehend why he had not furnished a
feast for his captors, and evidently did not feel safe until he had plunged out
of sight in his native woods.
On the 26th of December, Tipo Tib and his Arabs bade farewell to Stanlgy,
and started on their return. T hey had not fully kept their contract, but their
excessive fear of the cannibals and the dwarfs was having a bad effect on
Stanley's men, and he decided to let them go; so, after a grand banquet in
the wilderness, they shook hands and parted. At th1s time Stanley was not
sure whether the stream that he was following would empty into the Niger or
the Congo, as everything in advance of him was unknown and doubtful; but
he determined to proceed and let the future take care of itself. His force now
consisted of one hundred and forty-nine persons in twenty-three boats, and on
the departure of the Arabs, they yas ssa
embarked and commenced their long
and dangerous drift toward the un-
known.
Standing up in his boat Stanley
surveyed his people. How few they
appeared to dare the region of fable
and darkness! -They were nearly
all sobbing. 'They were leaning for-
ward, bowed, as it seemed, with grief
and heavy hearts. He spoke to them M
words of encouragement; told them &
of their past brave deeds, and ex- \
horted them to be men. But it was
with wan smiles that they responded to his words, and feebly they paddled
down the dark-brown current. Poor fellows! Many of them were indeed going.
into the land of the Unknown. j
IN THE TOILS OF A BOA-CONSTRICTOR.
AS the expedition proceeded on the voyage after the parting with Tipo Tib,
the river gradually widened until its breadth was about one mile, and its shores
became more populous with the most savage cannibals, who time and again
attacked the voyagers. The ¢ry went up from both shores "'Meat! meat! we
shall have meat," followed by the pushing out of canoes manned by savages
who seemed to thmk those who composed the expedition would fall an easy
prey. 'To protect himself against the fury of these demons, who resented all
REPTILH KING OF THE JUNGLE.
overtures for peace, Stanley was compelled to fight them, and in an almost con-
tinuous battle of many days, hundreds of the cannibals were slain, and in a few
instances their canoes and shields 'appropriated. f
It was not until January 1toth, 1876, that Stanley passed by the last tribe
of cannibals, and came to a greater falls than any theretofore passed, to which
263 HEROES OP THE DARK CONTINENT
he gave the name of Stanley Falls. Just below these was a village called
Balobo, where he met a very kind old king named Chumberi, who relieved the
very pressing needs of the expedition with a good supply of provisions, and also
furnished Stanley with an escort of forty-five men to accompany him the next
fifty miles down the river and pilot the expedition through some treacherous
rapids.
Soon after going into camp after the first day's march from Balobo, every-
body was thrown into a state of nervous excitement by the terrible shrieks of a
boy, and upon rushing to the spot from whence the alarm came Stanley was
horrified to see a huge python uncoil itself from the body of one of the black
boys of the expedition and glide off quickly into the jungle. In the darkness
the boy had mistaken the snake for one of his companions, as it reared its
head to
the heiglit of a
man,. and - he
approached so
near that: ~at"
seized him. in
its dreadful
folds. - His
sere ams. and
the' rush of
men to his as-
sistance -so
alarmed the
reptile - that it
released its
hold and fled.
In half 'an
~ p our th e
python," or
another one, was discovered, in a different part of the camp, about to embrace
a woman in its folds; but this time, after tremendous excitement, the monster
was dispatched.. It measured only thirteen feet six inches in length, and fifteen
inclies around the thickest part of the body.
- THE DROWNING OF KALULU AND FRANK POCOCK.
Nothing further befell the expedition until the 13th of March, when the first
cataract in Livingstone Falls was encountered, and thereafter for the period of one
month there was a succession of disasters, as there was a succession of cataracts.
Instead of carrying the boats around this dangerous place in the river, as had
been done at so many other places of like character, an attempt was made to ride
the cataracts, by which it was hoped that much valuable time would be gained.
But the wisdom of this undertaking is doubtful in the light of the fatal results
KILLING A BOA.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 263
that followed. - On the 28th, one of the large canoes, carrying Kalulu, Stanley's
body servaut, and five others, was ewept over olle of the cataracts, and all the
af
: S ‘ .
= meses § ere f a S= _k\\
j SHOOTING THB CATARACTS.
occupants were drowned. A similar disaster occurred ot the 3d of _ June at
Masassa whirlpool, where Frank Pocock, with eight oarsmen, attempted to drive
264 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
the rapids, but they were drawn into a whirlpool, and down deep under the
seething waters. In this disaster Pocock lost his life, though he was an
expert swimmer, but all the other occupants of the boat contrived to reach the
shore and were saved. 'This dreadful misfortune to one whom he esteemed 80
highly, and upon whom he had placed so much responsibility, gave Stanley
the kecuest anguish, and left hit entirely incousolable. His reflections were
of the gloomiest character, since of the three brave boys who had sailed with
him from England to win laurels of discovery in a strange land, not one was
now left, but all were sleeping for eternity in the wilds of the Dark Continent,
where the tears of sorrowing friends could never moisten their rude beds. What
. would the mothers say, when he returned to receive the praises of his grateful
patrons and the plaudits of admirers, and they learned that their noble sons
had made the greater sacrifice, but upon whom no joyous blessings now could
fall, not even that of a mother's tear. ; f
The repeated calamities of the expedition had by this time so discouraged
the people that it was with the greatest effort Stanley could induce them to
proceed. 'They seemed to think they were going to certain destruction, and -
became languid, sullen, and despondent. On the 20th of June thirty-one of
them deserted in a body, but returned a few days afterwards, having met with
anything but a friendly reception from the natives. Stanley's great leadership
now manifested itself in keeping his people together, quieting their complaints,
and infusing enough energy and determination into their wasted bodies to
induce them to push on to the ocean. Famine stared them in the face, and
he knew that nothing but a persevering, persistent, impetuous advance toward
the sea could save them.
A STARVING.EXPEDITION. ~
About the middle of July the expedition reached Ngoyo, where they found
a naked but friendly people, who supplied the famishing travellers with a great
variety of vegetables and some fish. Besides which kindness the Ngoyo chief
assisted Stanley in conveying his boats around some dangerous falls and other-
wise attesting his friendship, for which he was rewarded with a liberal supply
of presents. f
On the 31st of July, 1877, having explored the river to Isangila Falls,.and_
proved that it was the Congo, Stanley decided to leave the water and proceed
overland by a direct route to Embomma, a Portuguese settlement on the coast,
and only a few days' march distant. 'The delight of the people at this announce-
- ment manifested itself in loud and fervid exclamations of gratitude. f
But the sufferings of the expedition, even with the glad promise of reaching
a Portuguese settlement soon, were not yet ended, nor indeed had their most
desperate straits been passed. Forty of the men were sick of dysentery,
ulcers, and scurvy, and the list became greater each day as their exhaustion
increased. When at length they reached the coast, it was at a point where the
most imbruted natives had formed a small settlement, and from whom they
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 265
were unable to obtain any food whatever. Weak from their long fast, the
expedition continued on until, three days later, Nsanda was reached, where a
stop was made with the hope of obtaining some provisions. 'The chief came
out to Stanley's camp and asked at once for rum, but as all that had been
brought from Zanzibar had long before been exhausted, Stanley was unable to
grant the chief's request. At this the old savage became angry, and refused
to supply the starving men with any kind of food whatever.
The situation was now critical in the extreme, as his men were literally
dying of starvation; and as a last reconrse to sectire reliei, Stanley wrote a /
ake see cem
2
...... 94>”; V ,
} i ¢ U
WIN J \. s 14 N,
44/44 gab ~>. l/ ,//v./'/:/ \‘/§' #
aM, LA /! / Ay.
$§§l fl}? \ D \
"I % %
CA +
;\
, /
[ f \| At. , § 4 \
x
‘[\
A (*
r ( K
a
+ tia a i {. ast a \ _‘I,} I ,\ 4 $ » p
y a iin pat OW P/N AA Lz XC
$ oo
hK8
¢ atl !) SNC SH 4A ] N
Aal t.“ R NV \A/} 1 p. \ UVC I/ '.'.l/ g O “i
fle ie tor DVI NL
/ ¥
' [ | #4
f / <7
&A |
hu f
¥
axl \n
\
/ N
i
_s
A
STANLEY'S STARVING PEOPLE.
letter in English, French, and Spanish, addressed to the people of Embomma,
describing his condition and asking relief. 'This letter was dispatched by three
of his best men, and on the following day, August 4th, it was placed in the
hands of Mz. John W. Harrison, representing an English firm, who immediately
sent a large amount of provisions, by a score of carriers, to the suffering expe-
dition, and thus saved them from dying of starvation within a day's march of
the journey's end. wa *
On the oth of August Stanley marched into Embomma, where he was
266 __ HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
most graciously received by Mr. Harrison and the Portuguese population, who,
as a mark of honor, gave him a magnificent banquet on the following evening.
After enjoying the generous hospitality of these people for two . days,
Stanley was ready to depart, but he first strolled down to the river, on the
banks of which Embomma is Situated, to take. a farewell look at. its broad and
placid waters. " Glancing at the mighty river on whose brown bosom we
endured so much," said he, "I saw it approach, awed and humbled, the thresh-
old of the watery immensity, to whose. immeasurable volume and illimitable
expanse, awful as had been its power and terrible as had been its fury, its flood
was but a drop.= And I felt my heart suffused with purest gratitude. to Him
whose hand had protected us, and who had enabled us to pierce the Dark
Contitieut from: east to west, and to trace its mightiest river to its Ocean
bourne." : ‘
Stanley proceeded with his company on a steamer to Kabinda, and thence
to Loanda, where his sick and suffering people were received into the Portuguese
hospital, and remained until September 27th, five of them dying in the mean
time. From Loanda the expedition sailed to Cape Town, and thence back to
Zanzibar, where the people were paid off and discharged. Stanley started for
England December 13th, 1977, and upon. his arrival «in London was received
with distinguished honors, such as he well deserved. He had fairly won the
English heart as well as the heartiest praise of his own country. He had proved
himself, next to Livingstone, the greatest exploter that ever penetrated Africa.
STANLEY'S THIRD EXPEDITION.
The return of Stanley after so long an absence, and when nearly all the.
civilized . world believed him dead, was the signal for renewed applause among
his admirers, and the bestowal of praise and honors by the Geographical Society
of England. But not only was he the recipient of social, and even royal, favors,
as public evidences of appreciation for his heroism and incomparable wisdom in
dealing with the savage races of Africa, but a gainful interest was excited by
his discoveries, and commercial bodies almost immediately sought to make them
profitable. - Stanley's report on the fertility of the Congo region, and the f:
navigableness of the Congo river, thus offering facile communication with the
interior, which is inconceivably rich in valuable woods, gums, ivory, gold, etc.,
prompted the formation of a company to open trade with that promising region.
Portugal, as stated in an early part of this book, held possession, for cen-
turies, of the lower Congo, their district extending inland about one hundred
miles; but their trade was of no consequence fifty miles from the coast, and so
little had this profited- them that they seemed to set no value oft the trade of
the interior or its possibilities. Within a few months after Stanley's return,
therefore, "'The International Association" took steps to profit by his
discoveries. ‘
This association was the result of an assembling in 1876, at Brussels, of
the principal geographical societies of Europe and America, in response to an
«<~-=nim mm auger, § M ' ._‘\§3‘\\’:"; VJ); BR
tlt!!! u
4 {s - \ M\ ¥} bis 5 A 1 J eg ad [ )£((r N p
Z
GZ
A
k ,
{
i
< \ 2
a)?“ ¢ A” T; '.1/:
\\ ) N td \\ 4 ia Ill
‘mz‘s$§2§é§§f§‘im%rflf '
\§) SAH is? 4}! My [1 (
o fif‘fifld»
«lB f , 7 I“ ”fig. 9
Qfiéh 3
b
{94‘
F A s)
LS
oaks
ae -> w
Dra
xix/fig?” g/
I: ( +4 / ’///‘,//I
I/M/ g "£1me 4 D CILEN Az
s oat AEN
o=
CUTTING A PASSAGE AROUND THE CATARACTS.
268 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
invitation from Leopold II., King of Belginm. The intention. was to extend
the civilizing influences of Christianity through Central Africa, and the open-
ing up of trade over all available routes, whether by land or river.
King Leopold sent a letter to Stanley inviting him to attend upon His
Majesty, to which the explorer at once responded, and the interview that fol-
lowed resulted in the organization of another expedition under the command of
Stanley, and in the interest of the International Congo Association.
& Fhe Association, which had assumed, with consent of the powers, a national
character, adopted as their ensign a blue flag with a golden star in the
centre, and this Stanley bore as the emblem of his authority to negotiate
with the native tribes for exclusive privileges.
. UP THE CONGO.
On returning from his second expedition in Africa, and following down the
Congo, it will be remembered that Stanley left the river some fifty miles from
its mouth, aud marched overland to the coast at Embomma. He had not,
therefore, followed down the fiver to its mouth. On his return expedition
to the Congo in 1878, therefore, he landed his company of 250 men at Banana
Foimt, the river's mouth, and: in launches lhe commenetd_ an ascent of that
famous stream to noté particularly to. wliat extefit it was navigable, and to
learn the prospects for opening a profitable trade with the 40,000,000 people
believed to reside in the Congo basin. The results of his undertaking, which
was attended by few adventures, may be briefly summed up as. follows: He
found the river navigable for crafts drawing fifteen feet to Vivi, a distance of
ifs milles. At this point cataracts begin, seveu of witich occur in the next. 200
miles, around or over which it would be impossible for any crafts to pass except
by the digging of canals. After this interval of interruption the river widens
at Stanley pool, where Stanley founded the station of Leopoldville. Along this
route and to a distarice of four hnndred miles from: the river's mouth, he
established twenty-two stations, over which he raised the flag of the Association,
and thus opened a secure way for both trade and missionaries, and in which
region slavery is prohibited. f f f
The great difficulties encountered by Stanley in this expedition was in
making a passage around the cataracts, to accomplish which it was necessary
for him to draw his boats sometimes for miles overland, and to cut a way
through the dense wood, involving an incredible amount of labor. In one place
the hills rose so high and abruptly above the cataracts that the only means of
effecting a passage round them was by digging and blasting out an angle at
the base, a work that required several months to perform. When he reached the
stream above the cataracts his astonishment was as great as it was discouraging
to find that M. De Brazza had preceded him, and by a treaty with the tribes had
secured exclusive privileges to the French government for trade on the south shore
of the river, and claimed a protectorate over an area of thirty five thousand
square miles of territory, over which he had indeed raised the French flag.
69)
(2
*
ER
ETT RIV
ON BENN
GORD
SS
wWONDERFUI, BRIDGE ACRO
270 HEROES OF THE DARK CONFINENT-
Stanley was first apprised of the treaty made between De Brazza and the
Congo tribes on his arrival at Gordon Bennett river, where it joins the Congo.
While being hospitably entertained by two chiefs, Gampa and Babnjali, he was
visited by a colored sergeant named Malamine, dressed in uniform, and
accompanied by two negro sailors from the Gaboon. Hearing of Stanley's pres-
ence 'in the country, they visited him, bearing the French colors, and after a
polits grecting presented him witli two papers. One of these was a copy.. of
'~_.""(h\ baga f
sk ws as
73 " The ite nooo Mocs san "ampere wa at he agp et e +"
- \ : I *t
lls"
Bs t
DF BRAZZA CONCLUDING A TREATY WITH THE NATIVES.
the treaty, and the other a request, signed by De Brazza, to show hospitality
to any white person found within the protectorate.
DIFFICULTIES PRECIPITATED BY THE TREATY.
Stanley, while doubting the validity of the treaty, had no disposition to come
in conflict with De Brazza, and therefore asked Malamine if there were any
objections to erosging the Gordon Bennett river, and being answered in the
negative, he passed over tc the other side by means of a bridge made of vines,
(271)
RR _n ___
at evie
sa-
3
Y
"a
Q:
/ z
Z Z
//
Z
ie
1
(e
7
Fd
aes 1
Se"
* as
Cz "51 5X
I e_ \
A C/%\\\§N\ ‘k }
B a
[J
/
Z
ElaiifimauMflfnifin
pil -or
ITH GAMANEKEONO.
STANLEY'S INTERVIEW W
273 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINEN'T.
and which exhibited both the engineering skill and wondrous ingenuity of a
remarkable tribe. He halted at Mfwa, and there held an interview with chicet
Ingra at a grand meeting arranged for the purpose, and at which he obtained
permission to erect houses for a station, which privilege was immediately ratified
by the principal chief of the district, Gamaunkono.
But Malamine followed
Stanley and the effects of his presence was soon felt in a refusal of the natives
.......
......
S
3
F
w
[
SS
{fl
/%
/
Tams
2
#.
AF
P
#
7 //
11
ze
22
///‘
Zee:
aPas
raze
2: LL
27
prrly)
7
P A/j/
7 ZP
//" te zr * "
.{’/
Z /
Z
4
g i=
22 -
=~
=
(es
5
x~
ep nee
a ZZ --<
_- mete sey
orf?
adm
m\\ \\\}\\I\ 'At
iS WUK \
: ,a" m/ "~ fea ~. *.09." "s C
by j ‘ \‘\ I $5“! lv PA Vl‘ f 4 ~ < II‘ f S 2a * ; . # \‘ A \f\/N\\‘ ingly t/71 #4 t, 4 $
W A! U8 * sd C. o 54 t .f R ; a « he b i Yah "~ 4 $l. /
«nA 4 AAL} ..") + a f o t 1 it" hops ($ cash pr a
a 4 ( (4 x Y # i 3 "p ff £ lg” l % é
Img d RE H0 . P » 4! /A & m mA *
* ‘Aa AY ' ( sette: a 3
gy ssd."
Soa,
s \\\\ € g
Js %*
s A8
S
(
Cl
® Up)
ta ats
UNE
F cit".
e
sile anda
s Wi
”Sig-If}; |
a n’,’
A4 ihe Cake eats eton
Hi droid
hme
> HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
the city, which if taken would certainly be looted and burned. 'The French
and English, accordingly, joined the Imperialists and on August 18th, 1860,
they met with heroic resolution the shock of the rebel charge. A desperate
battle followed, in which the so-called Heavenly King was repulsed, but not
efitirely beaten. Rallying his forces on the following day, the rebel king
returned to the charge, when the desperate fighting which distinguished the
preceding day was repeated. But this time the results were more decisive, for
the rebels were dispersed with great slaughter and driven by the pursuing
allies until they had to retire to Soochow.
After a short period of inactivity at Soochow, the Heavenly King went to
Nanking, from which point, in October, he sent forth four immense armies to
attack the Imperialists along the Yangtze river, in a district of some four
hundred miles. The ports along this fiver had been opened up to foreign
trade by the Pekin treaty, so that the British Naval Commander,. Bir James
Hope, ascended the river with his fleet, and, obtaining an interview with the
rebel king, obtained from him a promise not to interfere in any way with the
trade of that river, and also not to make any demonstration on. Shanghat . for
the period of one year, both of which promises were faithfully fulfilled.
But the year 1861 was full of disasters to the Heavenly King, who in trying
to capture Hankow, was driven from that metropolis back again into the neigh-
borhood of Shanghai. 'The rebel king now notified Sir James Hope that upon
the explratmn of: the years truce he would move upon Shanghai, which, despite
the warnings given him in reply, he proceeded to do in January, 1862.
The allied forces-French and British-resolved to defend the city and also
to form a junction with Ward, who was still at with a force
of 1000 well-drilled Chinese soldlers The result of this alliance was the rout
of the rebels again,. who 'were driven to Ning-po. The fighting coutinued,
however, but in September, Ward was killed in a skirmish, and was succeeded
in command of the Ever-Victorious Army by Burgevine, who, however, was
cashiered for looting the local Chinese treasury of Shanghai, in January following.
Up to this time the two American adventurers had been in practical com-
mand of the allies, but with their disappearance the British Government was
formally applied to for a new commander. 'This step was rendered the more
necessary by a refusal of the British and French to lend any aid towards a
suppression of the rebellion, more than to guard the frontier within thirty miles
of Shanghai, where the foreign interest was entitled to protection.
The request for a new commander of the Ever-Victorious Army was conveyed
to General Staveley, who referred the matter to the Horse Guards, but in turn it
was sent back to him for action. 'The result was the selection of Gordon, who was
soon alter given the title of CGeneral, affd was raised to the post of Mandarin.
THE DEFEAT OF HOLLAND.
Before taking active command of the army, Gordon asked for a month's
time, to be spent by him in an examination of the surrounding country. During
\n
N...
yeh
hk
os
t
S Is
DEATH QOF WARD AT THE HANDS OF THF REBELS
(281)
28; HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
this preparatory work, fitting him the better, by giving him a knowledge of
the topography of the region through which he was soon to inaugurate a vigor-
ously aggressive campaign, for the work he was about to undertake, Gordon
suffered a Captain Holland, of the Marine Light Infantry, to take temporary |
command. Holland, hoping to gain at once a reputation for skilful generalship,
collected a force of 7500 men with which he attacked the walled city of Taitsan,
the attack resulting in bis inglorious defeat and the loss of all his cannons and
ammunition. 'This victory greatly elated the rebels, while correspondingly
depressing the Imperialists, and produced such a reaction that Gordon hastened
to take command of the now demoralized army, before one-half his month's
leave had expired. ' f
Gordon found it necessary to reorganize his army, and after infusing it
with some of his own indomitable courage, he led it, though only 1000 strong,
in an attack on the rebel stronghold at Fushan, on the Yangtze river.. 'This
place he bombarded until it was evacuated, and then without halting he marceilted
on Chanzfu, inland some ten miles, which he relieved, to the intense delight
of the citizens, who had been surrounded for several weeks by the rebels and
until starvation was threatening. w
' _-_ THE SIEGE OF TAITSAN, AND HORRIBLE TORTURES. '
With this success, which brought to his aid the confidence of the Impe-
rialists, Gordon was able to make the amplest provision for his army in the way
of providing pay and effective arms for his soldiers. He now had a well
equipped army of 3000 men, with which he determined to lay siege to Taitsan,
although it was garrisoned by a force of 10,000 rebels, among whom were many
English, French and American renegades. His first act was to cut the line
of communication between Taitsan and Quinsan and Soochow, and then to move
a line of breastworks towards the city. His approaches were gradual but
constant until within one hundred yards of the walls, when he opened a
tremendous fire on the battlements, silencing the guns of the enemy and permitting
him to bridge the moat that surrounded the walls with gun-boats that had
_-moved up the river to his aid. In two hours after the attack opened a breach
was made in the walls, but at dreadful expense, for now the battlements were
remounted, from which a storm of leaden hail poured down upon the assailants.
Twice the Imperialists were repulsed, but, cheered on by their heroic com-
mander, they charged again to the breach and at length were swept through
and over the walls by the impetuous ranks that closed up from behind. 'The
city was taken by this irresistible assault, and several thousands of the rebels
made prisoners. Among these were seven special offenders whom the Man-
darins decreed should suffer the penalty of a slow and torturous death. Gordon
had mo sympathy with the manner of punishment that the Imperialists, accord-
ing to all Chinese customs, inflicted upon their enemies, but his influence, great
as it was, could not prevent it. 'The seven unfortunates, who had themselves
inflicted a similar torture upon Imperialist prisoners who had fallen into their
283
HEROES OF THE DARK -CONTINENT.
hands, were taken to a place near Waikong,
and were there tied up by their arms
on. 'To increase
ti
public view five hours before decapita
and legs and exposed to
PREPARING A PRISONER FOR TORTURE.
arrows were forced through their bodies in various
h was cut out of the right arm of each victim,
the torture, while thus hanging,
places and a large piece of fles
HEROES OF FHE DARK - CONTINENT. 285
'so: that when they were finally brought before the executioner they were so
far exhausted as to be insensible to their last but- more merciful. punishment.
After the brilliant victory at Taitsan, Gordon's name became a household
word in Cliina and he appeared to them as the matchless, the unconquerable, the
Ever-Victorious Englishman. With this reputation he was able at length to
force the mandarins to treat their prisoners of war with more humane consid-
eration, so that tortures like those described were not repeated.
Gordon's next effort was the reduction of the- great fortifications around
Quinsan and capture of the city, which he accomplished in a three days' attack, in
which the enemy lost 5000 men while his own fatalities numbered only two killed
and five drowned. -
After garrisoning this large city and most valuable strategical point he
continued his victorious march towards Soochow, the capital of the empire, and
the most important city on the grand canal. In this place was the flower of
the Taiping army with a force estimated at 30,000... Although he now had at
his command hardly. 10,0600 men, and the city which he had resolved to invest
was the 'best fortified of all the cities of the kingdom, yet he seemed to have
the utmost reliance in his ability to effect its capture. Accordingly, he sent two
ofhis small gunboats up the canal, which with little opposition captured the
canal outposts of the place. He then, with his main- army, swept around to
the eastward and planted his siege guns against the other outposts. Simul-
taneously with the beginning of a bombardment of the outer posts he made an
assault upon Leeku, which soon capitulated, and with its fall followed that of
-Wauti, which completed the investment of Soochow.
f A HELLISH NIGHT.
The most serious obstacles were yet to be met, for though the outposts
had been reduced and the siege fairly begun, the strength of the main fortifi-
cations was yet to be determined, as well as the resolution of the defenders.
Eleven days of investment had given neither side any advantage, when Gordon
determified to make a night attack, which he did by assaulting the north-east
angle at ore o'clock in the morning. An advance was made: on. the outer
stockade, which progressed favorably until the advance guard had clambered
upon the breastworks. All had: been still-up to this time, when suddenly hell .
itself seemed to open and from its sulphurous bowels gushed out a sheet of
flame that gave to creation such murderous missles as grape-shot and bullets.
It was an awful moment, in which the riot of death held high carnival, against
which even Gordon himself could not make the magic wand which he was
supposed to carry effective.. But though- he could not stem the tide, he. fell
back gracefully on its current, and with his shattered contingent rushed back
to the guns that thundered both death and applause. Though repulsed, with
serious loss, Gordon had given blow for blow, and when morning broke there
was a row of dead men on either side of the broken walls.
Even though the- rebels had -beaten 'back their enemrtes, they felt " that a
ram!
D
C
ON
N*
AFTER THE BATTLE.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. _ 387
capitulation of the city was only a question of time, and so general was their
fears of disaster attending the result of further defence, that several of the
Taiping generals became anxious not only to surrender, but they actually sent
a proposal to Gordon to come over to the Imperialists, with several thousands
of their men. In order to accomplish this proposed desertion, they requested
Gordon to make an attack on the east gate, by which the deserters would be
able to separate from the other rebels, and thus escape from the main body
without a knowledge of their intention being discovered.
In pursuance of the proposal received, Gordon brought his siege guns
again into action on the point indicated, and opened such a tremendous fire
that the stockades were soon reduced and many large breaches made in the
walls ; but an entrance to the city was not yet open, and more desperate fight-
ing would be necessary before reaching the inner walls. j
An interview was arranged between several of the rebel generals and
Gordon, at which the former promised to abstain from action during the next
assault. it they were guaranteed immunity; from - harm by the Imperialists
upon the city's capitutation. 'This agreement was received with favor, the
more so because Gordon's available force was now only 5500 men, and the -
inner wall of the city was protected by a deep moat of appalling width. 'To
demonstrate their sincerity, the deserting generals even arranged to surrender
one of the gates of the city, but in this promise Gordon did not place the
greatest confidence, though by way of enforcing compliance he put on a bold
front and declared that if it were not done, he would not be responsible for the
conduct of his soldiers.
f MURDER OF THE DESERTING GENERALS.-
On the following day the attack was renewed, but so little resistance was
offered that Gordon made no stop until he entered the city and set the Imperial
flag on the walls He found the place in the wildest confusion, which was
doubly confounded by the looting soldiers and the high-leaping flames that shot
up from hundreds of burning buildings. By heroic resolution Gordon finally
restrained the rapacity of his soldiers and gradually restored order, but when
he came to make inquiries about the deserters to whom he had promised protection
he found that they had all been murdered, and that too by order of General
Ching, of the Imperialist force, who was present with Gordon when the promise
of immunity was made. 'This act of treachery, in which his own honor was
deeply involved, so sensibly affected Gordon that he burst into tears. But grief
was almost immediately followed by a spirit of vengeance, which he vowed
against the perpetrators of this most damnable act. Gordon therefore armed him-
self, and went in quest of Ching, whom he determined to kill and thus compel an
atonement for the crime. His anger was also likewise directed against Li, who
was governor of the province, and was present at the interview with the deserters,
adding his approval of the protection thus promised, but who assisted in the
execution. Gordon sought for these two high officers in every quarter of the
288 HEROES OF PHE DARK CONTINENT.
city, and even called upon his army to aid in locating them, but they had
learned of the outraged General's intentions and made good their escape.
Being unable to bring Ching and Ii to a summary justice, Gordon felt
that the only course open to him now was in resigning command of the army,
feeling that further service with such barbarians would be the lending of ai
active support to their inhuman, treacherous and villainous policies.
. REWARDED BY THE EMPEROR.
Two months of inactivity now intervened, with Gordon's resolution to
abandon the service still unshaken. 'The Emperor, however, had the good
***,
GORDON'S AUDIENCE WITH THE TAIPING REBELS.
judgment to appreciate the value of his services, and not only sent him a medal
of the highest honor, but also ten thousand taels (fifteen thousand dollars) as
a special compliment to his heroism and military genius displayed at the siege
of Soochow. 'The former Gordon received with manifestations of pleasure, but
the latter he rejected as being, in his mind, too intimately connected with the
perfidious acts of Ching and Li. Gradually, however, his anger subsided under
the assurances that the country would not regard him as having any sympathy
with the murderers, and especially under the Emperor's kindly offices, who
HEROES - OF 'FHE DARK CONTINENT
even commupicated to the Queen of England the noble services for which he
had become indebted to her distinguished subject. Added to all these persua-
Cex K“ f“
Ges
X<-
Css fi' Ses
E
R
Wiha one
mt $533" 51
RSN
7flmt‘fiij, (st
$6 R . R b N Nd ‘ f AFT malady
a l"
& rs
t x
I
d
7
a
x ass
toll
lkv)‘ hl
sll
ze
o
Amnet
RH
.
, St sma: omor). 'l : & +
k j \‘\3%e\§\§j§§ Rad ,‘ . ,0'1"' w T4 4 "x_ ¢ P $33?
gx amii rise 9] T S
Bst \»*§‘i¥\“\03‘ moe uta s
Ns
7 Mu
i
b A e af f mt a m$$§5fl
¢ ie 4
g Cat C¢i§i§s¢§l§§§® MSA a
Prizm»
%,
a
cal
Ts
%
3 is
waw a
& RJ (eta n . Ts, Ior kvfisfi'hfi“
a “we“‘wfivf s oe Rs boi pal
\ § i
%
C b’JV'I p
flag;
Neural
Pa
Mit
tea
§ in
m Nav
&
mast
e
wold
ames
p a ste tare.
EXECUTION OF 'THE DESERTING GENERALS
sive, as well as mollifying influences, Gordon was brought to consider the great
work which he had undertaken, and which was more than two-thirds accom-
19 * f
ago HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
plished when Soochow fell. 'To relinquish what had been gained would lose to
him the honor so gloriously won, so that a keen appreciation of the situation,
which came only after more mature consideration, at length led him to resume
command of the Ever-Victorious Army and renew hostilities against the rebels.
On the 19th of February, 1864, Gordon quitted Quinsan with a force of
nearly »ten thousand, and marched against the rebel strongholds in the mid-
interior, where he must depend for supplies almost wholly on such forage as he
could obtain. He had not proceeded many miles towards Yesing, before he
discovered that the country had been ravaged by the rebels to such an extent
that. millions of people had been left tu a starving state. Indecd at one village
he found the inhabitants not only without shelter, but so reduced by lack of
food that the survivors were feeding off the bodies of the dead. But the despe-
rate poverty of 'the people was. at. least one advantage to Gordon, for it made
them anxious to join the Imperialists, both for revenge against the rebels and
to relieve their indescribable distress. Thousands accordingly signed their
allegiance to the Emperor, and though generally without arms, gave Gordon
considerable assistance. . ‘
THE STORMING OF KINTANG. - f
On March Ist, the Imperialists entered Yesing and four days later Liyang
also capitulated. After a rest of only two days, Gordon again resumed the
march and soon threw his army against the great city and stronghold of Kin-
tang.: Hete the rebels made a desperate resistance, beating back three terrific
assaults of the Impermhsts in the second of wh1ch Gordon was badly wounded
in the leg, and in the last the Ever-Victorious Army, deprived of its heroic
commander, was beaten and forced to retreat back to Liyang.
Gordon was badly hurt, but his restlessness and indomitable courage would
not suffer Him to keep his couch for more than a week, and .with lis leg in a
swollen, feverish and still bleeding condition, he again headed his. little army
and at once began driving the rebels from village to village and 1uto their
capital strongholds. 'The country through which his operations had to be made
was one vast desolation, with starvation on every side, and cannibalism a neces-
sity at almost every home. 'To subsist his army was possible only by beating
the enemy from place to place and capturing their supplies. He was therefore
forced to conduct his movements with the utmost rap1d1ty, and keep constantly
on the enemy's flank, or at their heels.
BLOWING UP THE GATES.
Gordon finally drove the rebels into Waissoo, which he captured - after a
brief assault, then marched on to Chanchu-fu, Wthh was held by twenty thousand
of the Taipings, who were commanded by Hu-Wang, one of the bravest and
most despetate men fu all China. This place was invested," but it held out for
several days and repulsed the assaults made against it until the Imperialists
began to believe its walls impregnable. Communication was established with
several of the rebels who, like those in Soochow, expressed a wish to desert,
am
fee )| es! s) \o,
is l a)
IM
[L Al
A
S
if
\
A Tod
A disk; \
Brak /
tad 10§;_
h gig? e-
fl”
pN
ya p
Toe Pfi%§=j\5
fag “his, f; Ac TL
waallfé‘fy
No
Al <
STORMING OF KINTANG.
(291)
292 _- HEROES-OR- CONTINENT
and this, through Gordon's strategy, led to an exposure of the north gate, which
was blown down and gave entrance to the Inlperlahsts who swarmed upon the
rebels and killing thousands took other thousands prlsoners many of whom,
including Hu-Wang, were beheaded.
About this time an order was received from the British Crown withdraw
ing permission, given two years before, for English officers to take service
under the Chinese Government. Had it come a month earlier the rebels might
have ultimately gained control of the government, but with the fall of Chanchu-fu
there was not enough vitality left for the dying snake of rebellion to wag its
BEHEADING THE PRISONERS.
tail any longer. It now fell to pieces with astomshlng rapidity, those who had
thus far held out being anxious to surrender in order to escape the punishment
that would follow capture.
TRAGIC END OF THE FALSE PROPHET.
Nanking was now the only stronghold in the hands of the rebels, and this
city was invested and on the eve of surrender when Gordon dlsmlssed his
army, as being no longer needful to the government, and retired to Shanghcu
Here he was received with demonstrations of homage by the merchants of that
place, who made him some splendid presentations, notwithstanding it was well
known with what reluctance he accepted any substantial favors. In addition
emp ..iiifiii’Mfg,Jiigiifizfifl mg!igfgggigflgifiiiiWW$3,133 pet flii’fikifiii M“
W: jflflgy‘fdfjrnfzW} M | Him] Mh";‘inzfll(.u } {I N( M}
| f“’!!1(i?,};mk|j j ”i J “I; awn," T H {M' [My I |
| f”u9f‘ilf1jfilm"”w'fin f 45ng 6 | L
A. §
( 8 \E ”l S‘- “i, ‘F" if he i‘ y “amt, H
f f | P § “$5“ "$2“ f if" sll wk 51 BA R
i WM) ”I Jam'iflh'fifid, "-‘.»' i h ENM km t f
Iosif
Ni
, |
)
M
t
(ith f
I “I! I
Wane
(2393)
Aid Ml 1} xif ii” (I l
ul ata ..
lout in a
LIL zJ’flmhp'd? dL
EATER reddit “M!“ M
6
lt (.
n!).
4
=~.
Pees: ce
fu. aes
<<<
cae i-
Y
fnk wou | oT my”???
W do Fama P"
ST
i Lassec c tod if
foy “Mm (Lute @a t.
MS “HI i [m y a; cf: 1
< ilf' i Mlfi‘flwzfimfiffi’ lmfi
C-- I ane:
7 WW m [muffin]:
a TC
&
294 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
to this the Emperor presented him with an address embodying an acknowledg-
ment of his distinguished services, and invested him with the rank of 'Ti-Tu
(the Yellow Jacket), the highest within the power of that potentate to bestow.
-On the fall of Nanking, which occurred a few days after the dismissal of
Gordon's army, the great Hung, once a village school-teacher and later the
Heavenly King, the so-called vicegerent of God, the head of the Taiping rebell-
ion, committed suicide by shooting himself through the head. 'This was his
miserable end, but he deserved a more tragic fate. No other human being has
been charged with perpetrating such cruelties as he. Prisoners who fell into
his hands-so they were not foreigners-were put to inconceivably horrible
tortures ; flaying alive was the more common method he employed, but as the
humor possessed him he broke the bones, crushed the flesh, drove spikes into
the body, and burned and harrowed his victims. His last act, preceding that of his
own taking off, was the hanging of all his wives, nearly one hundred in num-
ber. Thus lived and perished the great false prophet of China, so hotrifying
in his every aspect, so inhuman in character, that the' tragedy of his ending
had the one good effect of destroying the hope of any succeeding fanatic bound
by his abominable creed. ; : :
CHAPTER XIN.
IN THE KHEDIVE'S SERVICE.
EACE having been restored in China, and foreign trade relieved
from the incubus of a rebellion that had so long paralyzed it,
Gordon felt that his next duty was to his own country. Accord-
ingly, in Jautlary, 1865, he sailed for home and. on his arrival
- there he was met by the acclamations of his countrymen, who hailed
him as one of England's greatest heroes. In the same year he
received the appointment of commanding Royal Engineer at
Gravesend, where he remained six years superintending the con-
struction of the Thames deferices. In 1871 he was made a member of the
European Commission of the Danube and spent eighteen months engineering
improvements at the mouth of that river.
In 1873 the Ashantees became very troublesome and were planning an
attack on Cape Coast Castle, and otherwise seriously interfering with British
trade on the coast of West Africa. A general request was almost immediately
voiced by the press that Gordon should be appointed to take command of the forces
it had been decided to send against the Ashantees; but while the popular
demand was being urged there was a request for his services in a new field,
where energy, adroitness, and courage such as his were particularly necessary.
Sir Samuel Baker had returned from the Soudan, as already described,
but though partially successful in establishing Egyptian sovereignty in the
Soudan, much yet remained to be done, and that too immediately, or else all of
Baker's work would be speedily lost, leaving the Soudan in more chaotic condi-
tion than before. In 1873 Gordon left Galatz, where he had been being serving as
vice-counsel of the Danubian Commission, and at the solicitation of Nubar Pasha
in the year following entered the Egyptian service. 'The Khedive proposed to
give him $50,000 per annum for his services, but he refused to accept more
than $10,000, the sum which he was then receiving from his own government.
THE INSINCERITY OF THE KHEDIVE.
Baker had succeeded in bringing all the tribes of northern Africa-south
as far as the central lake basin, and west to Lake Tchad-under- Egyptian
rule, but his efforts at suppressing the infamous slave trade in that large dis-
trict had proved futile, principally because of the open countenance lent to the
trade by the Egyptian government, which issued licenses to the slave traders and
fostered their horrible traffic. But there was such a cry from all civilized
countries for its suppression that the Khedive was forced to assume a position
(205)
296 A HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT,
antagonistic to its continuance, and to carry out the idea that he sincerely
desired a removal of this blot upon his rule, he employed Baker, as governor
of Ismalia, to suppress it." When Baker returned, discouraged by the. luke.
warmness, if not direct conniving of the Khedive, Gordon was engaged to con-
tinue this shameful mask of philanthropy
He had beef in Cairo only. a-short while before he discovered signs of
insincerity in the Khedive's motives, for in writing home he says: "TI think 1
can see the true motive of this expedition, and believe it to be a sham to catch
the attention of the English people." +
But though Gordon discovered, through the thin veneering of feigned sym-
pathy for the poor blacks of Africa, a desire to secret
ane aet l
oo
pro ae
\\\\\
hot
, ~a
aU t_
ores
t
A
w's Pe
7 bek. $2
7 Ets $
paw
ae" 7 272
t
se 'a Z
H /§§>9' ("1/
P
£
* C Hees G fen
zz -
f P Lp
17
AY) S
i. xB
‘ nr mme
F 7
-~
ut "a dics C k
; P C ‘m
n
AJ a A
( f a
I Fog }
\ Ys ;
Fuste =
22
PX \|
+ 7ZAU
rt
Roe 42 =
k +7 _ y a (s
a'. I ay . Les No
7 Asea ne red ve "l Ni >
Mec Ah \ {/= 7
7 LGH, \ 7
p - poring 2
[4
db w \ =
15"? ("ax R \\({\J ¥ aA ~ <—,~/
c Ale A ~ C
at
F all
Laat
GORDON'S. INFANTRY ESCORT.
trade, his own sympathies were so excited that even without the Khedive's
co-operation he still hoped to be able to relieve some of the untold miseries
which followed an open and unrestricted license of slave abduction and trading.
OFF FOR CENTRAL AFRICA. -
Early in February, 1874, Gordon left Cairo for Suakiim, with a long retinue
of servants, 2:0 troops, and a staff consisting of Romulus Gessi, an Italian,
Mr. Kemp, a distinguished military engineer, two brothers named Linant, Mr.
Russell, Mr. Anson, Colonel Chaille Long, an American, and Abou Saoud, an
ex-slave dealer who had given Baker so much trouble. &
&
HEROES OF 'THE CONTINENT. 297
The party reached Suakim February 25th, and a fortnight later they crossed
the desert to Berber, where the following assignments were made: Gessi and
Anson were first sent to open communications with the natives in the region
of the Bahr Gazelle, whose friendship was essential to the purposes in view,
and among whom it was desirable to learn the workings of the slave-trade.
Kemp and Russell were dispatched to the falls below Gondokoro, to learn if the
Nile was navigable at that season around them. 'The Linants undertook the
more responsible duty of visiting the several tribes that are to be met with
GORDON REVIEWING HIS TROOPS AT KHARTOUM.
Colonel Long was at once given charge of the district of Gondokoro, which placed -
him in command of a section of country extending to Lake Victoria Abou
Saoud, though known to be very treacherous, was most serviceable to the expedi-
tion in affording information about the country and people, which he knew so
well, and in being chief interpreter between Gordon and the natives.
-__ The expedition departed from Berber after a short stay and proceeded on
to Khartoum, only three days' sail distant, where upon his arrival he issued
the following proclamation : f f
"By reason of the authority of the Governor of the Provinces of the
298 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
Equatorial Lakes, with which His Highness, the Khedive, has invested me, and
the irregularities which until now have been committed, it is henceforth decreed:
"1. That the traffic in ivory is the monopoly of the Government.
"2. No person may enter these Provinces without a permit from the
Governor-General of the Soudan, such permit being available only after it shai:
have received the indorsement of competent authority at Gondokoro or else-
where. _
*3. No person may recruit or organize armed bands within these Provinces.
SCENE ALONG THE NILE.
"4. The importation of firearms and gunpowder is prohibited.
*s. Whosoever, shall disobey this decree will be punished with all the rigor
\ s
of the military law,." " GORDON.
ADVENTURES ALONG THE NILE.
March 22d Gordon set sail for Gondokoro, accompanied by Abou Saoud,
while his staff set out on- their respective assignments, but on this same day
one of the Linant brothers died of fever, which sad event served to cast a
deep gloom, approaching to despondency, upon all the party. However Gordon
proceeded, fortified by his resolution to perform. the duties entrusted to hin.
As his vessel passed slowly np the river he began to grow interested in the
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. ~* * soo
strange sights and sounds that greeted his ears. Along the banks were rows
of stately and statuesque whale-headed storks, cranes and beautiful egrets.
Z
Lo Poe ~,
prc stil z
//f
antal bts ate a ,
rrr av a cnn
Leanna
ze
sy
«-&
\%\\ “v d “t"
A $5 us
<.
bs Mxfifi &
NE
t
s
\
t ®
8
scat
i
age“ yq l\\\§\
Bs
\\"\"\ “l“ :
fifi‘fi» f
Sat a
M
men ME
A SPORTIVE HIPPOPOTAMUS.
From tnese singular specimens of the feathered life with which the banks
abounded his surprised eyes wandered along the shores that were animated
/
L
200 ~~ HEROES -_OF THE CONTINENT.
with grotesque reptiles, huge crocodiles basking themselves, or clumsily wading
through the mud and clambering over tach other! Soon there broke upon his
vision other yet more startling specimens ~of Nilotic life; gigantic amphibians
that brought a realization of the leviathan of Scriptures. Crossing the river,
or rustling the reeds along the banks and breaking down large swaths of grass
under their ponderous tread, were giant hippopotami, the lords of this wondrous
Fiver. : ;
His interest in these moving scenes of animated nature had heretofore been
that of a spectator, exciting in him a more reverential admiration for the works
of One who had thus diversified the world with such surprising creations; but his
revery and wonder were suddenly disturbed by the unexpected uprising of a
hippopotamus, whose great head struck the bottom of a small boat in tow of
his vessel, and in which several sheep were being transported to provide meat
for the expedition: - 'The force of the impact was such that the boat was lifted
several feet sheer of the water, and the sheep were thrown from both sides into
the tiver, no doubt more astonished at the rudeness that was Gordon. It was
now time for a demonstration of active interest in the moving scenes of nature,
and thus while menu were sent at once to recover the sheep, Gordon seized
his rifle and opened fire on the beast that had so discomfited his pious
reflections. f ; »
April 2d the district occupied by the Diuka tribe was reached, and several
of these naked, wizard worshippers wete seen, but it was with the greatest
difficulty that a chief could be induced to come on board even to Teceive a
splendid present of beads. Two days later, however, several others were met
that made themselves most offensively familiar, their misery no doubt serving
to make them less timid. f
THE MAN-HUNTERS OF FASHODA. :
- Gordon reached Gondokoro April 16th, and was met by those at the mission
with songs and dances, but most of the people gave him sullen looks, which
indicated their unfriendliness to his purpose. Here the old slave-traders ruled
supreme, while their acts of rapine had rendered the country insectire even
within half-a mile of the town.. Thus Gordon. was in danger from two sources,
his intentions as yet being unknown to the people that he had been sent to
protect. |
But despite the danger of his surroundings he set fearlessly to work to
win the confidence of the blacks, and by first sending them presents of beads,
rings and cloths, and following this by giving supplies of grain to those most
sorely pressed by hunger, he soon came to be known as a friend to the oppressed. |
He Had not beeu many days in Gondokoto before it became too apparent that
the Arabs in the place were operating as much in the interest of the Govern-
ment as in their own. 'They were detected in stealing cattle from the natives
and in kidnapping and making slaves of the owners ; and then sharing their
booty with officers very close to the Khedive. Directly after making his first
HEROES OF THB DARK CONTINENT. 301
discovery of this kind, by accident he gained possession of a letter from some
man-hunters of Fashoda, announcing to their correspondent their success in
capturing 2000 head of cattle and half that number of negroes, which were then
on the way to Gondokoro, en route for Cairo. He waited his opportunity, and
on the arrival of these spoils at Gondokoro a few days later, Gordon confiscated the
cattle and liberated the slaves. As the latter were now far from their homes,
several of them were taken into his own service, and the rest, such as desired
to do so, were allowed to depart. This act, which was followed by the
imprisonment of the chief slavers, had a great influence among the natives
favorable to the purpose of his appointment. Henceforth he was nowhere so
secure as when among the tribes, who 111a111fested their affecuon by touching
his hands and ff:ffT'fmeflfiwpwmpmfi o acs
even kissing his
clothing. He
established : an-
other station
ou the: Sobat
river, wlhicte ' hc
remained t wo
months, doing
many acts of ;
kindness to the :
nsitives, but on ||
returning to {1
Gondokoro he W
found the gar-
fison'in a de- f
plorable state
and his officers
engaged in an ## ie toes J7 14
intrigue against _ THE Fort Ar CoONbORORO:
him. Iwo of his men, Raout Bey and Abou Saoud, were ready to rise in
rebellion, and so insubordinate that he was forced to make an example of the
latter by dismissing him and reporting his intrigue to the Khedive.
Getting rid of Abou Saoud, Gordon reinstated Raouf Bey, upon his promise
of future good behavior, and then went about establishing new stations, which
he founded at Sobat, Bohr Lado, Rageef, Fatiko, Duffili and Makrake, which
latter post was on the frontler of the Niam-Niam country. Up to this time he
had made his expedition more than self-sustaining through reprisals from the
slave dealers and collections of license from the ivory dealers.
Bo Fok, I mcr? " Sh Auris
, ___ OPENING A ROUTE TO THE LAKE REGIONS.
Col. Long had been sent to visit the great Uganda king, M'tesa, and his
reception by that potentate was so cordial, and so encouraging for friendly and
302 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
profitable relations, that in 1875 Gordon decided to open a route to that country
and plant the Egyptian flag on the shores of Lakes Victoria and Albert.- His
first act in the accomplishment of this object was in forming a junction between
Gondoroko and Foweira by establishing a chain of fortified posts between the
two, only a day's journey apart. He also wished to open a route to Mombaz
Bay, 250 miles south of Zanzibar, from which it would be easier to reach the
central region from the coast than up the Nile via Khartoum. 'To enable him
to carry out his wishes he asked the Khedive to send a steamer with 150 men
/!/// f '4 f
l/ # | 4) 7 XT
| 4 \
COL. LONG S RECEPTION BY 'THE KING OF UGANDA
to Mombaz Bay and there found a station, and then order the men to push on
to M'tesa's country. Hoping that his request would be granted, Gordon started
up the west bank of the Nile to Duffili, 800 miles almost due south of Khartoun.
Scarcely had he departed, however, when news reached him from Foweira, 100
miles south of Duffili, that Kaba Rega,. King of Unyoro, was planning an attack
against the ex-slave dealers who were now in the Khedive's service in that
section. 'This report, soon after confirmed, determined Gordon to move against
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 303
Kaba Rega with the purpose of wresting Unyoro from him and giving it to
Rionga, who it will be remembered gave Baker such valuable assistance, and
was appointed his Vakeel in 1872. But almost at the moment of making this
resolve, Gordon learned that the station of Rageef was in danger from "a
threatened attack bya chief named Bedden. 'To save this post, therefore, Gordon
made a rapid march to Rageef, and as the most effectual means for breaking
the power of this hostile chief he decided to raid his cattle pens. 'This new
plan of warfare was successfully accomplished, and the chief's submission was
immediately afterwards secured by a E=
returit to hinr-of twenty cows which
Gordon had thus. captured.: The im-
portance of such a move against the
Soudanese will more clearly appear
when the fact is understood that all
the pastoral" tribes of Africa set a
higher value upon their cattle than
upon any of their other possessions;
indeed, 'they regard. them with af
affection greater than that which they
feel for one another. A chief could
more resignedly bear the loss of his
wife, children, and liberty itself, than
the capture ofa single head of his
herds. 'This singular estimation and
attachment is therefore often taken
advantage of by travellers who are
brought into hostile contact with the
natives, 'and particularly by Arab \\ WAH
slave dealers, who steal cattle and
return them again upon the surren- (/ 4
der to them of so many slaves. fly
N
~
\
"o
vat
\ IN
Rs xi! A MU W
After the successful cattle sortie U* -_ «
KABBA REGA'S FETICHES.
thus effectually in the power of Rionga, Kabbd Rega's chiefs came in and
acknowledged their submission, so that peace was restored.
Events had been favorable to his purposes thus far in the year, so that
Gordon had time to carry out his resolution to explore Lake Victoria, and plant
the Egyptian flag on its shores. Accompanied by Gessi, his Italian lieutenant,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT: 309
he started with two boats for Magungo and the lakes. Reaching the
shores, he hoisted the flag, and then sent Gessi to circumnavigate the Victoria,
jam
\\(Ԥ,
AEA
$
»Z
2
ead]
37W nt
a mA
[W
h,
a
AM io \‘
; . upp h/fi‘gkm
A (f 58/94,vame ;
As \ ad A Wp
Mu: H comi,
t" J (P" ~|-%’/,,,I: -.‘£"'I|";“\‘ (te
MMF Jim/W455. eet
Ry
U
f TOSSED TO HIS DEATH.
which he accomplished in nine days, finding it to be 140 miles long and 50
miles wide.
4 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
STAMPEDED BY ELEPHANTS.
From Lake Victoria Gordow proceeded to Lado, at which place lie met
with a singular adventure. Elephants about this district were very numerous,
aud. on the- outskirts of Lado was a cut iti the high bank which enabled the
servants to reach the river to draw water, and. frequent travel made the place
a very inviting approach for elephants coming across from the other side in the
night time. ;
The killing of & villager 'in the neighborhood, a short while before, in
which a wounded elephant pursued and overtook the man and tossed him on
high to lis death, had served to give the natives great uneasiness, so that the
feast intimation of the approach of a herd threw them into a state of conster-
nation.. A few nights after Gordon had encamped at the place, on his present
visit, the alarm was sounded that three elephants were crossing the river, and
making their way towards the cut in the bank. The camp was set immediately
in a bustle, and if the natives had been depended upon the elephants might
have pursued their most riotous intent unmolested; but Gordon's well-armed
sentries manifested sufficient contage to stand their ground, and as Gordon
rushed out of his text to the attack a volley was fired at the elephants just
as they reached the shore. While none of the animals were killed, they were
driven back to the other bank, to the intense relief of the village occupauts,
and little less satisfaction to Gordon, who remarks: ' You see, if they landed
and got frightened, they would break down my house in a moment, and do a
deal of damage." f | | |
Gordon continued his operations in the region of Lake Victoria, passing
from one station that he. had established to another, always encouraging the
post, until the expiration of his commussion, October the 6th, when he returned
to Khartoum, thence to Cairo, where he reported to the Khedive, after which
he proceeded directly to London.
CHAPTER XV.
GORDON'S SECOND EXPEDITION IN THE SOUDAN.
A
sma tars
s i
ANC" ONDON received Gordon with demonstrations of intense
= - delight. His services, distinguished though they had been in
=] | =. the employ of foreign governments, were none the less appre-
_ ciated, as exhibiting the generalship and governing instinct
of one of the ablest of Englishmen. At this time affairs in
_ F - Bulgaria were in a chaotic state, with the public insecurity of
- that province so great that it was proposed to make him the
governor, the general belief being that no one could restore
peace throughout the province so quickly as he. A proposition, looking
towards his appointment, was accordingly about to be made to the Powers, but
which was prevented by the receipt of letters of the Khedive calling him again
to Egypt. , f
Gordon had resolved never to re-enter the Egyptian service again to assist
in suppressing the slave-trade, unless he was given command over all the
Soudan, as his previous experience had shown the futility of all his efforts
when his power extended over only a limited district, outside of which the
slave trade was permitted to flourish without restriction. In response to the
Khedive's invitation, Gordon proceeded to Cairo in February, 1877, and was not
only cordially received, but to secure his services again the Khedive granted
his every request. By the desire of Gordon, therefore, Ismail Pasha Yacoub
was removed from the office of Governor-General of the Soudan, and this office
was conferred upon Gordon, who was thus placed in absolute command of a dis-
trict which was 1640 miles long and 700 miles wide. He was provided with
three deputies, one of whom should act as governor of the western Soudan,
another for Dafour, and the third should have charge of the Red Sea littoral ;
thus dividing the Soudan proper into three districts, in all of which Gordon
should establish a government with the special view of suppressing slavery.
f ENDING A WAR IN ABYSSINIA.
In addition to the functions of his office of Governor-General, Gordon was
given a special commission to restore peace in Abyssinia, which was then dis-
tracted by a rebellion against King John, the successor of Theodore. This
rebellion was the result of the elevation of a plebeian to the throne of Abys-
sinia, made possible by the success of English arms, and the promotion to a
chieftainship of a native named Kasa, who had given assistance to Lord Napier
in the war against Theodore. Kasa had been rewarded by a liberal gift of
muskets and ammunition, with which he armed a large and desperate following,
(311)
(¢18)
As
ag
why I 5“
fas d
kes
RECEPTION OF GORDON BY 'THE PRINCE OF BOGOS.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 313
and then proclaimed himself king, under the title of John. ~The rightful suc.
cessor, the heir of Theodore, raised an army to resist the pretender, but his forces
were routed in battle, and the heir was put to torture. King John now rapidly
subdued the several provinces, excepting alone Shoa and Bogos, and instituted a
rule that was more nearly anarchy than government. - Encroachments were being.
made upon Egypt, so that it became necessary, to protect her own subjects on
the Abyssinian border, to annex Shoa and Bogos, which was done in 1874. . 'This
act aroused the enmity of Walad el Michael, hereditary prince of Bogos, who
joined with King John in a crusade against Egypt.
In the first battle that followed the Egyptian troops were badly beaten, but
in the spoils that were taken King John refused to divide with the prince, who
deserted with his army, ostensibly to the Egyptians, though taking no active part,
but holding himself in readiness to take advantage of either. The Abyssinians
were now beaten in turn, and the triangular dispute became so ominous of evil
to his rule, that Jolin sent an ambassador to Cairo to treat with the Khedive.
But the Egyptian ruler refused to receive him, and when he gppeared in the
streets the populace pelted him with stones. ¢
This was the chaotic condition of affairs when Gordon was sent to Magdala,
as the Khedive's representative, to treat with King john. In the middle of
March he reached Masawa by way of the sea route, and from there proceeded to
Keren, which was the capital of Bogos, by camel. The prince, learning his
mission, and hoping to secure the favor of Gordon in an adjudication-which it
virtually was-of the difficulty, sent out 200 cavalry to receive him, by which
he was conveyed in state to the city. Here he was treated with such genu-
flexion as begat his contempt, for he. was not a man to court fawning favors.
As he came into Keren a band of musicians met him, and ten officers were
specially ordered to assist him in dismounting. An escort of 200 infantry and
60 cavalry was also provided to constantly attend him, and altogether such dis-
tinguished consideration was shown him that he writes: "I can truly say no
man has ever been so forced into a high position as I have. How many I
know to whom this incense would be the breath of their nostrils! To. me it is
irksome beyond measure. Eight or ten men to help me off my camel, as if I
were an invalid! If I walk, every one dismounts and walks also; so, furious at
such obsequiousness, I get on again."
& % REMARKABLE DIPLOMACY.
'The Prince's reception of Gordon was hospitable in the extreme, not only
by the military display as described, but also by. personal attenfions. 'This
cordiality was Gordon's opportunity for bringing his diplomacy into use with
tlie best possible results. He accordingly brouglit the prince into his tent
and there read to him lis plans for a settlement of the troubles. In this
decision Gordon notified the prince that Egypt, in deference to the wishes of
the European Powers, desired to end the war, and the proposition of settle-
ment which he was instructed to make, was to give the prinee--a government
314 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
separate from that of King John, which would be composed of three semi-.
civilized tribes. This proposal met with such small favor that the Prince
asked for time to consider it, intending to renew hostilities in another quarter.
At the same time Menelek, King of Shoa, and at present King of, Abyssinia,
had raised an army to dispute with John, and had already captured Gondar.
John was compelled to leave his capital to meet this new invader, but he was
afraid his absence might be the signal for a rebellion in his own city, a.thing
that his uncle, Ras Bario, was threatening. All these complications were in
Gordon's favor, for his shrewdness led him to threaten each with the un-
opposed vengeance of the other, and in the end terminated the troubles, at least
temporarily, which was all that the Khedive had expected him to do.
OFF AGAIN FOR KHARTOUM.
He could no longer remain at the seat of conflict in Abyssinia, for his
services were immediately required at Khartoum to suppress the slave trade,
which had grown again to p
frightful proportions since |=
his departure - from the
place a year before. The
journey to that capital was
made at the rate of thirty
miles per day, through
countless perils and with
the most insignificant, be-
cause cowardly and [#F
treacherous, following. At |-~%%
every station on the way
countless petitions for re-
sy := \::’f$ zg a 2X2. '- ,C *
lief poured in upon him, ...' " " "s. ce-. af Mp.
and meal Kassala a NnUm- MURDER OF GORDON'S CAMEI, DRIVER.
ber. of 'his camel-drivers were killed by Baris, a very hostile tribe occupy-
ing the region between Khartoum and Gondokoro. f
Gordon arrived at Khartoum on the 3d of May, and two days later was
installed as Governor-General before a very large assembly to whom he made
no other speech than a declaration that, " with the help of God, I will hold
the balance level." 'This epigrammatic expression of purpose greatly delighted
the oppressed people, whose poverty so wrought upon his sympathy that he
distributed no less than $5000 out of his own purse among the natives.
The Khedive resolved that Gordon should live in state while representing
the Egyptian Government, and therefore had provided him with a very large
mansion and an attendance of two hundred servants and orderlies. Besides
this it formulated a code of etiquette that the people must conform to when in
his presence, all of which was intensely disagreeable to his democratic disposi-
tion. 'This courtly deference had the effect of creating burning jealousies
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 415
which greatly increased the natural difficulties of his surroundings. 'These were
of a most discouraging nature and might well oppress him with grave fears
and doubts. All the officers of the district had been purchasable by the slave
dealers, and this custom of bribery had not only to be abolished, but the
venials must be punished. He had also to disband 6000 Bashi-Bazouks who
composed the frontier guard, and who were encouraging the slave trade instead
of using any effort to suppress it. Besides these herculean tasks he must sub-
due the vast district of the Bahr Gazelle, which was at the time under the
sway of the slave traders. Could he do it?
_-_ Gordon began his great work by first bringing Khartoum itself under his
fuile. By his generosity he had won the hearts of the natives, and he now
yar?
1/1/11 £414,917
'P
Il Bes
e.
GORDON SEEKING A FRIENDSHIP WITH THE NATIVES.
made himself popular with the people of the place by devising a means for
supplying the town with a rude kind of water-works which gave the citizens
an abundant supply of pure water, and in cleaning the place of its long-
accumulated filth that had made it a very court of death. Thus, under his
orders Khartoum had been quickly transformed from a city of evil and disease
to a place both orderly and healthy, the change being so grateful that the
people hailed him as a benefactor.
f BATTLE WITH THE LEOPARDS.
Hearing that Dafour was threatened, he left Khartoum to succor his small
force there. His army consisted of only 350 poorly armed ragamuffins, and
against these was opposed the great slave dealer Sebehr Pasha, with a force of
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
wn't "ie
SEBEHR PASHA, THE SLAVE KING.
fully 11,000 men. But
notwithstanding these
frightful odds, he
marched through the
country scattering gra-
tuities and so sympa-
thizing with the people
as to win their support.
In this manner, instead
of fighting his way
through them, as a man
of less diplomatic turn
of mind might have
done, he was winning
the most substantial
battles, and putting his
real enemies to discom-
fiture,; : Upon: arrive
ing 'at Dafont., Ire
found himself able to
muster an army of 10,-
'o00. natives, who had
been drawn to his. ass
sistance by the wide-
spread knowledge of
his gsenefons acts,
Even Suleiman, the son
of SeBbehr, with 6000
armed blacks, sought a
junction with him, but
Gordon suspected
treachery and. rejected
the ; offer, whereupon
Suleiman began plot-
ting his murder. But
Gordon took decisive
steps to bring all the
hostile slave traders to
terms, by dispatching a
force of 8000 natives
and 1500 troops, against
the self-crowned sultan,
Haroun, who was pre-
h
if
a
A
a \:
h f \A: ,
&
+>
Nini y
\\@\: Im
U AL \\\>:
\\\\\\\\
y \\
MN
§"
b
7 / r N \ v
I9 f
7 4 If
tf
..\j. \\.
/ / s ; f \\ P
Terp - * I . IIL}
\\M
2 %
7 \\\\\
t
I
WV
U
o
Were
0 JP 7
/ f
UZI
a
4
& # 44
A
(317)
GORDON'S FORCES IN A TERRIFIC STORM.
318 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
tender to the throne of Dafour. Shortly after making a feint against Haroun
he was joined by the Razagats, who could muster 7000 horsemen, and he now
projected an attack against Suleiman. But before carrying this resolve into exe-
cution he learned that the Leopard tribes were threatening Toashia, his own
stronghold, and he turned his troops towards this new enemy. On the march
his army was caught in a terrific rain and wind storm that continued through
the night, and so demoralized his troops that the divisions became separated, and
it was two days before they could be brought together again. 'The columns were
then reformed and the march resumed. Two days later the stronghold of the
Leopards was reached and a fight was begun, in the first charges of which the
Leopards drove Gordon's cowardly troops back to the stockades they had thrown
up before the engagement was opened. But though beaten in open battle, Gor-
don rallied his ragamuffins and contrived to bring them between the Leopards
and a creek from which all the water supply had to be procured. Every assault
they now made was repulsed, and as the heat was really terrific, thirst began
to tell upon them more seriously than bullets. - It was only a short while when
overtures of surrender were made by the Leopards, which Gordon refused to con-
sider except with an acknowledgment of absolute submlssmn, a condition that
they were not long .in accepting.
RAPID ACTION BUT DAYS OF TORMENT.
The Leopards were vanquished, but it was like killing one fly in a swarm.
On every side the enemy was both numerous and vigilant, nearly every station
was sending to him for help, and yet his own army was too cowardly to even
care for itself." Gordon had not only to command, but to execute also.. His
troops, the most miserable, disorderly, thievish and dlsgraceful set of vagabonds,
were one day swearing their loyalty and the next day plotting his destruction..
The slave dealers,. on .the other hand, had a great arniy of well-armed and
courageous soldiery, schooled to danger by the raids they were employed to
make, and brave because they knew the temper of those whom Gordon com-
manded It was a terrible condition. Two hundred well-armed, well-drilled and-
stout-hearted soldiers might easily defeat 20,000 of. sch cowardly curs as com-
posed his army.
There was no morale, no discipline, no fighting qualities, and the officers were
no better than the troops. With these Gordon could do little more than use them
as a show, and even the spectacle of a horde of such men could inspire little terror.
Everything therefore depended upon his own personal resources, but these fortu-
nately he possessed to a phenomenal" extent. He not only put spies into the
camps of his enemies, but set some of his faithful ones to scatter the seeds of
discontent among them. By these means he stirred up a hostility between
Haroun, Suleiman and Sebehr, until they came to look upon one another with
suspicion, and were ready .to aid in -an attack against each other. - 'This was
his only course to prevent his own annihilation, besides, it aided immeasurably
in the accomplishment of his purpose. |
TREATING
WiTH THE LE
a
rm - mus
a mg mt seed hast
p- semi enue ror y a w WM
QPARDS FOR UNG
h wre m viesti,
s # asu HHOH U a tw
F ___ wite _ who eus wey &
(319)
320 -- HBROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
While thus rapidly marching from place to place, giving relief to beleaguered
garrisons and exciting the active sympathy of various tribes, upon which
source he was compelled to rely for recruits, Gordon became a witness to many -
acts of what may be denominated refined cruelty. 'The whole. country was
blighted by plunderers, who not only kidnapped the natives but pillaged
granaries and drove off cattle, until village after village was seen in which
the inhabitants were starving to death, every article of food having been stolen
from them. _ f - ;
Besides these sights of distressing poverty there were others almost daily
witnessed that excited no less compassion. Gangs of slaves, shackled in galling
yokes, were common spectacles. 'These were promptly set at liberty, and their
masters made prisoners, but there were dying slaves by the wayside, women
and children who, being exhausted with hunger, thirst and feebleness, were
ruthlessly brained by their inhuman drivers to prevent them from falling into
other no less rapacious and cruel hands.
BREAKING UP A THIEVES' DEN.
Shaka was the headquarters of the slave traders of the Soudan. Here
they held their markets, committed their greatest excesses, defied the government,
and held a high carnival of iniquity, in which the most inhuman savagery was
conspicuous. Men, women and children were crowded into stockades, packed
as closely as hogs in railroad cars, and .with as little attention to the: filth
that became a natural consequence, as shippers give to their stock. 'The babe
died in its mother's arms, children were trampled to death beneath crowded feet,
and yet the corpses were suffered to lie in the mass of mud, wallow and offal,
the whole putrescent under a fiery sun, no one caring, for human life was
cheap. Though his force was insufficient to contend with the army that the
slavers had gathered about them at this place, yet Gordon determined to march
against it. He accordingly gathered his ragged troops together and made a
forced march towards Shaka, but before reaching the place his approach had
been announced to Suleiman who came out to meet him. 'This young son of
Ssebhr was not so much afraid of Gordon as he was ambitious to secure a
governorship by appointment from the Khedive, and as he held command of the
stronghold of Shaka, Gordon thought he might turn the young man's ambition
to advantage. Accordingly, when Suleiman reached Gordon, coming as a visitor
to his camp, he was cordially received and an interview followed which resulted
in a promise made by Suleiman to abandon the slave trade and give besides
active sympathy towards its suppression. Of course Gordon placed little
dependence in this promise, except as it might temporarily relieve the iniquity
practised at Shaka, nor was he deceived. Suleiman did break down the slave
pens, and made a spasmodic effort to relieve the place of its stigma, which
afforded Gordon the opportunity of making more substantial reforms in garrisoning
the place with a contingent from his own force and the appointment of a sub-
governor for the district. € ‘
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 321
This much accomplished, which he hardly expected could be permanent,
Gordon returned again to Khartoum, from which place he was suddenly summoned
¥
J
R
TN
§
s
Need
Ai f
MURDERING SLAVES THAT BECOME EXHAUSTED.
to Cairo by the Khedive to reform the Egyptian finances; which were now in
a deplorable state. Gordon reached Cairo in March and was received with
21
rP II ME
Hl /
Aly
4
f G
- 4 l
I nu n: I
PIVA mum;
.)
uly
da
yl
~
ass.
Py Z NnnnUt
J
<=
's
(HULL t
-s 02000 vers
BRINGING IN SLAVES TO THE SHAKA MARKET.
' HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT $23
royal cordiality, being taken immediately to the palace, and at a dinner which
followed directly upon his arrival he was placed on the right hand of the
Khedive. The real object of his summons to court, which he very soon learned,
was to make him a figure-head in an inquiry into the Khedive's finances, and
which he resented as an imputation..uipon his honor. He declated & the
Khedive, that if he was placed at the head of a commission of inquiry he
would probe to the bottom and expose every misappropriation. 'This honest
asseveration so discomfited the Khedive that without further ado he sent Gordon
again to Abyssinia to complete the treaties that had been partially made between
ig |
......
T-.
hea LI LL NLP 9 A pon
King John, Menelek and Walad el Michael, the prince of Bogos, on his previous
visit. He finally arranged these complications, and returned again to Khartoum,
disregarding another summons to repair to Cairo to undergo an examination
of the affairs in the Soudan before the Council of Ministers.
| DEATH OF SULEIMAN AND RESIGNATION OF GORDON.
It was now February of 1879, a year after his last departure from Khartoum,
and in his absence another revolt had been made in the Bahr Gazelle district by
the slavers, with Suleiman at the head. He therefore proceeded to Khartoum
with all possible expedition and there confiscated all the property of the Zebehr
324 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
family, and sent his trusted lieutenant, Gessi in pursuit of Suleiman, who
had proclaimed himself Lord of the Province of Dafour. In addition to this
usurpation he had surprised and massacred an Egyptian garrison at Dem
Idris, and raised an army of 6000 men to establish himself in the position
which he had thus assumed. Gessi, was an able commander and as fearless as
hle was energetic. With a force of 3006 regulars. 500. irregulars,. or rag-tags,
and two small cannons, he went in pursuit of the wily Suleiman. On the march
he increased his force considerably by new enlistments and at length engaged
the enemy at Dem Idris, December 28th.
He easily beat Suleiman, and following him up several other severe battles
were fought with equally fortunate results to Gessi, until the country about
Dem Idris was cleared of the slavers and 10,000 slaves liberated.
Strange as it appears, nevertheless when Gessi had performed such signal
s= comon mpt" services towards sup-
2 s pressing the slave trade
[in the Egyptian Son:
dan, and had overcome
g the son of the arch
siave dealer of" that
| region, the Khedive
J insisted on Gordon ap-
j pointing Zebehr, the
| father of Suleiman, to
[the governorship of
[ Dafour.. 'This act : con-
firmed Gordon in his
MJ previous intention of
¥ relinquishing his office,
3 as it proved conclu-
sively the real desire
q of the Khedive to per-
SHA - =<) petuate the curse of
TRACK OF THE SLAVES ' slavery.. But Gessi
was now calling on him for said, so at the risk of offending the Khedive,
Gordon . not only refused to make the appointment . requested but left
Ehartoum for Shaka, where the slavers had again established themselves,
with the purpose of breaking up the cursed traffic there a second time. But
only a day before reaching Chaka he received news from Gessi, who had
attacked Suleiman at a place named in honor of the slaver, Dem Snleiman,
where he beat lim so badly that all the booty of the place fell into his hands,
and Suleiman himself narrowly escaped capture. _
Suleiman now had the effrontery to send emissaries to Gordon, but instead
of these accomplishing their object they were court-martialed and shot, though
HEROES OF THE.DARK - CONTINENT. 328
one of them was Zebehr's chief secretary. Soon after this, Gordon and Gessi
met, and for the latter's splendid services Gordon decorated him as Pasha, and
bestowed upon him the honorarium of $10,000. But Gessi remained idle
scarcely a day, for increasing his force again to 300 regulars he set out to renew
the pursuit of Suleiman, whom he at length found in a village with 700 men.
oe
Gessi boldly sent him a demand for immediate surrender, which was promptly
nome
uss _de
=C =-- --->
[£133
« lit
97
l
i = & t Hp Te" Rans A f
i y - NZ f_" ; . v
- f 7 -
RETURN OF GESSI AFTER THE DEATH OF SULEIMAN.
complied with, and Suleiman and ten of his officers were sent as prisoners to
Gordon, who quickly disposed of them by a court-martial that ordered them to
be shot.. It was less than two months after this that Haroun was attacked by
Gesst at Dafour and. killed}. so that with the dedith of these two slavers: and
pretenders there was peace in the Soudan. 'Tewfik Pasha was now appointed to
the Khedival dignity of the Soudan, and Gordon surrendered his office of Gov-
ernor General and returned to England.
CHAPTER XVI
~;GORDON'S-LAST- EXPEDITION.
?ONSIDERING the herculean labors that Gordon had performed,
and the honors so nobly won 'and awarded, and particularly
the nervous exhaustion from which he suffered, it is not sur-
prising that he desired 's long rest, and that he pictured to
himself at least a few years of elegant leisure, which would
have been am experience never thus far in his life realized.
g His arrival in England was followed by an ovation that
would have stirred the pride and pleasure of any other man, but Gordon cared
nothing for honors, and tried to hide from the public, where he could obtain the
relaxation that his tortured mind and body so greatly needed. 'The great objection
to personal popularity, however, is that it involves the loss of every bodily comfort.
To be a hero is to invite the persecution of public attention, and also invidious
criticism, the two so warring with one another that the object suffers alike from
both. 'This was the unfortunate position in which Gordon found himself, and
the hoped-for rest, as a consequence, was never realized. f
Ju May, t881i; there was a shaking up of British officers in India.. Lord
Lytton had resigned the vice-regal rule, and was succeeded by Lord Ripon,
who desired Gordon to accept a private secretaryship, which office was somewhat
analogous to that of Prime Minister. Gordon, strange to say, accepted this
subordinate position, but in the belief that the duties were so little exacting as
to afford him the means for a longed for rest. He soon discovered his error,
however, and resigned while on the way to India, but went to China instead, at
the invitation of Mtr. Hart, Chinese Commissioner of Customs at Shanghai.
While en route, in the Indian Ocean, the steamer on which he had taken pas-
sage encountered a terrific storm and several great waterspouts, which came so
. near wrecking the vessel that Gordon always regarded the escape as a special
interposition of Providence. A war was threatening between China and
Russia, during the time of his visit, which Gordon very largely assisted in
preventing by his opportune counsel with Li, the Governor-General of the
Taiping rebellion period, and tiow Prime Minister. f
Gordon was several months in China, returning to England late'in the
winter, .and was almost at once invited to the Belgian Court to discuss a pro-
jected international expedition to the Congo, to which Stanley was also invited;
and here it was that the two great explorers and administrators first met.
Stanley, it will be remembered, was placed permanently at the head of this
(328) -
A
in
al
Mid t
(ui
maas
~~~
x
f
/
i
NAA
\%
Shae
(o
’:;t
_>
es
~
oss
mos
<
i
ill/111711
Lf mus 00000
y io)
1;',‘£;“4//
t 7
was
Ho
s
Anh
Sha
fumo
hdd d d I
eti
goun
t
I
(Wy fl,”
I”,
L
s
S
ss
&
Ss
S
ant
sms
§:
east
&
~
Nex
S
fong
we
x
Ans
sw
ins
as
N
os
h-I,’
MF ‘l‘W'
ta crp b
U !I'I,l.l|a
Ill' A Fatt
64 I/
Cop
4 ”4,7/
wo
f
9
a
SX
<-
A
l.‘
Shae
sous e hap
NSC ~
M
\\\. sas \\\\\
\ st
yaexss
pune
we
1 I
If} Li
I’l, Illl‘ III
f
4
TALE 0
SA
ae
Sex
&
<
w
Fess
s R
NSX
aed
Sx
fa
(
a y ;
4
whl 7/ wn movant yy oon ee J nn 7,
f OVA ) vol iy hth / ,/, i Will l To G
y o l f”fl%fl%¢fl%flmw/W%fi%fi%%%%%fi%%%%fi%flfquw
f (( /7I///// 0/7/1192? $714 7/1/1/ f F/ [TI cH [I ”1/1, //.’/‘/ //// p / I'W'U‘ > (MUY J. /// Cd /////// ) l U NW) //I //// I'll! W’l’thV/M/ sd fU| (od Th l/",//, /
y ull lity
o o oy oto oo, we
Mutat Can t /////////w/ h / )) o o ue e i o amar //// ena e ital a a
| Afi/J/j’n’m’f’f/f/V f 7 o / ¢;//,,;;,f,//,/, j dia Yaad /}/ Mill td on;////,///////15/4/4977/04' / ,1,///f,u iY Wm. Mel ok 444.70; (ion
| a li’llg‘I/l fl/M/I/ Yl ”ll/I‘l/I‘WIYJI‘II’v/g IV/l'll'i'fi/ iIll/"II”’;'l‘.’.."c'|‘,‘u“Liv/004, ) ’{//;’//// ////////11 I/(fil/Zl'jl’lj/ l/“MI/y/V/f ;"7// 1; Ip //////-lhl/":¢,// hit/n! U //(' (”half/”(fill“QM/"0 i/Z/fl/ Thifh I“‘l“"}‘j)//})} j”
(pA Ty 7 ///~///Ill{/ll ”0719/1144“ . od n Of I’u/ 4/11, {MIMI/II“ l‘f fun”, 4y4/,/1'_,//f///1////// P // ///'-’///://i¢“'/ {lg/”f gum, y mum] //////]'/_ 1) iZ Ji
H/IIII‘IHII/l 1 ”VI/”I’ll” /4'/'7”1.1‘f‘4{ f ll” j/ f7’1’1‘A’IU/llhl‘Ill".”||“7// j/ [M]; ,:I",l,lf‘l,’l‘4l,{“U”) {WWII/Jr]! j/flI/lll’dfilfif/ffi/ fl ///,;/l///,/,{////,lt 0,1", /‘, l ‘l x“ I'M) “flu” /I/// {) /")l‘}///// JEH
M emil iii a ile
o i f orl ‘5’3',"""',i1r,4l,/?7"'f’h‘f9,744,;f:/c'l,’a:',-f',u’;727,67;f;'?:/ tile "’Zia/{vt:';5:'{f'h:'u‘n'}j‘“ff/fl///’”1’//“ uit 4 ayé/ééfl/fa/flagWWWW ”kW/443914”???44,4214
ita vin Ai it eae t tl t véfif‘l‘f’ffiffizfl/wicfi’ffia tt.
ool A Moai l t) . ”Hg/”1,111” 'I,I’ll’::!/'7fh;f Yol ;‘»"'.‘-"'v“_ hy {ff'ufi'y'w’ fi 0 iii/11,111,” emo Ani
l taa ii e oy, i aaa ay
t i A I “Ill” ’.“¢‘~"'!'4L1 b
)
I" “fill/“Ill, 1
f 4 +
e rar) ////
4 [Illll/l/‘vl‘l I," l/JII" (} TEL ”fly/I )
oe heut shh eer yip 1 Pod nle 60 ff p iit
i Pal nl
Coli ly .I,I/’1 MPH tr
i Ar te / //
Aa lr /// fig ////%/
i
4 ¢
/// // A ¥
111,111 1.
Gout
Tian
4 llg, ”4,0“
$3: wt
Al
Nek Sou whn
Mate
u ll]
2
rosa
movie
intents
at
has
ilan
u
et
Waldi th
a ( ,
"I f
y
A ( (
hor Fla oud
.:,!n’v':rl‘l.v.n, 0 Wid """l‘t|"t (h
U
1 I
Anam llu'.
wi
o 1
(tue
(ous
OOF
e
&
& >
Recarde
We
\
a
U
it Ill: t Mes tt it outer : CAB AK CT dopa tityy ”fin/l Ab ( f AAV / A b
Ub Ill f fur. [fill‘ (4 Adora (op K he Wu'f'tilll'l'll & 4971/11” 6 tvlLl' f J'li'l‘l'l‘ HAs: res ya 6 a ”fl; unfazslilw'llll f If]. be L V AV ' an nate 72. 1/1“; /// // ////
4 i Pod moup y E s NRS wt GY Aor OL poorer 4 P P 77 J
(Rab OU [II 40+ .", a I“ will": F f < a 1 Ill/u] Malt Y ag “It'l'l‘.'|'|”.'|' '('t"'.",",‘ l u 17/117 I’d/70 Pup i 4 / J ll 4 ”04 / /
( 1 ¥ n NY AML Co ® U ‘h‘lH tly) 11W] a ”IQ/{116470 Xl/fvl/ Afi 21047, 19s /// //// [fill/[74 9
i ( 091 t f f PVP Z a 6
,!.‘ll,,l“0l3(1‘|ll a 2 § 113/11,flyffi’fflii’h“-§lfnh oal T ~|l|:ljl,’[‘| f / HU a ot ; P 0/1}? /¢/%z ///////;1{
) ,/’1 /’,7u" h ¥ L IIT /
AoA } 4 lib/"j, o f n-‘lutlz'u'clxl Ml (Oon llu‘:'|"“'ll fi //{;//////Ill y / 194flllvl/ // Hra /
y / fik oid h MF vi tp Al 7
y ta i, y r o y
j Ao Aun ‘llll‘|"‘.’:'r‘l; WW, Moto // f /// /;/
WEN?“ -n‘n'a'|l|’»‘|’.”| ial UH"; gr; f Refl U // K
t fim 4 Ph
£20 Ay 0 /
i [ f A
luu‘ 1 l Poon \ a APO 42 ////
A 7 ', 0 ”flit-441"! r y r R ”I wu (full ‘|.|t,‘l‘l‘|-,,,,, a lir 4/,/' ////
Hm U filet} t tk I (h ( f p £ wns! A 1.5.1“: ( 1M]; io rac ’»"l/' PHI 1, e /4/// ZO/
ia u f HP Aig dole 4 Y GPA TNA AF h f hts “If iid + v & 4 ///// /// &
sC iht at & 4 f ty K Abed ( 4 (MG f SAD Rot h on |"Mlmh“n"'h‘“' |'|'|'l_|‘l‘; AOW) H" l: /// Ay // 6 ////
( fu AAC Vip Mody P Sedat b tit ool dM Atal 7 / /
Any ~ ie taa out an ry o v
6 A no o eo actin Wado) A f 6 U
y Asn Pon [ erd) Woe f 7 J/l/f/ / .
AAH I ‘Jd Mira ooo Netto } AA 177, 4h ,/‘////// v/ /I// i /, ¥ (Al ’}//
ive i h / A / A
”My," mi, 11.1». Yann P f 44];
{ff ome iy iy
§!) Pt
4 gh
0 ¢ RTE MQ
pd iy Aout ‘ ive :.:n;l:v:|'_t'.',‘I'M/1,577l
Mon aoe at Halu an “Eu“ MUG txg‘gl‘lgpfil'.‘{I’d/ll /!/,/'
HHP H I:. ,/u
Wo A'."I‘:" A l"‘,"~"‘"",‘l::;':'lI/:I"""W/ ”Ht x ”I'm” * "I'M/fl
wil wilt h0 0 l/v
Cun ad. “Mum” / s.
Th oro
aol Momo V
NEA
Monde
[7
4
Inll'|"i
y)
pl ated
f‘» ':‘:' o
onedibnield lit M
iburlad oon th
'|".p,1‘t,l,,l,m,,l,,
PAIN
rns
Ond
Ove
Go
l
h::,l///////
nl
Y)»
% Z //4’/
a*» iv—j/ # oz
Z1 £3:
- a-
WATERSPOUTS IN THE
INDIAN OCEAN.
(327)
HEROES OF THE CONTINENT,
,
R (
t p
i R6
|
{M 1 Mu
ARA
A
My”) 1
u
In, Pil
AMONG THE BOERS IN SOUTH AFRICA.
company, so that Gor-
don sailed for the
island of Mauritius,
to repose for a time
in that most., para-
disaical resort. . On
his way, and while
passing through
Suez, he visited the
tomb of his great
lieutenant, Gessi,
who had died in the
French hospital at
Suez, April joth.
from protracted suf-
ferings brought on in
his . campaigns
against Suleiman.
Arriving at Mauri-
tius without special
incident, he remained
there, experiencing a
delightful rest. for a
period of ten months,
when he was recalled
to England, made a
Major-General, and
sent to tae Cape:. to
look after affaits
there, that were in
an unsettled state be-
cause of an uprising
of the Boers. He ar-
rived at. Cape Town
in due time, and was
installed as Provi-
sional Governor of
the Colonial Govern-
ment, May 18th, 1882.
Here he remained
until October sth fol-
lowing, in the mean
time having restored
HEROES OF 'THE DARK CONTINENT ¥329
the district to peace, and secured the lasting friendship of the people whom
the Home Government had expected him to fight.
ON THE MOUNT OF OLIVES.
Having always been of a devout turn of mind, and a fatalist, in that he
believed in fore-ordination as it relates to the present as well as to the future,,
he had long wished to spend a season in Palestine and familiarize himself wit].
the places there made sacred by the presence of Jesus. His opportunity hac
a Lit ay wenn
S p
® ‘1
K m
Ap
x1 If s
now come, so that directly after his return to England from South Africa he
departed for the Holy Land, and there interested himself not only in/a tour of
the noted places, but employed much of his time in researches and a survey
of the Holy Sepulchre, the Tabernacle, and the walls of Jerusalem. Most strange
to relate, with all his reverence for the beliefs of the ages, he wrote several
papers embodying results of his investigations, in which he set out to prove that
the places pointed out to tourists as certain holy sites, and which for a thousand
years, have been accepted as such, could not have been the scenes of the actions
and ministrations as reputed.
1330 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
After several months thus spent in Palestine he returned to England and
began to labor among the poor in London, even opening a school at Graves-
end and taking the place of teacher to hundreds of children who had never
attended school. While thus engaged he was for a second time summoned to
the Belgian Court of Leopold II., and asked to take charge of the "Inter-
national-African Society," and to proceed to the Congo with the view of assist-
ing in suppressing the slave trade in that district.
In response to this appeal of Leopold, he asked a leave of absence from
his Government, without forfeiting his commission as Major-General, and this
being granted, he again set sail -for the Dark Continent.. But at this very
moment a cry went tip for his presence again- in the Soudan, in which the
Enghsh Government joined, and instead of proceeding to the Congo he went
again to Cairo to resume the Governor-Generalship of the Soudan.
THE FALSE PROPHET.
Events leadmg to this sudden change in Gordon's engagement, and which
_sent him to the Soudan again instead of to the Congo, need to be here described :
. One year after the resignation of Gordon as Governor-General of the Soudan,
a new and most unexpected disturbance of affairs in Lower Egypt was begun by
the uprising of a fanatical sect under the banner of an enthusiast named
Mahomet Ahmed, who boldly, and with surprising success, proclaimed himself
the long-looked- for prophet that was to bring all -the world to an acknowledg
ment and adopt1on of Islamism. He had really been for some time planning
a crusade in the Dongola district, but so quietly, after the manner of the
great Mahomet. himself,; that Gordon had: never" heard. of, him; or if he did,
certainly no mention is made of him in any of Gordon's letters
Mahomet Alhimed, also written Achmet, was a native of the province of
Dongola, but laid no claim to being of royal blood.. On the -other hand he
made a pretense of being a Christ, if not Jesus himself, and to carry out the
pretension more fully, he said his father was like that of Christ's, a carpenter.
He himself was- apprenticed to an uncle whose trade was that of a boatman,
but he ran away from that service, and became the disciple of a faki (head
dervish) who lived near Khartoum. As the result of a close study of religion,
he was himself made a faki, and in 1850 took up his residefice on the island
of Abba, near Kana, on the White Nile.: He speedily began to acquire a
reputation for great devoutness, and so became wealthy, gathered disciples, and
married freely, selecting wives from the families of the most influential sheiks
of the vicinity. In the earlier part of. 1881, Gordon having gone, lhe began to
assert the claim that he was "the Mahdi'"'-the long expected redeemer of
Islam whom Mahomet had foretold-and claiming a divine commission to
reform Islam, and to establish an universal equality, an universal law, an uni-
versal, religion, and a community of goods. Setting himself to gather about
him a following, he addressed appeals to his brother fakis, one of whom in-
formed the Government of his schemes and pretensions, adding the belief that
«dy
mps as
o Ps
2;
Te
o
s
Ro
&
M
IL 39;
to
Ths
Suey
<
w
by
ear
Fe ness
ess
xl
s\ a
Sut:
“k
I
RX C
\
u
S
(“Tm
f l 1‘
lit
[
$4"
Inds"
Ad PCa
were rre
thas
I]
WIVES
zzz»
pronto
«.
€ _
PA""
,,,,
o de
Fe
(ot
ere ,
P
fan-
S
\ “my hez
7, 2044444
AN::
_\\§§\zm €
yaaa
\
§\ ita
THE MAHDIL.
332 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
he was a madman. Raouf Pasha, the then Governor of the Soudan, proceeded
to take cognizance of him as the result of this information ; and it is at this
stage of his career that the Mahdi steps out into the arena of contemporary
history. Colonel Stewart thus characterizes him : " In person the Mahdi is tall
and slim, with a black beard and a light brown complexion. Like most Don-
: golawis he reads and
writes with difficulty.
Judging from his
conduct of affairs and
policy, I should say
he has considerable
natural ability.. 'The
manner in which he
has. managed to
isd merge together the
A atl. $155?“ u§ually discordant
‘ way tribes denotes great
J tact. He probably
had been preparing
the movement for
some time." Colonel
Stewart, in another
portion of his report,
gives some indica-
tion of the reason
why. a_ religious, fa-
natic finds. so readily
a following in the
Soudan. " The Arabs
and Dongolawis," he
writes-" negroes,
and others settled
within the Arab (the
northern) zone of the
fos: # _ s ‘ Soudan-are all Mo-
mo + Ife _ s e o n ey anm a hammedans of the
A DONXCOWALIS WOMAN, Maliki school.. 'This
religion, however, owing to the prevailing ignorance of the people, partakes
mostly of an emotional and superstitious nature. Hence the enormous influ-
ence of the fakis or spiritual leaders, who are credited with a supernatural
power, and are almost more venerated than the prophet." Another cause
for the strength of the Mahdi's following seems to have been that the great
slave owners-the sheiks and chiefs who had flourished on their nefarious prac-
I 1L
ANY:
iad ih hr Mg i
lft t ‘\‘H\\|
PQ
a
m
a 3M“ ils (NMA
HEROES OFR THE DARK CONTINENT i "494
tices under Zebehr, and whom all the efforts of Baker and Gordon had not
put down-threw in their lot eagerly with any enterprise that struck at the
Egyptian rule, under which a term had been definitely fixed for the emancipa-
' tlon of the slaves.
. 'The Madhi easily repulsed the detachment Raouf Pasha sent out to bring
him in, and at the end of 1881, defeated in the most summary style a stronger
force under Rashid Bey that had been dispatched to drive him out of Gebel
Gadir. But these were petty snecesses compared with the great victory 'he
gained in June, 1882, over the main Egyptian arnaiy of the Soudan, which
Abdul Kadir, who had superseded Raouf Pasha, had gathered for the purpose
of crushing him, and the command of which had been entrusted to Yussuf
Pasha. Very few of the Egyptian soldiers escaped, and all their commanders
were slain. Thus.carly did the Arab fanaticisin display itself.. The attack at
Gebel Geon was led by the dervishes, headed by an enthusiast of exceptional
dash and fury, who was known as " The Dervish," and of whose conduct Colonel
Stewart reported, "I hear that the desperate and fearless way in which he rushes
on a square armed with Remingtons is something marvellous." _
After his victory at Gebel Geon the Madhi pursued the offensive. He
overran the open country unchecked, but failed to achieve any success against
places that had been fortified, even though the fortifications were feeble. In
assallmg El Obeid he met w1th a severe repulse, losmg 6000 of his warriors
in one assault alone. During the months of the campaign which the battle of
Tel-el-Kebir ended so summarily, there were discrepant rumors concerning affairs
in the Soudan. Now there were reports of the dispersal of the Mahdi's bands;
reports, agaln of their threatening Khartoum and the towns on the White N11e
Then, later, in the winter season of 1882-3, came definite t1d1ngs of the sur-
render to the Mahdi of the town of El Obeid, after the garrison had endured
desperate straits. The surrender, however, once consummated, most of the
garrison, with the Commandant Iskander Bey at their head, took service under
their conqueror. - With the proverbial zeal of the renegade, Iskander Bey became
the medium for endeavoring to gain over officers in the Egyptian army in
which he had himself held a commission. - After the fall of El the
Mahdi remained himself inside the Kordofan Province, but his emissaries were
active in other parts of tlie Soudan. least -
DESPERATE BATTLE BETWEEN HICKS PASHA AND THE MAHDIL
The unchecked march of the Mahdi, his decisive victories, and the rapld
imerease of his followers, rendered "the situation in Lower Egypt distressingly
grave. It was feared, because believed, that he would soon overwhelm all the
Soudan, and then direct his victorious and wildly fanatic army against Upper
Egypt, which was undoubtedly his ambition. Something must be done at once,
and, to check the growing power of the prophet, Egypt must look beyond her
own territory for help. To this end the Khedive sent for Colonel Hicks, a
retired officer from the Indian army, and offered him the position of commande -
VILLAGE OF GEBEL GEON.
&
u
; s
\
§ C
a
y/
«j #s € \x
T/ fife-r: ml mL/
7
»
44 V
-s.
2,
tr a
(1d L.. at C
i o e
Ale ash 44 .z
# agg»
HEROES OF THE DAXRKE CONTINENT. 335
in-chief if he would take charge of an expedition against the Mahdi. 'The offer
was accepted, and in the summer of 1883, two years after the Mahdi had pro-
claimed himself, Hicks Pasha began operations in the Sennaar district, between
the White and Blue Nile.: While on the march for Gebel Ain, April 29th, he
was furiously assailed by the 'Mahdi, but the onslaught was not begun until
Hicks Pasha had formed his troops into a hollow square and was well prepared
to receive the enemy. A desperate battle followed, which is thus graphically
more memes mm, gini se inners ites seen ns
\ RETREAT OF THE MAHDISTS AFTER THE DEFEAT AT GEBEIL GEON.
described by the military correspondent of the London Daily News, who was
an eye-witness to the struggle:
" We opened a tremendous fusillade from our front face, apparently without
effect, for still they came on gallantly, but at 500. yards they began to fall fast.
Still the chiefs led on their men with all the reckless and romantic chivalry
of the Saracen knights. One by one they fell, dismounted, two or three to
rise again and dart forward on foot, waving their standards, only to drop and
rise no more. After half an hour's continuous rattle of musketry, seeing their
chiefs fallen and their banners in the dust, the advancing hordes wavered, and
336 HEROES OF 'THE DARK CONTINENT.
were greeted: with a tremendous yell from our troops, who had stood firmly and
unflinchingly, and I may say as steadily as any troops could. Now the enemy
moved off to the rlght among the long grass, and our front was cleared. Shells
burst among them. Soon all were out of sight, except a few who walked about
unconcernedly, and actually singly came up, after the rest had retreated, to
within a few yards, brandishing their spears in defiance. One after another
those fanatics were shot down. . . . Nordenfeldts and Remingtons are no
respecters of creeds or fanatical idiosyncrasies. Sheik after sheik had gone
down with his banner, although the Mahdi had assured each that he was invul-
nerable, and their falthful but misguided followers had fallen in circles around the
chiefs they blindly followed. Twelve of the most prominent leaders-nine from
_ and three from Kordofain-had left their bones to whiten on the field
amidst three hundred of their followers." f
ANNIHILATION OF HICKS PASHA'S ARMY.
The first battles against the Mahdi were won by Hicks Pasha, but his
army was alarmingly small as compared with that of the enemy; be51des his
Egyptian soldiers were the most arrant cowards imaginable, while those fightlng
under the Mahdi's standard were fanatically brave, believing themselves either
invulnerable, or, if slain in battle, that they would be immediately transplanted to
Paradise. Hicks Pasha and the few English soldiers with him had the gravest
fears of success in operating against the Mahdi, with a government at thei
back that gave them the - meagerest support, and a soldiery that was too
effeminate to battle with the weakest enemy.
In pursuance of orders, on September oth, Hicks lef El Duem for El
Obeid, the Mahdi's strongest position, and which was fully two hundred and
thirty miles from the nearest Egyptian post, and thus in the very heart of the
enemy's country. Hicks asked for re-enforcements, but these could not be fur-
nished, so, with his feeble, undrilled, cowardly rag-tags, he had to face the dread
alternative of discbeying orders and'being in disgrace, or probable annihilation.
Brave man as he was, he chose the latter. 'The last information that came
back from the doomed column was a message sent by O'Donovan, the London
Times' correspondent, who dispatched the following from a point f01ty five miles
south-west of El Duem :
'" We are running a terrible risk in abandoning our communications and
marching two hundred and thirty miles into an unknown country. But we
have burnt our ships. 'The enemy is still retiring, and sweeping the country
bare of cattle. 'The water supply is the cause of intense anxiety. 'The camels
are dropping." And so ended O'Donovan's work in the profession which. he
adorned ; so closed, too, the scanty record of this fateful advance!
Authentic details may never be forthcoming of the stupendous catastrophe
which befell Hicks's column; and a lurid cloud of mystery may hang over the
last scenes for all time. No European present in the fighting that wrought its
annihilation is known to have survived.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 337
had
The news of the fate of Hicks's army reached England November 20th,
and caused a profound sensation. Thus far the British Government had refused
to take any interest in the efforts of the Egyptian Government to subjugate the
Maiidi, and now Lord Granville insisted on an absndonment of the Egyptian
Soudan. But how could this be done? The Egyptian population in that
district numbered fully 30,000, while a large number of British subjects were
engaged in trade with the people of that region, and not a few held their resi-
dences in Khartoum. Must these be abfnudouned 'to the poor mercy ~of the
Mahdi? Mr. Gladstone measured the situation fully, and his influence was in
favor of the adoption of measures for relieving the garrisons. More than this,
his acute discernment and hi of justice led to energetic action to this
T. <= ety."
ta \.J"‘\4
pe ay,
SIC [-> Mike
bse aa,
cs M
im i- tat tA.
ake t Mes
gn C
a & ;
= C ®
heSCT - SNS s
Past. \N er
St ti f
A \ u
p
- % Aw nH ,
> Fo a o/s 2 a #
Teer, Gq "Za. * P 3 NAYS 's _L 1
a" J)», ¥ 4 #: T Meee est Z u“ Paw > eo 2s AY ad /
R T APM P anc i* Paal . Redon qr eg f
e Tae Lemm FP Cpe rP Ae
HICKS PASHA'S RAG-TAGS.
end, for on January 19th, 1884, General Gordon left England for the Soudan,
having, accepted the mission " to report on the military situation there, to provide
in the best manner for the safety of the European population of Khartoum, and
of the Egyptian garrisons throughout the country, as well as for the evacuatiof
of the Soudan, with the exception of the seaboard." f
Mr.. Gladstone afterwards, in the House of Commons, on the evening of
February 12th, defined more closely the duty which Gordon had undertaken.
" General Gordon went," said the Premier, "not for the purpose of recongquer-
ing the Soudan, or to persuade the chiefs of the Soudan-the sultans at the
head of their troops-to submit themselves to the Egyptian Government. He
22
I
R
A
Ay
L
%u\.\.._,
HH
a
\\\\ \ .
V/
ifti
HICKS PASHA'S LAST RALLY.
%
HEROES -OF THE DARK CONTINENT +4489
went for no such purpose as that. He went for the double purpose of evacu-
ating the country, by extricating the Egyptian garrisons and re-constituting it
-by giving back to these sultans their ancestral powers, withdrawn or suspended
dufing the period of Egyptian occupation. General Gordon has in view the
vithdrawal from the country of no less than 29,000 persons under - military
service in Egypt, and the House will see how vast was the trust which was
placed in the hands of this remarkable person. We cannot exaggerate the
importance we attach to his mission. We are unwilling-I may say we were
resolved to do nothing which should interfere with the pacific scheme; a scheme,
be it remembered, absolutely the most politic and which promised a satisfactory
solution of the Soudanese difficulty, by at once extricating the garrisons and
reconstructing the country. upon its old basis of local privileges."
These opinions were put in the form of a letter of instructions issued by
Lord Granville, under the seal of the British Government, and placed in Gor-
don's hands the day previous to his departure.
TO THE RELIEF OF KHARTOUM.
General Gordon had intended to proceed to the Soudan by way of Suez,
thence to Souakim, and from that port across the country to Berber; but his
original plans were disarranged by circumstances which required his presence in
Cairo. He reached the Egyptian capital on the 25th and attended an audience
with the Khedive on the following day, at which that ruler again bestowed
upon him the high office of Governor-General of the Soudan, so that Gordon was
now not only British High Commissioner, but the Khedive's representative also,
with power to conceive and execute without restriction, which delegation of fairly
autocratic authority was a necessary condition of his service.
Leaving Cairo, Gordon was convoyed by General Graham as far as Assouan.
Thence Gordon travelled with Colonel Stewart across the Nubian desert, on
camel-back, a distance of two hundred and forty miles, to Abou Hamed, and
thence to Berber. While making this journey, news of another dreadful
massacre reached the Home Government. On February 4th, General Baker's
Egyptian force, while marching towards Tokar to relieve the garrison of that
place, was attacked by a detachment of Osman Digna's Arab levies, which
resulted in a loss of two-thirds of Baker's force, and a complete dispersion of
the balance, so that reorganization was impossible. 'This news caused Gordon
great uneasiness, and gave the British Government equal concern, as little
doubt was now felt that Khartoum would fall into the hands of the Mahdi in
a very short while, unless something could be done to arouse the people in the
district to make a resistance to the false prophet. 'To this end, before leaving
Berber, Gordon confirmed Hussein Bey Halifa Governor of the province, and
then sent forward orders to Khartoum removing Hussein Pasha from the
Vice-Governor Generalship, and appointed Colonel de Coetlogen in his stead.
He: also sent a proclamation, and had it posted all over the city, pro-
claiming the Mahdi Sultan of Kordofan, remitting one-half the taxes, and per-
u- ce-
S--
aati
aati tee
c ~-
a
f
(
+
ji
Y
A
Se. x3
w 27 tees +»
ecrdnears 2 » «a
he.
teers a*
as.
e
- rcc» 6 **
wo r "": Lb a
=_
3%
“N“ f
\_‘\\\ x
OSMAN DIGNA'S ATTACK ON TOKAR.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 341
mitting the trade in slaves to be carried on. This action, though opposed by
his nattife, as perpetrating #4 great wrong that he had < before tried so hard to
suppress, was the only course left open to Gordon; for the power of the Mahdi
was now grown so great that it was practically irresistible with the force avail-
able, while the people would join in any measure calculated to fully restore
their immemorial slave-trading privileges. Gordon's purpose, therefore, was to
placate both the Mahdi and the people, hoping thereby to save the garrisons
23
€fi_4 A'//'f
Tos us'
* regs ame"
¥. 4 2x 14
a A t»
-= i?" sn czmren is M
Sale C ae terone ae meus a in 3 T es mesa ake
~*
wt% ecg am t ~,
acta eae *
VICTIMS OF THE SLAVE-TRADING PRIVILEGES.
from massacre, and give a truce to hostilities until the evacuation of the Soudan
could be accomplished.
' HORRIBLE SCENES OF OPPRESSION.
It was on the morning of Tuesday, February 18th, that General Gordon
made his entry into Khartoum. In one of his letters home he describes how,
when entering Keren, arrayed in the splendid " gold coat" of a field-marshal,
and in the pomp beseeming the Governor-General of the Soudan, the humor of
his fancy had suggested to him some resemblance in the eyes of the populace
between him and "the Divine Figure from the North" who was just then a
good deal in the mouths of men. A veritable "Divine Figure" he must have
342 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
shone in the sight of the people of Khartoum as he came among them on this
February morning. What a change for them from the régime of Bashi Bazou-
kery.; of the: pashas, of the stick, the lash, the prison; from the grinding
taxation and the denial of even a form of justice! No wonder that, as he
passed to the Palace from the Mudirich, where he had been holding a levee to
which the poorest Arab was admitted, the people pressed about him, kissing his
hands and feet, and hailing .lmias '* Sitltan,"' " F ather, "and * Saviour!" There
was a whole-souled energy and an uncompromising thoroughness in everything
that: this man. did. - With .the best will in the world to redress grievances,
"""I pwat
Xx ~- «% Ts 11 Mre
; .(\?\< i
3X Nw \W T ines
t. 2C lycos fxy, ""s""
-* (er ments s ~*~ 3 N+ w}’§ Rak »?§I§;~' Aitficeds
". Tag. % ise! 7 os ce Pay. ke
~A ~
T ae, Sher o
seth .~
~
C4,
FESTIVAI, DANCE IN HONOR OF GORDON.
another man would have gone about the work in a methodical, ungalvanic
fashion; but Gordon did not know the meaning of routine. There on the -
shelves were the Government ledgers, on whose pages were the long records of
the outstanding debts that weighed down the overtaxed people. On the walls
hung the kourbashes, whips and, bastinado rods-implements of tyranuy and
torture. Gordon wiped out the evidence of debts and destroyed the emblems
of oppression in a fine impulse of characteristic ardor. A fire was made in front
6f the palace, and the books and bastinado tods thrown on this funeral pyre
of Egyptian tyranny. | |
\\
74 2
» p t bee ber *
Z ae mar] Ms a
7 f "57 22 d
P 7 - FAF re ts
212 ners Ta (
x r sa 2 a
- m z A2 CZs
6i -Z L
6 ms j 2
£ 57 p 3 5
iti Mert > 2 pak i
aL sul-
fe P Z. }
5 a 2 p J FZ
ge a 7 Q R
ha 4 a z [ =
T7 z
7 *
4 - %
A a /A
7 A; 9 &
> 34
7) it
p
)
4
Palms reas
\ 8 A
AK , Ary
ve ‘
P m k 3 - % o l“‘"" &
<-> Es
Tze
"snx P7 ~
Azz
=~
A
a_
§\\§_— -
&~
Ahl;
a~
ar-
*~*
- n/n /*
z/
a
7p
C
y
Aire
ae
_-_" -b
GORDON HOLDING A COUNSEI, WIIH HIS OFFICERS.
344 HEROES OF THE - DARK CONTINENT
He had so but begin the day's work; From the couneil-chamber he hurried
to-the hospital, thence to inspect-the arsenal. _. Then lie darted to the Heart of
the misery 'of ' the In. that loathsome " den. two hundred wretched
beings were rotting in their chains. Young and old, condemned and untried,
the proved innocent and the arrested on suspicion, he found all clotted together f
in one mass of common suffering. With wrathful disgust Gordon set about the
summary work of liberation. Before night came the chains had fallen from off
scores of the miserables, and- the beneficent labor was being steadily pursued.
Ere this busy day closed Gordon's energy had left him hardly anything to do
inside of Khartoum. He had arranged that the Soudanese soldiers were to stay
in their native land, and had appointed to the command of them a veteran
negro officer who had distinguished himself n Mexico under Bazaine. He had
setfled that the Egyptian soldiers were to be sent across the tiver to Am Dur-
man, where was- Hicks's camp before he started on his ill-fated march, and that
they and their families were to be sent down the river in detachments, and so
also were to go the European civilians who cared to leave.
THE CRY FOR HELP.
Everything for a time appeared auspicious for a peaceful evacuation of the
Soudan and of the complete success of Gordon's mission. -This hopeful appear-
ance of the situation was not only inspired by the loyal protestations of. the
people in and about Khartoum, but was more reassuring when messengers sent
to El Obeid to invest the Mahdi with the Sultanship of Kordofan returned
-with a present of a rich cloak, given by the Mahdi as an evidence of the de-
light he felt for the dignity bestowed by the appointment. Gordon's telegrams
to the Home Government were therefore filled with assuring promises for the
safety of Khartoum and a peaceful solution of the question raised by the Mahdi
against the Egyptian Government. ;
But when Gordon's hopes were brightest the most distressing news came
from Cairo, which pictured the situation as being suddenly changed to one of
a stcrions and alarming character. The Mahdi was again in the saddle, and
with 'a force df 300,000 dervislhes, as. his: soldiers were called, was said to be
marching: towards Cairo, with an avowed purpose of sweeping the hateful Turk
and Infidel from off the earth. Berber was besieged, and the enemy was invest-
ing El Fasher, Dawa, Masteri; Foga, while Om Shanga and Thashi had already
surrendered.
Telegraph communication being cut off, Gordon sent Colonel Stewart up"
the Nile to ascertain the feeling of the northern tribes. All were friendly as
far as Webel Aul, but beyond that point the people were very hostile. 'The Khedive
was filled with alarm for Gordon's safety, 'but - refused to send Zebehr Pasha to
his aid, though message after message besought him to do so. Every day the
situation became more critical. Within Khartoum however, there was peace, and
by the issuance of paper money, to relieve the stringency and poverty produced
By the collection of exorbitant taxes, trade had revived and tlic daily market scene
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 345
was a lively one. . This fortunate turn in local affairs had served to endear Gordon
to the citizens and they were both loyal and grateful. But beyond the Khartoum
district war was sounding its wildest alarms. From the west, north and south hos-
tile tribes were reported as advancing on the city, and the Mahdi had declared
his intention of not only capturing the place but also of killing Gordon. Ap-
peals. to England for help met with no response, while none of the English
forces within the Egyptian Soudan were available.
In the midst of these anxieties Gordon sallied out with as large a force as
he could muster, 3000 men, to attack the rebels at Halfiyeh, but owing to the
treachery of two of his Arab officers, who fired on their own gunners and then
Navies
jill ‘s: I,“ te
) lily/fill ll“; Beate 3 QAQN’,
\a -C -e | No aat (aet! -
a ”4 lt ny 574g fifiQEiA sis away *
F THB BATTLE AT HAELFIYEH.
sounded the retreat, the fight was little more than a massacre of Gordon's men.
The two treacherous officers were apprehended and after a full hearing, which
clearly established their guilt, they were shot. 'This prompt and vigorous ac-
tion served greatly to diminish the effects of the defeat, as it gave renewed
confidence to both the Egyptians and Bashi-Bazouks, who saw in Gordon a
leader who, while generally pacific, sympathetic and merciful, yet in extremity
courageous and always hopeful.
The reverse met with at the hands of the enemy at Halfiyeh, though a
stunning blow, was in a sense helpful to Gordon, as it brought to his aid the
merchant Arabs of Khartoum, who contributed in the most substantial manner
$46 - HEROPS/OR THE DARK CONTINENT.
to the defence of the town, which was now about to be beleaguered. Gordon's
treasury was empty and his soldiers clamorous for pay, which distressful and
threatening condition was to a great extent relieved by an Arab who loaned
hin $5,000; and by another who raised and equipped a force of 200 blacks,
which he placed at Gordon's service. |
THE SIEGE OF KHARTOUM.
Gordon fully realized the danger.of his position and foresaw that an in-
vestment of Khartoum must soon be made by the- Mahdi; who was reported to
be fitting out a fleet for a descent on the-place.. This report was not true,
: {Nit (
(ont
i "a «Mfr
o d
(M) ?*i“i\\
T a“ \\%~‘0¢'?
f
8
i
A SKIRMISH BETWEEN OUTPOSTS.
uues of fortifications for its defence. So perfectly were his orders carried out
and so ample his measures, that he made announcement of the absolute safety
of the place, and his ability to hold ont till winter. He did not neglect; how:
ever, to fully acquaint the Home Government with his true situation, and reason-
ably expected that relief would come through a dispatch of troops from Eng-
land in a fnonth or two.
Up to this time Gordon had been sending people away from Khartoum in
anticipation of a siege, and continued so doing until his armed steamers had to
make an almost uninterrupted engagement with the rebels who now swarmed
both banks of the river. At last all communication was cut off and the Mahdi
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 347
encamped his great army opposite the town, where he threw up breastworks
and planted three large Krupp guns with which to bombard the city. 'The
siege was begun.
A complete investment of Khartoum was made early in July,; and for ig
period of six months following there was the excitement, fear and horror that
attends attack, charge, sortie and vigorous defence. Gordon was now like the
caged lion, which, though powerful of limb, still finds the bars of his prison too
strong to be overcome. A thousand obstacles confronted him. Provisions were
. KHARTOUM DURING THE SIEGE.
ample for the time being, but his force was relatively small in number, money
had almost ceased: to circulate, because the paper currency which he had issued
to bridge a temporary stringency, had depreciated to the point of worthlessness.
but above all were the defects found in his army. 'The men were practically
undisciplined, poorly: artined, and worse than this, were treacherous." Desert:
tion was punished by death, and yet every day one 'or more of his soldiers
passed the guards and made their way to the enemy, carrying news of his
condition and serving to give rise to a spirit of insubordination.
Against the tremendous odds that confronted him, Gordon bore up so
348 HEROES OF THE. DARK CONTINENT.
bravely that his presence gave encouragement in quarters even where hope
had faded. Almost day and night he was with his men, taking scarcely any
rest whatever, leading in every defence and being seemingly at every point
where he was most needed. The rebels, finding that the place was so well
defended, and that their assaults were invariably disastrous-more than
40,000 dervishes having fallen before the trenches,-at length resolved to give
over these tactics and settled down to a reduction of the town by starvation.
About a dozen shots were fired each day into the city from the rebel can-
nons, but they: did. little execution, and -were probably intended only. to
keep Gordon apprised of the enemy's continued presence and determination.
HEADQUARTERS OF THE MAHDI DURING THE SIEGE.
While this siege was going on, the Parliament of Great Britain was engaged
in discussing the importance of the Soudan with an indifference to Gordon's
fate that fairly dumbfounds the world. . :
THE TRAGIC DEATH OF GORDON. ' ;
Month after month went by, with Gordon still defending Khartoum and
looking with anxious eyes for the aid that never came. Provisions began to
run low, discontent increased, the Khedive found fault, the Arabs were dis-
mayed, and yet Gordon did not quail, resolving to defend the city to the last
extremity, and if necessary die behind its fortifications, a victim to shameful
abandonment . by his. country, . And so it came at dast... Day. by day the
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 549
store of food became smaller, until at last mouths were unfed, and gaping
poverty hugged the streets for some chance nourishment. Discontent is the
beggar's companion, and from discontent conspiracy developed that threw Gor-
don's army into mutiny. Man could do no more than he. Like a hero he suffered
privations with his friends; like a martyr he bore the odium that came from
a limit to his genius, his power as commander, diplomat and man. 'The end
was near at hand, but little did so brave a man foresee the baseness of the
means. Early on the morning of January 26th, 1885, weak from fasting, hag-
gard from long-de- m= = f
ferred hope, but _
withal patient under Sa sr - ALT L) [/ apf 7a ......
a resignation to God's Ta. ants
will, Gordon, brave,
heroic Gordon, came a _
down from his quart- ? - "sxx
ers (which were in \
the Governor-Gene-
ral's mansion, that
fronted the Nile Riv-
er), to resume the *y. Tave » #4 -| [[[[]
trying duties of his aA > piles, ¢ /// 00 [_-
position as com- fM y- - AP t.. m M »| 1,
mander of a forlorn
Hope;, scearcely had
he stepped outside
the door, when with
savage boast and
hellish intent, two of
his own soldiers, re-
enforced by a howl-
ing rabble, attacked
him with theirswords |:
just as the enemy, |
through treachery of f DEATH OF GORDON'S BODY SERVANT.
those within, came rushing into the city, to complete the capture. Unex-
pectant and unarmed, the brave soldier could make no defence, and hence
bared his bosom to the steel of his assassins; and thus he fell, no more a hero
than a martyr, for on England is the shame that she should exact such a sac-
rifice of one who deserved more honor than in most generous humor she could
bestow. f
The particulars of Gordon's death have never been authenticated; a hundred
stories have been told, but the carnival of massacre that followed simultaneously
with the assassination, threw every spectator into a chaos of horror, and blinded
.........
350 - HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
the mind's eye by a confusion of fear that made description impossible. It is
told that Gordon had one: faithful attendant; a poor, half-naked black, who
was armed with a matchet, or broad-bladed sword, with which he tried to
defend his master, but was bayoneted by two of Gordon's soldiers. It may be
so ; but frightful enough is it to know that Gordon died at the hands of tose
who should have been his friends-his soldiers and his country. f f
It is not necessary, nor relevant, to describe the war which followed Gor-
don's death, it being only important in this connection to state the fact, that very
late in the fall of 1884, English sympathy was excited on behalf of Gordon,
and the government finally sent an army under Charles Wilson ostensibly to
his relief. In fact, however, the army was expected rather to arrest the Mahdi's
movements towards Cairo, and to give protection to British subjects in the
Soudan, rather than to rescue Gordon. 'This intention is best evidenced by the
manceuvres in which the army indulged so long before placing gunboats and
transports on the Nile to relieve Khartoum, the investment of which had been
known to Lord Granville for several months. But at last; I say ''at last,"
because too late, the English fleet reached Khartoum and engaged the rebels,
but not till January 28th, or two days after the fall of the city, and the death
of our hero, when by a vigorous shelling the rebels were put to rout and the
city recaptured. 'The army was now put to some real service and did great
»xecution in every battle that followed, many thousand dervishes being killed
and the Mahdi's power overthrown completely in the Soudan, so that his field
of operations was transferred to the Equatorial province, where he still holds
his spiritual and militant supremacy. 'Thus did Gordon's services in the
Egyptian Soudan end finally, though incidentally, to the accomplishment of
the purpose for which he was sent there by England and the Khedive. '
CHAPTER XVIL
LIFE EMIN PASHA.
T is a most surprising thing, for which I will not undertake
¥. (<> an explanation, that although Emin Pasha served in the
most responsible positions for at least six years under
Gordon in the Soudan, yet not once is his name men-
4 tioned in any of Gordon's letters, nor does any reference
> _ to him appear in the diaries or journals of contemporary
explorers in Africa. This unaccountable omission has
grown into a mystery in the light of present revelations,
whereby it is ascertained that Emin has for twelve years occupied the post of
Governor-General of the Egyptian Equatorial Province, to which place he was
appointed by the Khedive at the urgent request of Gordon himself. In fact,
the history of Emin is scarcely less interesting, in whatever aspect we consider
:, than that of Gordon, and in some respects it is even more enigmatic, while
céftainly. as important. , ; »
The real name of Emin Pasha is Eduard Schnitzer, and his birthplace is
Oppela, whichis .a=-city of' Prussian Silesia.- Eduard: lost his father at a
youthful age, but he was left a considerable patrimony, which enabled him to
attend the universities of Berlin, Breslau, Koenigsberg, Vienma and Paris. He
developed a zeal for the natural sciences, and was especially interested in a
study of ornithology, in which he exhibited marked proficiency. In the year
18564, he. completed a course of medicine at the Koenigsberg institute and
received his degrees, removing to Berlin to enter upon the practice of his chosen
profession. His success, however, was so far from satisfactory that he concluded
to visit Constantinople with the hope of mending his fortune, but while there
he discovered an advantageous opening at a Turkish port in Albania, at which
he located and practised with much success for four years.
Though Dr. Schnitzer found his profession quite profitable as a local-
physician in Albania, he had a longing for the military, so that he seized the
»pportunity of joining an expedition to Syria and Arabia, in which he held the
post of physician. From 1871-74 he was the constant companion of Ismail
Pasha in Trapezund, Erzeroum, Constantinople, and in Ianina of Epirus, where
Ismail died. After this event, which considerably changed his fortunes, Dr.
Schnitzer returned to Germany, in 1875, but he again disappeared, and kept
himself so well in seclusion that his friends knew nothing of him until he
came into notoriety as Emin Bey.
(351)
352 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
Dr. Schnitzer's travels had been so extensive, and his acquisition of
languages so great, that he became a master of French, English, Italian,
Turkish, Arabic, Persian, and several Slavonian idioms, besides acquiring
occidental customs and manners that entirely destroyed every appearance of
his Germanic descent. |
JOINS GORDON IN THE SOUDAN.
In 1876 the doctor visited Cairo, and there by chance met General Gordon,
to whom he offered his services. So favorable was the impression he produced,
and so important t
Gordon was. his
knowledge of Arabic,
that - his . services
wete> immediately
engaged, and since
that time the doctor
has 'been true to
the interests of the
Khedive: 'The first
mention made of him
in - the - European
prints is the follow-
ing: allusion
by ~Martin Kansal,
late Austrian consul
at »Khartoum, who,
writing to his home
government - about
Egyptian - affairs,
says:. " * German,
Dr. Schnitzer, who
calls himself 'a
Moslem from Con-
stantinople, and as
such is named Emin
Effendi, has succeed-
limite ed in.ge¢th1g'a:posf
EMIN PASHA. (DR. SCHNITZER.) tion with Gordon."
It seems, from circumstances since made public, that Gordon almost imme-
diately formed the highest opinion of Emin's abilities both as a physician
and administrator, for the latter part of 1856 Gordon sent him on a most im-
portant mission to Uganda, with instructions to bring back three hundred
men who had gone, contrary to Gordon's orders, to the capital of Uganda
with the intention of annexing the country to Egypt. It was known that the.
rg
|
lims
gmmmmmmmmmmmMmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
WWIII
|
Irit NN
III
Imt mme minima:
[
|
ltl,
1
|
I LLL ETTI ITI UTE Ieee nre ear
dite
I
=]
_
HEROES OF ~THE DARK CONTINENT: 353
appearance and purpose of this force would be considered as an invasion, and
would most likely create an intensely hostile feeling, which it was particu-
larly desirable to avoid. Emin so well acquitted himself, however, on this
delicate mission, that the troops were brought back, and by a gift of many
presents and kindly assurances, M'tesa, King of Uganda, was brought into
a friendly relationship with Emin, besides giving promises of aid, in case of
necessity, to the Egyptian contingent. V
_- Gordon was so pleased with the success of Emin's mission that, as a mark of
m.
baci
* (iet 5f
T §. -~ <-- NT Fa.) fp
ume - - ‘. "T" 2 =" $ Cess 54,4, . s & EZ ;~\\\‘ P //A ¢
f; = , , an on s <> nas a r T d -x , 5 /a rf/Zffl\ h 1’%
f A UGANDA VILLAGE.
his appreciation, he made Emin surgeon-general of the equatorial province, with ad-
ditional powers of sub-governor. Soon after he sent the doctor on another enter-
prise of still greater importance, in which a yet more diplomatic adroitness had to
be practised, for Gordon himself hardly expected the mission to be successful.
THE MISSION TO KING KABBA REGA.
In a previous chapter, describing Baker's services in Central Africa as
Governor-General, the reader will remember that an account was given of the
23
354 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
treachery of Kabba Rega, King of Unyoro, who viciously attacked Baker, but
was in turn routed and driven out of his capital, Malindi, and his uncle,
Rionga, installed in his stead. Though Kabba Rega was dethroned as described,
he never lost his influence with his subjects, so that, after Baker left the
country, he raised an army with which he easily defeated Rionga, and recovered
the rulership, in which he continued with greater security than before. But
the king's enmity against Egypt was intense because of Baker's action, --
as. the representative of the Khedive-and as Kabba Rega was, next to M'tesa, the
most powerful ruler in Central Africa, his authority was greatly feared.
Besides, he was harassing the Egyptian frontier, and had made all effort at
esac J extension of
the borders or
advance to-
wards Lake
Albert ex-
ceedingly dan-
gerous. " 'To
placate this
king. or, if
possible, to
win his friend-
ship, was so
ne ces s ary,
that, reposing
the greatest
confidence in
Eimnin, Gor
don decided
@i to send him
if Eilen. =-- ent to Uny oro
- _EMIN AND HIS ESCORT EN ROUTE FOR UNYORO. with this pur-
Audi
pose in view. Any other man than Emin might well have recoiled from such
an undertaking, but being, like Gordon, a fatalist, he did not hesitate to set
out, with a small escort, and succeeded in reaching Malindi after a journey
of nearly three months. Here he found Kabba Rega in no amiable frame of
mind, but by careful address and a bestowal of presents, Emin finally concluded
a peace with the King, which was so well observed that Gordon was soon
after materially assisted by Kabba Regd, as have other travellers "In That
region since notably the Church Missionary Society representatives.
APPOINTED GOVERNOR-GENERAL.
The success of Emin's mission to the King of Unyoro was recognized by
Gordon in a most gracious manner, not only by the most complimentary con-
siderations, but by his appointment, in 1878, as Governor of the Equatorial
&
HEROES OF -THE DARK CONTINENT. 355
Provinces, with the rank of Bey, which position he retained up to the time
of his promotion to Pasha.
When Emin took charge of the administration of the Provinces, he was in
the unenviable, indeed dangerous, position of one who finds himself at the
head of a friendly body surrounded by a powerful and hostile force. 'The
only district in peace was a narrow strip along the Nile from Lado to Albert
Lake, and in a small country east of the Nile, occupied by the Shulis tribe.
But nowise discouraged, Emin laid aside all fear, if indeed he ever experienced
the meaning of such a word, and set about the work of extending his authority
and promoting peace. So resolutely did he apply himself that by 1880 most
of the sta- rmonmens == - >
tions founded R
by Gordon, [
some forty in R
had
been rebuilt,
and a weekly
post between
them estab-
lished, which
was perfectly
secure.. ... In
short,. peace
settled down
upon: - tlie
land with the
quict ~of. :a
brooding
dove, for even
the '' slave
dealers: - had
been effectu-
7 EMIN HAILED BY UNYORO WARRIORS.
ally rooted
out. Besides this beneficent work, the Equatorial Provinces, which in 1878
showed a deficit of nearly $200,000 per annum, had not only become self-sus-
taining, but actually exhibited a surplus of $40,000. 'This result was due to
well matured consideration of the people's need, and a rigid application of
economy, combined with well directed labor. He had divided the whole province
into districts; in each of which was a military station where the tax of grain
and cattle was collected from the natives. His own capital was fixed at
Lado, ten miles north of Gondokoro, which he greatly improved and made
of it a well built town, all the government buildings and the mosque being of
brick and roofed with corrugated iron, though the other buildings were chiefly
grass huts, such as are common among most of the African tribes.
356 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
The streets are wide and considerable space is left between the houses
and the fortifications, while beyond these are large gardens. The fortifications
are pierced by three gates, at which sentries are kept posted day and might,
the gates being opeited from 6 A. m.to 8p. m., Here the best order pre-
vails, not only among the garrison but among the people as well ; for while
the soldiers are made to drill regularly, the inhabitants are required to observe
rules of cleanliness, not only in their own households, but to sweep the streets
also, while the curfew is rung at 8 P. M. as a protection against fire, the many
grass houses of the place rendering this olden time precaution necessary.
Emin's soldiers are, or were, nearly all Makraka men, who are distin-
guished for their bravery no less than for their physical perfection, which is
remarkable. They are armed with Remington rifles and wear a uniform com-
STATION OF LADO, CAPITAI, OB THE EQUATORIAI, PROVINCES.
posed of a white tunic and trousers, boots, fez, and a belt of leopard skin which
serves to hold cartridges, sword, bayonet and knife. f
Each village is also required to support a police force, as conservators of
the public peace and who attend to collecting the government tax. 'These
police, who act also the part of dragomen, attend, on application, to the en-
gagement of porters when work is required about the station. T hey are so
nearly Maked as to have no uniform, but 'are armed with double-barrelled shot
guns, which they have learned to use with no small skill, and are as brave as
they are savage appearing. |
The strongest stations in Emin's province are those at Lado, Kirri, and
Duffili, but the most interesting one is Wadelei, from the fact that it was at
this place Emin made his last residence, and where he was so long invested,
as will be described hereafter.
HEROES OF 'FHE DARK CONTINENT. 357
NATIVES OF THE SOUDAN.
To better understand the dangers and difficulties connected with an ad-
ministration of the Khedival rule in the Egyptian Soudan and provinces, it is
necessary to know something of the people or tribes over which this nomi-
nal rule extended. For it was not only slave dealers that opposed a most ob-
stinate resistance to all attempts made to spread civilizing influences through-
out that region, for quite as much, even more, resistance was offered by the
natives themselves. 'This opposition, however, may be generally traced to the
Arab slave dealers, who had for so many years carried desolation in their
Pov m¥
Ap mnt * apo ~ nous
a -- ess. C_ Faw Co lied l_
EMIN S IRREGULARS-NATIVE POLIC.
wake, robbing the tribes of their cattle, forcing ransoms of ivory for captives
they made, burning villages and carrying thousands of the people into slavery,
that it is not a matter for wonder that a universal mistrust of foreigners was
felt, and that all the tribes fell into a condition of chronic war. To this ab-
normal condition, the natural outgrowth of murder, rapine and every form of
oppression, we must add that of a normal savagery, which made of them the
very incarnation of imbruted cruelty and ferocity.
Africa is the home of perhaps a hundred distinct tribes, but along the
Nile, between Khartoum and the great lakes, are to be found the most diverse
358 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
characteristics, ranging from the perfectly naked, shiftless, cannibal Niam-
Niams, to the fairly well governed, clothed and housed Wagandas who, though
occupying the most central kingdom, are undoubtedly the foremost people of
the so-called dark regions of Africa.
All the various tribes are communistic and live in villages composed most
commonly of sticks, or poles bent in the shape of a domed hut, and thatched
with grass. 'These habitations are variously shaped, however, even while re-
taining the general dome design, for some terminate in a sharp apex, others
are cylindrical and pointed, many are oblong, with high and wide doors, and yet
others with entrance so small as to admit a person only when crawling on his
hands and knees. Not a few are raised on posts several feet from the ground
so as to afford shade for a large group of villagers sitting underneath; while,
to cap the f ‘
climax of
human eccen-
tricity in th;
«construction
of dwellings,
'a - few ~ have
their homes
in caves ex.
cavated in the
hill-sides. 7
Most of the | ~.
tribes along
the ~ Nile ars
PaStoral, and STATION AT KIRRL
raise immense herds of cattle which they never, or very rarely kill for meat, but
make the best uses of milk, by drinking it pure, or making butter, cheese, curds,
etc. Though a great quantity of butter is made, it is never eaten, being used ex-
clusively for greasing the hair and body, for an African without grease is like
an American belle without jewelry.. Some of the tribes pay considerable atten-
tion to raising grain, of which @oorcZ, a sorghum maize, is the principal pro-
duct. Though not worried by invasions of crows, cut-worms, locusts or grain
flies, the African agriculturist is not without natural enemies that render his
crops precarious. Several species of birds attack the plant when it first peeps
above the ground, and so great would be the ravages, if no protection was
offered, that to defend his growing crop the agriculturist is compelled to adopt
expedients more effective than scare-crows. In the centre of the field,-which
is never very large, being more like a garden,-a high platform is erected, to
which strings are attached radiating to every point of the field. Boys are stationed
on the platform, and when flocks of birds make a swoop to attack the plants
they pull these strings sharply and thus frighten the winged pests. Hippopo-
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.- 359
tami and elephants are the most serious curse to the grain-fields, however, for
these cannot be frightened away.
NATURAL DRESS OF THE NATIVES.
Around nearly every village is a zereba, or hedge of thorns, which serves
the double purpose of a defence in case of attack, and as a corral for cattle at
night. Among the warlike tribes these hedges are grown so thick that a
passage through them is impossible, affording all the protection of a fortifica-
tion, and having only a single entrance, which is easily defended.
-_,,,
o
ep
ra
P
A iii/h, t
Ue.
ro aad
pt
mc
e
FOA
son
wal
A PVH
!
Y W.»
CAAC
M
f
0
CATTLE COMMON TO THE NILE REGION.
In addition to the butter that is used for greasing the body, many employ
ochre or other mineral pigments, also ashes, burnt bricks, etc., with which the
legs, arms, breast and face are colored in almost identical resemblance to many
of the Indian tribes of our country. This use of grease and coloring matter
takes the place of clothes, for in so warm a country, clothing being a discom-
fort, a comfortable substitute is found by giving color to the skin that serves
to hide a disgusting nakedness. A thought of indecent exposure no more
occurs to him than it does to an animal, and as Baroud Bey observes "any
360 . HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
garment on him is as much out of place as a coat would be on one of his
cows." t
All"of the tribes south of Fashodo, as far as Unyoro, are seen in their
natural state, except that in addition to the application of oil and ochre, they
wear rings around their arms, necks and ankles made of copper, iron, ivory,
serpent's skin or hippopotamus hide. 'To these body ornaments the women of
a few tribes mutilate their lower lips and lobes of the ear, and insert large
round pieces of quartz, ivory or colored glass, after the manner of certain South
American people. Beads, of course, are everywhere seen, and are worn as
girdles, necklaces, and formed into passamenterie, besides being used very
largely as currency. Besides other decorations, especially among the Shooli,
Madi, Lango and the Latooka Baris the women wear helmets of plaited - hair,
we
..............
CAVE-DWELLERS ALONG THE NILE.
or work the hair into fantastic shapes and the most ingenious and intricate
manner. Feathers are also often used to heighten the effect.
- BEAUTIFUL WOMEN OF THE MADL
The Baris are the most warlike of all African tribes and, I may also add,
the most treacherous. 'The men are tall and generally heavy, while the women
mare noted for strength.
The Madis are smaller in size than the Baris, but more graceful, and in
fact, are almost the realization of the perfect type of physical manhood. 'T hey
take infinite pains in adorning their bodies, and in dressing the hair; and tls. /
too with such taste and becomingness that the effect is highly pleasing. Among
the women are to be found not a few, but many, of the most charmingly appear-
ing nymphs, as beautiful in form and feature as Virgil ever conceived.
Very few of the tribes along the Nile carry shields but are well armed
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 361
with spears, oows and poison-tipped arrows. 'The latter are also fiendishly barbed
to make the greatest laceration. Blacksmiths are common among nearly all
the tribes, and, though they work iron by the most primitive methods, contrive
aem T m - =-- - : =s = monroe C mesma -_ >
5 ~- 69 s =- an een
fs
A (CE
t
4 fijfiw N
A f“??? # dt
A 9 a
I
t
DEFFNDING 'THE GRAIN FIELDS.
«o make very useful implements. Mo/ots, or hoes, hand-plows, spears, iron-
pointed arrows, are the principal articles that they manufacture.
Throughout this large district, at least south of Gondokoro, large game is
plentiful, which gives evidence that the people are not good hunters. Elephants
and hippopotami are very numerous and give nearly all the tribes infinite
trouble by sacking the granaries, or rioting among the growing crops, destroy-
ing field after field in the night-time, and giving themselves small concern for
ext»
ween 2 not,
ane a+
gor a* on
BARIL WOMEN CONSTRUCTING A DWELLING.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 363
the shouts, cries and trumpet-blaring that is used with the vain hope of scaring
them away. Besides these huge animals there are leopards that occasionally
become so bold as to dispute the passage of a man, and to often stalk men
and women. Whole villages are sometimes called out to give aid in destroying
some leopard that has become an
' epicure on human flesh. Wild boars,
a few giraffes, great herds of ante-
lope, hartbeests, and quaggas abound.
Buffaloes, though still common, are
not nearly so numerous as formerly,
their numbers seeming to have been
greatly reduced during the past dozen
years.
SsAVAGERY OF THE CROCODILE.
But of all: the creatures most
dreaded in Africa the crocodile is the
chief.. Me is : the sly. -but horrible
gorgon that takes toll from every
living thing. Cattle stooping to drink
.- are seized by the nose or whipped by
may" ms powerful tail into the stream.; If
-=- herds attempt to swim a creek or
river some of them are sure to be
A pulled nnder by its dreadful: jaws.
__" But the crocodile is no discriminator
' ' among living things; he lies in wait
and is content with whatever fortune
throws in his way.. He loves young
pig, or a fat monkey, but his appe-
tite is omnivorous and he takes with
equal greed a luscious negro boy 'or
a piece of putrid offal, the last re-
mains. of some cow. or ox that has
lain blistering in the sun until push-
ed- into the water.
As a measure for protecting water-carriers from greedy crocodiles, the place
where water is drawn from the river by village women, is nearly always guarded
by a barrier made by driving piles in a semicircle so as to make a small en-
closure, inside; of which it is possible to dip up water with security. Orders
are, indeed, given forbidding anyone from taking water at any other place, but
despite these precautions and warnings, every village along the Nile has a
weekly mourner for some more adventurous person who has been borne away
472 , P "Aae,
7 /// - (aS er F/ FF. ARN
i [Ll/fl" ‘z‘zflf ga al -
= f
1 &
thr AN Fo flp ey
p aar
tf M p
364 ' ~ HEROHS oF THE piakk cONTINENT
by a crocodile. Emin Pasha-reports that six women lost their lives If this
way during the first few weeks of his stay in Lado, while more than a dozen
very narrow escapes were reported. In one instance a crocodile even mounted
the bank and crawled up to a porch of one of the houses on which two young
gentlemen were taking an afternoon nap, evidently with the intention of break-
ing his fast on human steak. Fortunately, the young men awoke in time to
disappoint the courageous reptile, but they were scared to the point of death.
ss Cae " P ernie e eee eeu ine Gia maine aora oi
,,,,,,,
~~ vse
STALKED BY A LEOPARD.
THE KINGDOMS OF UNYORO AND UGANDA.
The Baris, Madi and Shuli tribes are hunters and pursue with special
zest hippopotami and crocodiles, which they kill for food quite as much as for
extermination, but as a rule the Nile people reject crocodile flesh as unclean;
not, however, because of its natural offensiveness, but because every such reptile
is placed under a ban for having eaten human flesh. 'They say: ''Why, the
crocodile may have devoured my grandmother; shall I then eat the flesh that
was nourished on my grandmother?" . ,
The Dinkas are a pastoral people, but nevertheless they are extremely
poor, thin to a cadaverous appearance, effeminate, and altogether so repulsive
that it is little wonder they are regarded only as fit to be slaves.. The Shir
f
é
[LD
t
ZZ
‘l
ZJ
2
>~---ass
e
ote
Coba
gant
7 D xi
tears
atk
W
fiww 47 . ae \
(4
s
\\
¢
#
p
<
a
at
Ll "~ GG HHH pp aat
er - / x§\\\\\\ re,
; 1 - S ZZ Z
« Slt s < ‘ Z \
* XC ~ 4 y AY
(365)
NATIVE BLACKSMITHS.
366 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
tribe is only one degree improved, though in some respects - they are to _be
commended, especially as they are noted for their affectionate dispositions, and
the strength of family ties, which is equal to that found among the most
highly civilized people. 'They are also plumper and better formed than the
Dinkas, but are no more courageous. : f
The Shuli, Lango and Umiro tribes are vigorous, independent and brave,
by which characteristics alone have they avoided absorption by their powerful
Alb, J'fliy \ \\
art
Ik. |
mme
-
Cerra a'
ee hao
<< --->
(
| >
=--
\\\\
ATTACKED BY A CROCODILE.
neighbors of Uganda and Unyoro. Like all the more northern tribes, they maintain
and are largely influenced by their Cojoor priests, who are at once rain-makers,
medicine men and purveyors of magic in a hundred forms. 'The office of
Cojoor would be a very pleasant one, in that he is regarded with the most
reverential awe, were it not for the exceedingly discouraging fact that it fre-
quently happens he forfeits his reputation by attempting things which he is
unable to perform.. He is often called on to heal a sick chief, or to produce
rain when the country is suffering from a long protracted drouth ; or to bring
disaster upon an invading enemy. Failure of his magic to work these bene
367
1111
+
ad
aad
oar Lat
ee a LAT
ipsa F
er 9, mares 39 9040 ar4 e
3 3 9 G an ae crore ne
P
AF >a
V
iss
\ RC“
NENVGNA
‘Q‘a' A
"NH :
f
SNSOY
pe s el
rae e r Loh
e ba Lae
Fee erode
Zen
er eni PF F
a Pm aar ba Abas iaa L
g Cone? 2 o
due tees
Anta bao 7
mao rao d S y
2p Lalit
222
Palmira
pore
ie es
ifiktt‘ zl. \
\l\\\\\\\\\\\\||\!\\\|.w
eL LFA Te parr or noen aang Faas ara mss 4
Mh nre e e a te t
era see § z
eZ. =
Tm Sd
§ alo 5s
< “suwkwt‘flv ze
a e
5 arts
> o (
a+ s $\
fad TPN
7}? s mw\\\\\y“\\
a P mir o t
er Ga Lf?) LPP
s Z § Papi
i
arre VV
A\\,
C
ke s
een B
* ya
¥ a hhhrflv/va/W.’
ies wan eens
e tex open
Sse -
set- Bors eee
x
Css
BURNING A CAJOOR IN UGANDA.
intact through
sk
1
1NnCC
11n g-
875, that potentate has
886, although
JH ~I
JH "14
£ Long to »M'tesa. i
isit 0
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
fices is commonly punished by the people seizing the Cojoor and burning h
at the stake.
;..4a//a, 4\
($%
/,,///w« 2
A
(A,
}
G
ene the I a ~ ¥ 7 y
Hp saas ys presse e
10 “Mu thaw‘v»U“ffl-t/4 “a,"
ty
A d
ems
s ;/%%
NH
Since the v
been outwardly a Moslem, or was up to the time of his death
JCA.
Uganda and Unyoro, which for many years have rema
an alliance offensive and defensive, are the largest and most prosperou
doms of - Afr
68 HEROES OF Ths DARK CONTINENT.
St)“ O Korosko
so wady Halfa
R AMHammed
a Berber
400
}
100 200 800
1 N 1 ”1,3
Ecale of English Statute Miles a
10°
Bahr et A rap
. h
<
&
e
H
% i
2 ("A
\
I
\ t
j N ¥ % \
A # he I.
: ~ J
( « Go dj & A €
Ringo G f 94910 Fe ‘n'u‘
~¢\..
\ \-"“.'
a
Dufili 2
AI
_ m KO Tatiko 6664”
NILE REGION, IN WHICH GORDON OPERATED.
: esp x" iv lo
'. Khartoun f
34 k
Stanley has claimed him as a Christian.
§ His son, and successor, M'wanga, has
J been a pronounced Moslem and built
several mosques in his kingdom, so that
nearly all his subjects now profess thai
I faith.
Kabba «Rega, the ruler of Unyoro,
has been less pliant than M'tesa, sand
has remained insensible to Mohammedan
influence. He has preferred to occupy
a neutral position in order to reap like
advantages from both Moslems and
Christians, receiving each alike and giv-
ing enconfagement for both to win his .
favor by Aiberal gifts: In fact, the king
is still 'a hearty believer, in fetiches,
though he does not expose his idols so
openly 'as formerly. In' his. palace. are
still found many greeégrees and rudely
carved wooden images of men and
animals, to which he pays his devotions,
and consults on occasions of need.
THE SITUATION OF EMIN PASHA.
Through the several tribes" thus
i hastily sketched, > Emin: Pasha : (a - title
subsequently given), had. to make his
way, and as their friendship was essential
to the success of Gordon's undertaking,
it" fell . to Eimnin to overcome . tHicir
natural hostility,. and secure their syin-
pathy. His easy acquisition of language
was a masterful advantage, and by speak-
ing their own tongiic he Obtained a.
hearing from all the tribes which might
not otherwise have been accorded. - Thus
Emin. aft length, was hailed as a friend
and his missions 4 b //\\\§\; S5 ss:
s em o _ ar as Se G IN A1 p Natan " -
INDUSTRIES INAUGURATED BY EMIN.
But news from the north, reporting repeated victories by the Mahdi's troops,
unsettled affairs in Emin's provinces and resulted in cutting his communication
with the civilized world. M'Uanga, son of M'tesa, and the new King of Uganfia,
at once developed hostility to all Europeans through his open sympathies
with the Mahdi, and to prevent the possibility of relief coming to Gordon's
HEROES OF THF DARK CONTINENT. 371
rescue by way of Zanzibar, which must expose his own kingdom, he put a
strong force to guard the south-east route and closed every avenue leading in
or out of the kingdom, thus the last news that we received from Emin was
transmitted in 1883. For his successful resistance to the rebels the Khedive
conferred upon Emin the title of Pasha, which honorable promotion reached
him just before communication between him and the outer world was cut off.
EMIN'S APPEAL FOR HELP.
With Emin, who was now practically a prisoner, though still the recognized
head of his provinces, were Dr. William Junker and Captain Casati, Russian:
explorers, who chanced to be in the Lake region at the time of the Mahdi's.
rebellion. - All three were, for a long time, supposed to be lost, until Emin.
contrived to send a brief letter to Mr. Allen, Secretary of the British and
Foreign Anti-Slavery Society, in which his beleaguered position was described.
_ In 1886 Dr. Junker succeeded in getting through the Uganda lines and reaching
Zanzibar, following which escape the king of Uganda withdrew his. lines of
guards from the route and again permitted communication between his kingdom
and Zanzibar. In this same year (1886) Emin sent several communications to
friends in Europe, and to Dr. Junker, who was then in Vienna, describing his
critical situation; which letters resulted in an earnest appeal being made by -
Junker and the International Society for government aid to relieve him. - f
While the tribes of the lake region were still hostile to Emin and were
giving him much harassment through the intrigues of Arabic slave dealers,
his personal liberty was little restricted. He might anytime, indeed," have
quitted the country, a thing 'which the slavers were eager for him to do, «But
he could not bring himself to even consider such a step. 'To leave the country .
as a fugitive would be to abandon the stations he had established, and the
people who had a lawful claim upon his protection.- His sense of honor and duty
compelled him to remain and share the fate of his subjects, whatever it might
be. To take his people out of the country was an impossibility. He had no
means for provisioning so many on the long route to Zanzibar, and if this
difficulty could be met, another equally great still remained, for women and
children could not endure so long and fatiguing a march without hundreds
dying on the way. Emin, accordingly, honestly and wisely awaited the result
of his appeal for aid, and in the meantime continued his geographical and
ethnological studies. :
. A DREADFUL FIRE. . ,.
In the fall of 1886 Emin discovered the great Kubik river, the source of
which he found to be somewhere in the Usongora Mountains. He desired very
- much to follow up the stream to its head, believing it would lead him into an
unexplored region, but his ambition in this direction was diverted by an extensive
prairie fire that did great destruction by sweeping an enormous district, destroy-
ing villages, crops and vast stores of ivory, and which almost annihilated
372 HEROES OF 'THE DARK CONTINENT
Wadelei itself. Emin had therefore to turn his attention to relieving, so far as
lay in his power, the new suffering to which his people were thus suddenly
brought. He solicited aid from a neighboring Usogora chief, who responded
with such substantial means that Emin was able to rebuild Wadelei, and to
S
v
~- Sn
_ BY my
St
wes w
Shoes
fǤ\\
W
bring the people who had suffered most by the fire into a fairly comfortable
condition again. f f
When the true situation of Emin became known in Europe, it was believed
that Egypt, which he had so bravely served, would immediately dispatch a force
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 573
by way of Zanzibar for his deliverance; but that government contented itself
with the bare offer of a promise to advance $50,000 to an expedition that would
attempt his relief, and with inviting proposals to that end.
The. indifference exhibited by the
Egyptian government, which seems to
have become utterly unmindful of Emin's
services in extending the sovereignty .of
nation to the great lakes, and in|
carrying the beneficent effects of civiliz- |
ation over such an immense . district,
aroused England, and caused to be set on
foot well directed means for rescuing the
heroic - Pasha.. Government. action, was,
however, anticipated by private persons, f); AravarSpimn
who thoroughly equipped a large ex- | Z
pedition for the purpose, and - placed
Stanley in command, recognizing his in-
comparable fitness for such an undertaking.
TO THE RELIEF OF EMIN.
Leathuing (from latest reports - that |
Emin, after his losses by fire, had moved |
southward from Wadelei, Stanley decided |
to enter Africa by way of the Congo and
tale his expedition up that river as far
as its navigation would permit, and then |
strike: across the country over a route |
with which he was somewhat familiar.
Stanley dispatched messengers far in
advance of | the: expeditionary force to
apprise Emin of his coming, as it was wot
known how critical was his real extremity,
and an announcement of succor near at
hand might have the effect of either
hastening a meeting, or in inducing Emin
to hold his position a while longer.
The messengers thus sent forward met
Emin at the southern extremity of Lake
Muita N:ziga, as he was returning from a
trip to Usongora to visit the chief who had
helped him to rebuild Wadelei. 'The news SMIN'S rRovINcHES,
thus brought of Stanley's advance was a most pleasant surprise to Emin,
whose anxiety to meet his deliverer repressed all other ambitions. Not knowing the
route Stanley would take to reach the lake regions, Emin proceeded to Wadelei,
____3'0f. -~,{40\'i{giéude 31° Hast from 32° Grge wich 3'3°N
y ~, Fashoda 1 I
L Q‘ w F.
% . l
& f nance., 0 10 20 30 40 so so 70 ro a0 100
» L t 1 1 1 i i F 1
4 *- . s m R
Q? £ "mt Scale of English Statute Miles
| [~. ' 8"
"%
.\.
"~-__
Ay c % tT
/7\
#
~I
T 'rl 4 ~
rfimKuka ora."
%
s-~~«
Labore 0 \| ~
Khor Ayu *
374 HEROES OF. THE DARK CONTINENT:
reasonably conjecturing that, since nearly all his letters describing his critical situa-
tion had been sent from that place, Stanley would no doubt make every effort to
push on directly for that station. But even after learning from the messengers
of Stanley's approach, Emin wrote to Dr. Falkin, of Edinburgh, under date of
April 17th, 1887, reiterating his previously expressed resolution never to aban-
dou his work in Africa, and to remain in his position even. after Stanley's
F z
sx
BRINGING FOOD TO THE FIRE SUFFERERS.
arrival. He declared the same in letters also written to Dr. Junker and to the
British Anti-Slavery Society. 'This resolution, however, was no doubt made in
the belief that Stanley's purpose was to relieve him by furnishing new recruits
and supplies of ammunition to last for a protracted period, which would enable
him to hold his position for an indefinite time; and not with any idea that
Stanley would give such assistance as would permit him to leave the stations
garrisoned and to remove all the people who desired to make their escape to
the coast.
HBEBKOES OF: THE DARK CONTINENT. 3
~I
Cf it
OTHER RELIEF EXPEDITIONS.
Emin's anxiety for Stanley's safety after a time seemed to exceed that of
his hope for speedy relief, so many months having now elapsed since a meeting
with the messengers, and still without any further news whatever of Stanley.
Emin knew the dangers that lay in the way, not only from the powerful and
warlike tribes through which Stanley must pass, but also from other perils,
such as famine, pestilence, and the almost insurmountable obstacles of raging
rivers, dense thickets, unexplored country, and, lastly, possible mutiny. Being
'_.
k , t « o;.’o‘
>/‘\\\7' L'? 7'77/fi/ s . C
2 ) AAL aS RE S
'.""l//€v/, “\L.';\\ Woe? 4 CAD
4 A:
NL/chfi ags
y / _-
so por Aer her oa Paa
o ~
digs; r sa 5L
w-
y « f % Srp
w*,* *~
~-gx " A
fa -g
THE USOGA CHIEF'S SLAVES REBUILDING WADELEI.
unable to bear the suspense any longer, Emin, in September, started out in
search of the intrepid explorer. 'The last news that came from Emin came in
a letter dated November 2d, and was written from Kibero, on the eastern shore
of the Muta Nziga. From this time, for more than a year, all traces of both
Emin and Stanley were lost, so that the public mind again became restless with
the fear that both had perished. Nor was this anxiety without cause; for the
long silence of itself was foreboding of ill, while other events were known to be
transpiring in the Central Lake region which gave the somberest aspect to the
situation. From Stanley Falls, and the station at the mouth of the Aruwimi
376 HEROFS OF THE DARK CONTINENT:
River, where a part of the expedition, under Barttelot, was encamped awaiting
Stanley's return from his trip to Albert Lake, came letters full of sad prophecy.
Stanley had started across the country to communicate with Emin Pasha, with
a promise to return in four months, leaving the principal part of his supplies at
Stanley Falls, which he made the base of his operations. But month after month
rolled by without any report of him being received, until his lieutenants at the
Aruwimi and the upper station believed him to have met with disaster. Indeed,
this belief grew so strong that Barttelot decided to proceed in quest of him, and
in attempting to move that part of the expedition under his command a mutiny
resulted, in which Barttelot was killed, as will be more fully related in a subse-
quent chapter. These facts were communicated to the promoters of the expedi-
tion in Europe, and of course caused the gloomiest feelings among the friends
of the great explorer. But to intensify the fear which already prevailed, at this
Teritical juncture came letters from Missionary
McKenzie, written from the seat of disturb-
ance, describing a very reign of terror that
was then prevailing over nearly all the lake
region. . Mwanga, the successor of M'tesa,
urged by Mohanmedans, had attacked the
mission (stations, killing many. Christians}
and burning Bishop Hannington. 'This news
threw all friends of the expedition into de-
spondency, for it was evident that, under this
condition of affairs, Stanley would have to
fight his way not only among savages, but
must meet a more formidable foe in thou-
sands 'of well-armed Arabs, who would dis-
pute his march. These facts seemed 'to
thoroughly justify the prediction that Stanley
MAJOR CHARLES WISSMANN. had. fallen a victim either to- Tipo Tihs
duplicity (who was known to look with an evil eye on the efforts of the Congo
Association to suppress the slave trade), or to the overpowering numbers of
hostile natives, re-enforced by Arabs in Uganda and Unyoro, who might easily
crush a much larger force than that which was known to accompany Stanley;
nor was there great reliance placed in the loyalty of His soldiers. - Most of these
were, or had been, in the service of Tipo Tib, and their sympathies as well as
interests would seem to be - naturally with the Arabs; for thougly slaves them-
selves they took savage delight in making slaves of others, while their love of
rapine was encouraged by Arab masters. Thus the situation was truly one
for alarm.
At: an' expedition was proposed, to. go in search -of, both .the ex:
plorers. Out of this proposition grew the organization of two expeditions under
-German auspices; one, under command of Wissmann, to enter Africa
HEROES OF 'THE DARK CONTINENT. 377
by the Congo; and the other, led by Dr. Peters, to begin the search by proceed-
ing by way of Zanzibar, the two expecting to meet somewhere in the lake regions.
| CAREER OF LIEUTENANT WISSMANN.
A deelswe result was expected from these expeditions, and with good reason,
for though Dr.. Peters: had no experience in African exploratlons yet 'he was an
intrepid leader, with great executive abilities, and possessing many accomplish-
ments that made: him. an available; man. for the most hazardous undertakings.
But while every confidence was reposed in Peters, public expectation con-
tered chiefly in Wissmann, whose experience was equal to that of Stanley
himself, as a short sketch W111 show.
Lieutena‘nt Charles Wissmann was born in Frankfort-on-the-Oder, in 1853,
whose father was a German inspector of military stores, whose duties com-
pelled him to change his residence so frequently that young Charles was not
put:in-school but received instruction from private tutors until the death of
his father in 1866, when Charles attended consecutively the high schools at
Erfurt, Kiel and New Ruppir. Upon reaching the age of eighteen, he joined a
cadet.corps in, Berlin, and two years later was attached to a regiment of Meck-
lenburg infantry. He was distinguished for his knowledge of the natural
sciences, to a study of which he applied himself most industriously, setting
these much above. his interest in military affairs. Nevertheless, in 1873, he
was promoted to a second lieutenancy, which permitted him to resign from the
army, and through the influence of Dr. Pogge he offered his services to the
African Society of Berlin. Upon an acceptance of his services by the society
he was appointed topographer to Dr. Pogge's expedition, with which he sailed
for. St. -Paul: de: Loando to make a journey into West. Africa.
The expedition commanded by Dr. Pogge reached St. Paul early in 1881,
and proceeded directly through the Ulunda States and up the valley of the
EspHicapa, actoss. by Kassai, Lubilosh, Lomani and om to Nlangwe where
they.arrived on. May 5th. At this point Wissmann left the main body and
continued his journey eastward until he-reached Zanzibar on the 15th of Novem-
ber, 1882, thus making the trip across the continent in less than two years.
WISSMANN'S SECOND EXPEDITION.
On his return to Europe in January, 1883, Wissmann prepared at once
for another expedition into Central Africa, a proffer of his services to the
International African Association having been accepted. Considerable time was
spent in organizing the expedition, which did not leave Europe until early in
1884, for the Portuguese interior station of Cassange. He plunged into the
Dark Continent again with his accustomed enthusiasm, and following mainly
his former route, by way of Kassai, reached Lubuka, the residence of King
Mukenga, on November foth, thus makmg a wonderfully rapid journey of over
one thousand miles. Restmg at Lubuka for a month he followed up the Lulua
river a considerable distance, on the left shore of which he founded a station
which he named Luluaberg. Continuing his journey he came upon the Saukura
(g48)
22.) cp a
i
272 4
rel tnt
{
£
o
dr
K7,
AR &
Pi ma tent St
--- tanats 8 c-
--- ss
--- wes Ss
--- Mas mss
mo . yes Sn
Amisitie
\ C
AS- \=Q\\‘\}\
ast
E- Mikes
Wotres R
-~ Ss %
‘°'\"‘ rox
--
Way s
ssd (ast 3
Ras \;\“\~\‘\\‘t‘$f" n L053} R
& San
Goes
se
" ASAA \\\\\ Sts
N \\‘\\\\\\:\\\\:‘\ \% s
oor oo sygs:
Net y \\
C
at
~ N €
mAH. :
st
&
&
Gearoid &
pene ne es
d N x? \
s
basu) foss lae
BN \\‘:\\‘\“
R
h
N &
S &
\ >
&
Nass
e -Z SA I
(”fit 7 Pane Fp ain
Zazen 24. bur Ahr LC n MEET
>-
0 35435, ‘J &
iris Foc irr te
=> -
ars e --
f), hd
pers
ses
| f
f
o:
' “a?" 3
OMV
/ ‘ “a“!
/ai
A Y I
e
%
l, q); 'R
.,__ Pore?
es
Fa
2
ats
GR
<
\
s
Sei
20 »
¥ ar
2 "axes .
4
A
a geat ~ Yk s
A array.
He fa. 14:4“?
/%
ss feat . n e
ONG THE LULVA RIVER.
HBERQES OF. THE pARK-GONTINENT __.. ' i-
river and lake, which he believed to be a new discovery, but afterwards found
that the lake was the same as that discovered by Stanley and by him named
Lake Leopold.
Wissman returned to the Atlantic coast at the end of 1884, and retired to
Madeira for a time to restore his shattered health, but his recuperation being
rapid, in the fall of 1885 he returned to the Congo with the purpose of explor-
ing the country lying north-east of the Lulua river. He penetrated far into
the interior without meeting any serious obstacles until he reached the Baluba
nation, where he was so fiercely assailed by the natives that he was forced to
retreat for a distance of one hundred miles down the Lulua. Here he stopped
for a time at a friendly village and then started across the continent. On the
way he explored several tributaries of the Lulango river, and ascertained the
sources of the Tschnapa and Lomani rivers He then proceeded on to Lake
Tanganyika, the shore of which he reached in April, 1887." After a short stay
at Ujiji Wissmann again crossed the lake and visited Nyalhgwe, which is two
hundred miles west of Tanganyika, where he remained a month exploring the
vicinity, and then turned eastward again and reached Zanzibar in August follow-
ing, thus having crossed the continent twice, and once penetrated to the Central
regions, so that altogether he had the experience of quite 12,000 miles of
- travel in Africa.
STANLEY TO THE RESCUE.
Wissmannu's fourth expedition into Africa, which was made in 1888, with
the purpose of finding Stanley and also to search for and relieve Emin Pasha,
as already explained, was conducted with dispatch and. wise management, but it
nevertheless failed in its prime mission.. Wissmann proceeded to the great lakes,
but found the country in such a turbulent state, with Emin a closely guarded
prisoner in the hands of the Mahdi, and his own force too small to attempt
aggressive measures for Emin's relief, that he made haste to reach the east
coast to report the news and. hurry to Emin's aid a force large enough -to
compel his release. f
Dr. Peters, in the mean time, had pushed forward through a thousand
obstacles, as far as Lake Victoria, where he was so beset by large bodies of
hostile natives that he was compelled to abandon all efforts at further advance,
and to employ all his energies to beating back the enemy. His position was
therefore as critical as was Emin's, for he had divided his force and one half
of it had been driven back to the main highway leading to Zanzibar, over
which it retreated to the coast. At the present writing reports have been
received of the massacre of Dr. Peters and all the people with him, by a
force of 1200 Somalis against which he vainly fought for several days.
Stanley's return at last with Emin and 560 persons composing the com-
mand, has relieved the doubts and dark forebodings of the millions who
believed for a long while that both were dead, and from his own reports we
are able to follow, with accurate details, his changing fortunes, the perils that
(0g$)
Ars "
WISSMANN ATIAC
t ?
KED BY THE NATIVES.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 381
beset him, the fears that assailed him, and the desperate adventures which he
met with on his dreadful march through Africa to the rescue of Emin. Stanley
arrived at. Bagamoyo ou the afternoon: of -December 4th, 1859, and on the
second day crossed over to Zanzibar, where a crowd of friends gave them joy-
ous welcome. In the following chapters we will be made acquainted with all
the details of, Stanley's expedition from the time. it penetrated 'the Dark Con-
tineut to the triumphal return; and also a description of Emin's defeat at
the hands of the victorious Mahdi.
Emin, however, met with a dreadful accident upon the very moment of
his return to civilization, which neafly cost him his life. On the evening fol-
lowing his arrival at Bagamoyo while, it is stated, partially under the influence
pet
'of wine that had been drunk to the health of those who welcomed his return,
but more probably through his very defective eyesight, he walked out of an
open window in the house where he intended to lodge for the -night,. and fell
to the ground, a distance of twenty feet.. He received injuries in 'the head
which were so severe u\\‘$\§\\§3§§\§g~\\\m\\ )
able response could Sitha
ormns St
\X \\\\(<~\ sg
explofer 'make, \\\\\\\\§ Ss
f b | Aan e- es
even thought. it \\\\\\\§§\3\ Cif --as,
private - interests,
singe . his,. very
to ambitions which
ffrayel_ in - Africa
| Mas
\\\§\\\\\§M A
:p 2 tal $
the distinguished {@@ f More {
© x ‘\\\\\k\\\§s\\\\§ Sx A,“ & a fIZI’I'A’l/n :f\\\\\\:\t\$\;\§\\\l\v
’\\\\\\ \\;\‘\\{§ y # : }§“§\§.
conflicted with his
heart was wedded
co u.1 d a Tone H. M. STANLEY-FROM A PHOTOGRAPH TAKEN IN JANUARY, 1887.
gratify ? Besides, who else was so admirably qualified for the undertaking,
and in whom would the wofld have such coufideftice? Whatever may have
been his real feelings, certain it is that Stanley immediately cancelled all his
engagements and entered at once into perfecting the details of the organization,
and preparing the expedition for movement at the earliest possible moment.
s$4 _ . - c HEROES OP THE DARK CONTINENT
f HONORS TO STANLEY. ;
After an acceptaiice, by Mr. Stanley, of the. command of. the projected expe-
dition, as a special mark of public confidence as well as favoritism, the City
Corporation of London, in Court of Common Council, held at Guildhall, January
I3th, 1887, presented him with the freedom
of the city, and on the same evening a. ban-
quet was tendered him at the Mansion House,
the Lord Mayor presiding. 'The certificate
conveying the freedom of the city was enclosed
in a gold casket of richest design in arabesque,
standing on a base of Algerine onyx, sur-
mounted by a plinth of ebony, with an ivory
ostrich standing at each corner and an ele-
phant's tusk curving over each bird. The
panels and roof are also of ivory, bearing the
monogram H. M. S. and a miniature map of
Africa. On an oval platform. surmounting
the casket is an allegorical figure of the
" s Congo Free State, seated by the great river
SIR WM. MCKINNON. from which it derives its name. Frou
Mr. Stanley made his preparations for almost immediate departure. He
agcepted the services of eight English officers, as follows: Jephson, Stairs;
Jameson, Barttelot, Johnson, Nelson, Williams, and Dr. Parke, who had obtained
a three-years' leave of absence from the government, and he was also accom-
panied by two officers of the Belgian f
army, who were enlisted at the request
of ~His - Majesty, King Leopold IL.
Among the special articles with which
Mr. Stanley provided himself was a port-
able steel whale boat, which was built
under his=directions in thirteen days.
'This boat was 28 feet long, 6 feet beam
and 2 fret 6 inches deep. It was built
throughout of steel, and divided into
/ R Res\ I
Sit -s #
( [ m ta) W-
: morron S TANL EY
3 > ”‘"§ vig
~
twelve sections, each weighing 75 lbs., |>-"Boup?" a al <.
to. facilitate its 'The gwfll/WIIM’II/flflllf Minimum»: Aw a
sections were fitted on the edges with & w flu“
india-rubber, so that, when brought to- -_ ~I e_
gether and bolted, the joints were water- GOLD CASKET PRESENTED TO STANLEY.
tight. 'The boat pulled ten oars besides carrying a lug sail. Her carrying
capacity was twenty-two men and 1000 lbs. weight of baggage, and she could be
put together in thirty-five minutes, and taken to pieces for transport in little more
than half that time. Mr. Stanley's experience on his previous expedition,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 385
when crossing the continent, and the excellent uses to which he put the Zady
Alre, gave him practical ideas that were of the greatest service, and which found
elaboration in his steel whale-boat which was in every sense a very model of
perfection.
» STANLEY'S AUTOMATIC GUN. R
Another almost equally serviceable, though really only precautionary article
of his equipment was a Maxim automatic machine gun, which was provided
with special mountings, expressly designed to meet the requirements of this
particular service. 'The carriage of this wonderful. gun was so made that it
could be almost instantly folded tp and carried on the shoulder of a single
\, AHS ABS
if
\:ߨ3\q\\\_\ j (o
Unt “NW tll
RIM ( WS
U
t
II
Id
M A t
it {Q 4
NYM
STANLEY'S AUTOMATIC GUN.
person, and it could be again set up and the gun remounted ready for action
itten seconds. For rapid. firing it exceeded even the Gatling gun, for when
the trigger was pulled and held drawn back it poured out a very stream of
bullets, or eleven shots per second, or with a quick pull only one shot might
be discharged. 'To prevent heating during rapid firing, a small reservoir for
water was provided in the breech, so that with each shot the recoil forced a
small quantity of water out of the tank and around the barrel casing. - One
quart of water was used in this way with each one thousand shots fired. The
gun proper weighed forty pounds, and the steel carriage on which it was
mounted was fourteen pounds heavier, but the parts of the latter were easily
235
386 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
detached so as to permit its easy carriage by three or four men. Another pro-
vision, next in importance to the rapidity and accuracy of its firmg, was the
shield with which the gun was provided, rendering the operator almost secure
from the arrows or even bullets of an enemy. 'The accompanying illustration
will show more clearly than, worded descrrpuon the -appearance of the gun and
the manuer of handling it.
DEPARTURE FOR AFRICA.
Stanley left England on the 22d of January and proceeded directly to Calro
where he held an audience with the Khedive, and also with Dr. Carl. Junker,
who had recently returned from the interior, hav1ng been one of Emin Pasha's
lieutenants and by escaping, as already noted brought back the latest: news
concerning the beleaguered, or imprisoned, Governor of the Equatorial Provinces.
In this interview Dr. Junker related that he left Etmnin on January Ist, 1886,
at Wadelai, and succeeded in securing a steamer, upon which he fled up the
Nile, passing the stations of, Fatiko, Lado, Fashoda, Duffili; Tashoro -and -
Magungo, and thence to Chibero, on Albert Lake. He v151ted Kabba Rega at
this latter place and there met Sig. Casati, the Italian explorer, and agent
of the Khedive. After leaving Kabba Rega, Dr. Junker travelled across Uganda
and thence to the south shore of Victoria Lake to Ukumbo, the French mis-
sionary station, where he was kindly received and assisted. In this journey
he get several Europeans among whom were Rev. F. Mackay, and Fathers
Louderal and Delmon, in the Uganda country; Vicar Apostolic Goreau at
Ukumbo:; Rev. F. Gordon and a Mr. Wyce at Ut Salala; a Mr. Grescher, who
has since been killed by Arabs, at 'Taboro, and several missionaries at Mpwapa.
Besides the information thus secured from Dr. Junker, Mr. Stanley was also
presented with an excellent map of the lake regions by the doctor, which he
found to be of great value because of its remarkable accuracy.
Dr. Schweinfurth was also in Cairo at the time of Stanley's visit, and in
company with Dr. Junker called several times upon the latter. At these friendly
visits the most eligible routes for reaching Emin Pasha were frequently and
exhaustively discussed. Both Schweinfurth and Junker strongly advised the
route leading from Zanzibar to Lake Victoria, and over which Stanley had
already. travelled, but notwithstanding the fact that Dr. Junker had recently
escaped over thrs same route, Stanley looked upon it as much less secure than
the approach from the west, on account -of Mwanga's hostility, who held.
every avenue leading out of his kingdom eastward. . He therefore explained his
intention of proceeding by way of the Congo river, believing that with the
steamers at his disposal he might reach the head of that stream in thirty-five
days, after which he would have only a land march of 360 miles, from Stanley
Falls. ; A
Vet another route was discussed, viz., that which leads from the east coast
through Massai land, over which Mr. J. Thomson travelled, and by which he
makes the distance to Wadelai 925 miles; certainly the shortest route, but not
*=} j mee - Nio] | Ie rman
7 o o * _ ClgifTs ftom
abo ,_::__;§§§§:¢1'Wm'mfl|‘
memes
(387)
l me
Hmouttat s
stultmtturt
| 1
7Yi;lfl )
sa
z ~
e gece sete
oan
Lenz
amie trees. mes
o
222277
2724 erd
z"
222.
Pay 4
e a
ae
15
PAZ
gee
elestncnet
si a+e yam
w JIW’;
t Helga 0 ada na a ng pB
9200200220"
EN ROUTE FOR THE CONGO, s yess i. s
388 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
nearly so available as that by the Congo river, which affords excellent means wor
transportation of large quantities of stores, such as Stanley carfied with him.
While Mr. Stanley did not see proper to. accept the advice of Doctors
Junker and Schweinfurth, he was none the less grateful for their kindly in-
terest, and was particularly thankful to the former for the very valuable infor-
mation given respecting the situation of Emin Pasha, the stations, the routes,
the hostlhty of Mwanga, and the location and numbers of Europeans in the
lake region. f
> OFF FOR ZANZIBAR. f
On the 3rd of February Stanley left Cairo en route for Zanzibar, accom-
panied by sixty-one black soldiers of the Egyptian army. Many distinguished
persons were at the station to bid him God-speed, among the number being Sir
E. Baring, Lady Baring; Generals: Baker and Stephenson, Pigrane.: PasHa"and
several European residents of the city. Dr. Junker also accompanied. him 'as
far ds Suez, at which port Stanley, with Dr. Parke, of the Army Medical De-
partment, and his soldiers, embarked for Zanzibar, and on his arrival at that 'city
he engaged a considerable number of East African servants, known to imin
his former journeys.
_- Besides engaging a large party of Zanzibaris porters and soldiers, Stanley
also. had the good fortune to secure, for a round sum; the services of Tlpo 'Tib,
the great slave-hunter and ivory dealer, who had before acted as Stanley's guard,
with a force of five hundred armed Arabs, when the latter made Ims-~celebrated
march through the land of dwarfs and canmibals, as already described.." 'This
man had, since his last service with Stanley, become the most powerful slaver and
merchant in all Africa. He had traversed a greater portion of. the: interi0fan
a quest for ivory, taking slaves incidentally, and so overawing the natives by
murderous attacks. and acts of rapine that all the chiefs and nearly, allkthe
African kings stood in the greatest dread of him. During the past several
years he had also held the post of governor of the Kasonge district, under
appointment 'by the- Congo: Association.>> AS a. Musselman he assumed
the prerogative of a Sultan, and had a harem with forty datk-eyed houris, which .
be had no disposition to abandon; hence, when engaging with Stanley, he
made it a-condition of his contract that his forty wives should bear him com-
pany on the journey.
Considerable time was. spent. in. Zanzibar procuring supplies and .men, so
that Stanley did not embark for the mouth of the Congo until February 27th.
His company, on leaving Zanzibar, consisted of the. following. persons :~ Dr.
Parke;61 trained Soudanese soldiers, 13 Somalis, 3 interpreters, 620 Zanzibaris,
"go Arabs, and 'Fipo 'Tib and his forty wives. -
. "u Ime trip around: the Cape of, Good. Hope -was a tedious. one, and it was the
* middle of March before the éxpedition reached Banana Point, at the mouth of
tHe Congo where Stanley found seven English and two Belgian officers await-
' ing him.. These, however; had not been idle while awaiting his arrival, for they
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. $8
had spent much of the time getting the steamboats on the Congo ready to
transport the expedition to the first cataracts. Leopold II., as President of the
Congo Association, had put several boats in the river to build "up a trade
with natives of the interior along that great waterway, and these. were all
placed at the disposal of Stanley, and upon which he had relied to make a
quick passage to Stanley Falls.
___ WHY STANLEY CHOSE THE CONGO ROUTE.
There were two decided reasons why Stanley chose the Congo route in
preference to the more frequently travelled highway from Zanzibar: to the.
Central Lake regions. Mwanga, the successor to M'tesa, though a Christian
and Mohammedan by turns, had, during the three short years of his reign,
become so jealous of both the Arabs and Christians that he had fought each,
being moved to hostile acts by the belief that they: had conspired - with 'his
brother, Kalema, to wrest the sceptre of the monarchy from him. He was also
influenced by the Mahdi uprising, which spread terror throughout the country
and gave immense self-assurance, and superstitious egotism-if I may use the
expression-to the native kings. Mwanga, taking up the cry of " Death to the
infidel dogs," carried his hostility to the Christian missionaries, whom he had
"before befriended, so far that he not only ordered them to leave the country,
but even proceeded to more cruel means of ridding himself of their influence,
by ordering their execution, Bishop Hannington being one of his first and:
~eonspictuous victims.
The' true situation of affairs in Uganda, particularly, and which led Stan-
ley to avoid the route, which if taken, would be certain to bring him into conflict
with Mwanga, is graphically described in the following letter from the Rev.
Mr. Mackay, which follows the course of events in the lake region from the
year: preseding the departure of Stanley up the Congo, unt11 the date of the
close of the expedition:
THE WAR IN UGANDA.
*''to +ur Loxpoxr Missionary SOocIETY: | "July 30, 1889;
"C After the overthrow of our mission and the establishment of Moham-
in Buganda (generally written Uganda) last October, we heard little
of: what was taking place there until Easter of this year. On that occasion
we were visited by a few of our former pupils, who had been sent by their
comrades, who had taken refuge in Busagala, to ask our advice in their trou-
bles. 'They wished particularly to know if we would sanction their making
an attack on the Arab usurpers in Buganda, with a view to setting some
other prince on the throne; one on whom they could depend as likely to
grant them liberty of worship. Many were ready to aid even Mwanga, should
he venture to return to their neighborhood, thinking that even his rule would
be preferable to the intolerant and fanatical government of the Mohammedan,
Kalema.
390 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
"Mwanga, who had been for some months the guest of the Romish priests
at Ukumbi, on learning that the Christian exiles were prepared to aid fim,
persuaded Mr. Stokes (formerly a missionary, but now a trader,) to take him
in a boat belonging to the latter, to a polut on the Nyanza, about the mouth
of the Kagera river, where he hoped to be able to join the Christians.
"On hearing of this scheme, we sent to warn Mwanga of the risk he was
about to run, while we sent a inmessage to our friends in - Busagala, advising
them not to join in an enterprise which would have all the appearance of a
KING MWANGA.
religious war, and which might prove disastrous to themselves. We counselled
patience, as we felt sure the Buganda would soon tire of Arab rule, while
Kalema himself would not long submit. to be dictated to by the Arabs. ::Our
advice was to Mwanga, if lie wished io get back his throne, his best policy
would be to come to some agreement with the agents of the Imperial British
East African Association, who wonld probably be ready to aid him...
'* Buganda refugees, however, who were at Bugumbi, together with the
French priests themselves, rejected our countisel of patience and recommended
HEROES OF CTHE DARK CONTINENT. 391
immediate action. Accordingly, Stokes and Mwanga embarked at Ukumbi with
about fifty Buganda, arms and ammunition being supplied partly by Stokes,
and partly by the priests themselves.
"Meantime, our people in Busagala had been drawn into war before the
return of the messengers whom they had dispatched to us. 'These messen-
gers, on their way to this place, had to pass through the country of the
Bazongora, commonly called Baziba, from whom they had received two or three
canoes to enable them to come here. Tidings soon reached Kalema that the
Baziba had sent canoes to this quarter in order (they supposed) to fetch
Mwanga. Accordingly, Kalema lost no time in dispatching an army to punish
the Baziba for their action, which was regarded as rebellion. 'The Christians
ML Ast
N/E:
a
VILLAGE OF BUSAGALA.
got word of Kalema's force being on the way to attack their friends, the
Baiziba, and went at once to the rescue. 'They attacked Kalema's army and
completely routed it, following up their victory far into the interior of Budu.
Some then proposed returning to Busagala, but the majority advised marching
right on -to Kalema's capital. 'The counsel of the latter prevailed, and the
Christians crossed the Katonga, which is the westernmost boundary of Buganda
proper, where they were met by another larger force sent by Kalema, under
the command of his chief minister. A fierce battle ensued, and, although the
Kalema forces were much larger, the Christians were again victorious. Their
leader, named Nyonyintous, and many others were slain. Among the leaders
\\ -
> ~ &
of* l/xz/r wwww
els is k
e F
,,,,,
C_ AX ANS:
A \
,,,,,,,,,
KALEMA BURNS HIS BROTHERS AND SISTERS, AND HIS OWN CHILDREN.
(392)
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 193
of Kalema's army three of the bitterest enemies of Christianity in former days,
were captured and executed, viz.: Chambalango, formerly known as Pokino,
ene of those who decreed Bishop Hannington's execution; Serukoti, murderer
of the Christian Admiral Gabunga, and Masudi, the one-eyed, who, being an
Arab, used to translate to the king all letters from the Consul-General to
the Sultan of Zanzibar, invariably falsifying the interpretation to the prejudice
of the Europeans of the country. f
"Our people, disheartened by the death of their leader and many of their
brethren, returned in a body to Busagala. No sooner had they reached there
than they received intelligence of the arrival of Mwanga and Mr. Stokes at
Dumo, a little to the north of the mouth of the Kagera river. 'This news was
brought them by the messengers whom they had sent here, and who arrived at
Dumo about the same time as Mwanga himself. 'They were sorely puzzled on
perusing the letters which he had sent them, advising them to take no action
in aid of the plot to restore Mwanga. Already they had fought two battles,
and many of their number were slain, while Mwanga himself had now
appeared on the scene in company with an Englishman. 'They responded to
Mwanga's call, and joined his standard near Dumo. Mwanga seems to have
held a sort of court there for nearly a month, many of the heathen nations
joining him, as well as not a few of the islanders from Sesse, who brought
their canoes to his aid. ais
BURNING HIS BROTHERS, SISTERS AND CHILDREN.
"Kalema was so enraged at his minister's defeat that he deposed that func-
tionary from office, and fearing that the Christians would follow up their vic-
tory (doubtful though it was), and succeed in securing the person of one of
the princes, all of whom were prisoners at the capital, he had every one of
them, both princes and princesses, his own brothers and sisters, as well as his
own children, burnt to death in the huts where they were confined. Had he
known of Mwanga's arrival, probably he would not have committed such an
atrocity, but Mwanga had not arrived at Dumo when the dismissed minister
returned Crestfallen to the capital. . ' f
"Soon after, however, Mwanga's approach was reported, and a fresh army
was dispatched by Kalema to meet him. Mwanga had several thousand adher-
ents, mostly armed with spear and shield, as well as about 1,100 guns, while
Kalema's force was vastly superior, not only in numbers, but in guns also,
especially breech-loaders, several Arabs being among the leaders. A battle was
fought, in which Mwanga's troops were defeated, and his chief general,
Mwemba, killed. 'The Arabs set fire to Mwanga's camp; most of the Christians
fled back to Busagala, while Mwanga himself took refuge on Stokes' boat, some
200 of his followers escaping with him in canoes, to one of the Sesse islands.
MWANGA SECURES A NEW FOLLOWING.
"The Basesse people, mostly fishermen, are devotees of the goddess
Mukassa, and had already rebelled against the Mohammedan government of
591 - © ~ ~ HMERORS OP -THE DARK CONTINENT
Kalema. They, therefore, without hesitation, swore allegiance ex masse to
Mwanga, who built a fresh camp on the largest island, and held a council as
to future operations. He had now at his command all the canoes (many hundred)
belonging to Buganda, besides no small following from the mainland.
next proceeded with his fleet along the coast of Buganda, burning
and pillaging ports, rounded the promontory of Ntebe, and, advancing up
Murchison bay, finally encamped on an island named Bulinguye, opposite his
former temporary capital, Munyonyo. Kalema had watched his movements, and
ses
MWANGA'S CAMP ON BULINGUYE ISLAND.
sent a small force under an Arab named Hamis, to prevent Mwanga from landing
on the mainland at Munyonyo. It will perhaps be remembered that it was at
Munyonyo where Mwanga was stationed some three years ago when he ordered a
general massacre of the Christians.
"The island of Bulinguye now became Mwanga's headquarters, and there
he was when we last heard from him, surrounded mostly by his Christian
followers, who are his chief advisers. There he is being gradually joined by
many Buganda, almost all his former chiefs-deposed from officc by Kalema,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 395
having repaired to him with only a few followers each, as they are practically
all poor men now. ~ Among these is Kaluji, whose name has often been men-
tioned as the king's head storekeeper and chief adviser in former years. -:
Kaluji had to flee for his life from Kalema, as he saw no quarters shown to his
former companions in power under the old regime. Even the once all-powerful
minister had not escaped. He was first plundered by the Arabs of- all his
amassed wealth, and subsequently arrested on the charge of intrigue and burnt
alive. A terrible vengeance thus overtook both him and Pokino, who were the
chief advisers of the murder of Bishop Hannington. Both shared the same fate,
DOMESTIC SCENE IN UKUMBI. J
having been burnt alive-only more mercifully than they had slain many
others better than themselves.
ADVICES OF STANLEY'S COMING.
"At Munyonyo skirmishes daily took place between Kalema's people and
Mwanga. Stokes strongly advised a dash upon Kalema's capital, but Mwanga
declined until his following largely increased. Where he is, he is practically
unassailable by Kalema, as he is on an island, and the latter appears not to
fave a single cailoe. - Stokes got tired of inaction and left, arriving at this side
of the lake about a month ago. Before he left Mwanga, he heard of the arrival
in Busoga of a party of white men, probably the vanguard of the Imperial East
Africa Company on their way to felieve Emin Pasha. He wrote a. note to
396 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
them, explaining the position of affairs, Mwanga being eager to have their
assistance. . Now is their opportunity, if they are able to avail themselves of
it. Could they succeed in placing Mwanga in power, they would have him as
their dependent and ally, and thus exercise a most salutary control over his
actions in future, besides overthrowing the present fanatical and intolerant Arab
sway in Buganda. . ;
"More recently, Mwanga's troops landed at Munyonyo, and burnt the old
capital there, as also a large vessel or dhow which Kalema had nearly, com-
"JF. SE .. £, > 's" g
f 22 Kak | mils 5} ad
pape ep -~,
AT Ste: give?
5 T", C2
* y Seq f >
C
Can
tamed
in...d
UGANDA MOHAMMEDANS AT THEIR DEVOTIONS.
pleted. A battle also took place on the mainland to the east of Murchison's
Bay, in which Kalema's forces were defeated, and many of their guns captured.
__" Mwango has now sent to Busagala, inviting all the Christians there to come
to his aid. 'This they will undoubtedly do, but even with their aid, I do not
think it likely that Mwanga will venture to face Kalema's army in open encounter. -
He means, I understand, to retire to Sesse, and there establish himself, mean-
time waiting for reinforcements, and expecting aid from the white men in
Busoga. Stokes means at once to go to his assistance with a cargo of arms
and ammunition. Meanwhile, Mwanga has sent a deputation to ourselves and
S
s
S
\ N
\\ alle <
S
SS
\\
SoN
sof
a
eas
NX
ame:
ep
\\\\
&
a
o
Bons
7 &
sect
Ro anat
uss
‘@\.w,\x.\. \\,;,Nwmmmmmmmwwwwwv
<
#
e
ArT Gr Lar Gran
\
§§\§w
p $
me
ANA
ae
s
7
S
foir nra
N
lwu‘QfNyltA s
S
X
wat N\
\|
Ss
$) €
397)
C4.
AGRICULTURE IN THE MATA NZIGA LAKE
508." ~ - HEROES OF _THE-DARK-GONTINEN'T
to the French priests at Ukumbi, inviting them and us to repair to Sesse in
order to carry on Christian instruction among our respective communities of
converts."
Mr. Mackay, the writer of the above letter, received a communication from
Mwanga, under date of June 25, 1889. Translated it reads as follows:
"I send my compliments to you and to Mr. Gordon. After compliments
I, Mwanga beg of you to help me. Do not remember by-gone matters. We
are now in a miserable plight, but if you, my fathers, are willing to come and
help to restore me to my kingdom, you will be at hberty to do whatever you
like.
"Formerly I did not know God, but now I know the religion of Jesus
Christ. Consider how Kalema has killed all my brothers and sisters; he has
killed my children, too, and now there remain only we two princes [Kalema
and himself]. Mr. Mackay, do help me; I have no strength, but if you are
with me I shall be strong: Sir, do not imagine that if you restore Mwanga
to Buganda, he will become bad-again. If you find me become bad, then you .
may, drive me from the throne; 'but I have given up my former ways, and 'I .
only wish now to follow your advme
'" L-am;, your friend, om gs
as
< In the above letter it is made very clear that had Stanley entered the -
Victoria Lake region he would have had to fight his way if, indeed, he had. .
been able to beat back the natives, which is decidedly improbable; for, in addi- _
tion to a large following of the black king, his troops were armed with guns, ~
and not a few breech-loaders, while the Arabs might have been depended on
to give him great assistance.
REASONS COMMERCIAL AND GEOGRAPHICAL.
A second reason which influenced Stanley in the selection of the Congo
route, is found in the fact that in his expedition up. the Congo, in 1856, hg
had estabhshed many stations that were known to be still flourishing; had
completed treaties with the natives that gave him assurance of their friendship,
and besides being familiar with a large part of the Congo, knew that. for-so
large an expedition as he was conducting, the river afforded him the easiest
means of conveyance, with the many boats at his command.
But besides the two reasons explained, there may have been a third one,
looking towards both a commercial and geographical advantage. Central Africa,
or the lake regions, are represented as being of surprising fertility.' The lakes
themselves are vast inland seas, upon which the largest vessels might be put
in service to carry products that the country yields in prodigal profusion, but
which might be made to produce, under tillage, enough grain and cotton to
supply the world. 'This wondrously favored district cannot be reached by the
Nile because of many impassable cataracts, and the impenetrable " sud," or vege-
tation that collects in the stream. The overland route from Zanzibar is 1000
HEROES OPB THE DARK CONTINENT. 499
miles, through jungles, savannahs, miasmatic regions and many warlike tribes.
On the other hand, the Congo being a large and navigable stream, was believed
to have its source somewhere in the Lake region, while other rivers, affluents
of the Congo, were known to exist, and it was most reasonably supposed that
by following these the central lakes might either be reached directly by boat,
or that only a small intervening strip of land would have to be passed over.
A determination of this question was of the utmost importance, and Stanley
no doubt hoped to solve it.
f f f THE PROCESSION UP THE CONGO.
_The Expedition debarked at Banana Point with the usual delays and vexa-
tions attendant on such an undertaking. Nearly a whole week was spent un-
masa
RECEPTION OF STANLEY BY UGAKNDA CHIEF.
loading stores from the steamer and conveying them to the small boats that
were able to approach within about ome mile of the sea. Besides four small
steamers thus provided by the Congo Association, there was also a steam-launch
betonging to the upper mission stations. Stanley's boat, called the Advance,
was not put in service here, but was placed on board one of the steamers, for con-
veyance to the upper waters, above the cataracts, where the other vessels could
not be taken, except by a tedious portage, nor were they built to withstand
such rough usage.
400 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
Several of the officers had, before Stanley's arrival, busied themselves with
preparations to receive the expedition, and besides bringing down small boats
and lighters on which to unload the steamer's cargo of donkeys, provisions,
ammunition, etc., had fixed up, in the most comfortable and inviting manner,
headquarters at Boma, a considerable village on the Congo, some fifty miles
from the coast.. To
‘ this place Stanley
directly repaired in
advance of the main
party, after the em-
barkation was com-
pleted, anxious to ob-
serve ~what changes
had occurred in and
about the place since
his last visit to the
village in the inter-
est... of ~. the -.Congo
Free-State Associa-
§ tion. Under the in
fluence of - mission-
aries he. found that
the town had grown
considerably in size
and that the natives
had become so fir
Christianized . that
the place supported
{wo _ fRouris hing
churches, or rather
one Catholic Church
§ and one Mosque.
'Lo his very 'great
£6, outskirts of the town
grad
Bus < anat. cpu". a '~-'.V,-;_r,__/,_;é/f“‘r=1 he saw unmistakable
DISPOSITION OF THE DEAD BY BOMA VILLAGERS. f signs of a contin‘u-
ance of native superstitions connected with the burial of their dead: in frail
scaffolds on which rudely coffined bodies were exposed and the ghastly skeletons
of sacrificed slaves underneath.
S’tanley remained at Boma several days before he completed his prepara
tions for moving the expedition upon its prime purpose.
HEROES THE DARK CONTINENT. |- 401
When at last the expedition started up the Congo it presented the pleasing
appearance of a flotilla procession bound upon some wondrous enterprise, 'as it
certainly. was. Stanley led, in what he euphoniously called his flag-vessel, but
which was in facta rather sorry looking craft to take so honorable a position.
Tipo Tib and his forty-two wives occupied the passenger space of the next boat,
while Stanley's lieutenant, the Zanzibaris. soldiers, and the commissary stores,
luggage, mules and -aimmunition, made 'up the loads of the others. The sound
of escaping steam, ringing, of- bells and blowing of whistles, had already
become familiar to the natives of the-river© shores, but so many boats in pro-
cession, the flying of so- many flags, and the strange cargo that was being con-
veyed, lent remarkable to the: river that: flowed out of a mysterious
SP4
** £2 mg
"& \\
Sx) p XC
as a
~ As»
~ — e
\
hai . t am
i « ONE OF TIPO'S HOURIS.
country, through unexplored lands, bathing the most savage of people, giving
drink to the most powerful and ferocious of animals, as it went gurgling over
rapids, dashing down cataracts, and singing its way to the high rolling sea.
Tipo Tib had contracted to furnish a force of 700 Somalis Arabs and Zanzi-
baris soldiers to give safe conduct to the expedition from Stanley Falls to
Wadelei. 'This contract he was able: to fulfil by taking men from the ivory
stations he had established on the upper Congo, and between the Aruwimi river
and the lakes. In this region he had built up an enormous trade, and he is
reputed to have had on hand a stock of ivory valued at $500,000, at the time of
Stanley's last journey. His engagement to conduct the expedition, at an expense
of $25,000, was therefore a very profitable one, because he was on the point of
visiting that region to look after his private interests at the time when
Stanley entered into a contract with him.
26
402 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
The members of Tipo 'Tib's household, or, in other words, his wives, it must
be admitted, were the most interesting attaches of the expedition. Some of them,
it must be confessed, were a little blase, as the French say, or, to speak more
courteously, they were past that age when plumpness of form and freshness of
features are most commonly found. But the majority were lithesome, fair,
vigorous and (is it to their discredit?) not above making favorable responses to
the overtures of the natural male flirts that belonged to the expedition. Tipo,
so far from being a bearded pard or Blue Beard, seemed to extract pleasure
from the satisfaction which the officers exhibited in the innocent amours of his
wives. Having indeed a good thing, he was unselfish enough to share it with
his companions. Some of these houris were dressed most becomingly in Arabic
costume, while others exercised a freedom only compatible with an oppressively
hot climate, and herein possibly lay much of their charms. Anyhow, those
having the least dress certainly attracted the most admiration. But the reader
must not overlook the fact that in nearly all hot countries, and in Africa espe-
cially, the most flagrant exposure of person is not regarded as being the-least
indecent. Custom governs, and in Africa, along the equatorial line, much body
decoration is employed, but practically no covering. 'The Georgia Colonel who,
it is related, appeared on dress parade in a cocked hat, paper collar and. big
spurs-with nothing between the collar and the spurs-would cut a fashionable
rather than a ridiculous figure among the African tribes.
NZ, . * ‘@ \
”fl/”l" \ <6)» | W
S C ®§\\ te - "
\ Z U . ore sos
Sid ge =S
Suw #
a Y # 7 m
f S
ppc __ “QM Z s
yo \I cs y Z
ITI Tig Fe
* ( § # Z ID
\ P " A
c- "w
CHAPTER XIX,
'THE VOYAGE UP THE CONGO.
«OBL Y breasting the swelling waters of the eccentric Congo, the
- steamers pushed their way, halting every little while to take on
fresh supplies of fuel. It is a fact that the cutting of wood proved
to be the most tedious and laborious duty connected with the expe-
dition. 'The boats consumed amazing quantities of fuel to keep up
steam, because the wood that was procurable along the river was of a light,
cotton-wood species, that burned rapidly without giving much heat. 'The wood
bunkers, too, were small, so that every few hours a landing had to be made
and the porters sent out to gather a fresh supply. It was not at every place,
either, that wood of any kind was procurable, there being frequent bare stretches
of either sand or small willows. 'The heaviest timber was, of course, sought
for, and this could only be obtained in many instances a mile from the shore.
Much time was also required to fell and split up the large trees into lengths
of "two' feet, this being all that the furnaces would take. The porters were
therefore worked so hard that it is not surprising they were, in two or three
instances, in a rebellious mood, and came near mutiny. f
Many stations were passed, at which stops were invariably made to enable
Stanley to confer with the resident missionaries or government agents. On the
Lower Congo these places were generally uninteresting, because, besides being
inactive, the natives had lost their curiosity by frequent contact with Europeans. -
The line of steamers, while they had not paid expenses, had served the .
beneficent purpose of bringing the natives to an appreciation of civilization, and
in inciting them to an industry which gives promise of large profits hereafter.
Besides this, these boats afforded means of rapid and easy communication be-
tween the stations, that resulted in a complete destruction of the slave trade
which, before the establishment of these stations, flourished with all its attend-
ant horrors, under the sanction of the Portuguese government.
THE STATION OF LUKUNGA. ,
Mr. Stanley was more interested in the stations, many of which he had
himself established in 1884, because of the benefits they had brought to the
natives, and he therefore tarried a short while at each to give some kind word
of promise or encouragement to those in charge." _ But it was not. until: the
expedition reached Lukunga, above the last cataracts, and after the steamers
had been abandoned for a march along the shore, that real interest was
awakened. It was here that contact with the ruder, uncivilized, barbaric
natives was entered upon, and thenceforth surprise upon surprise awaited the
members who were travelling in mid-Africa for the first time.
Lukunga is nearly five hundred miles from the Congo's mouth, but less
f (403)
404 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
than three hundred from the coast. It is a station founded by Stanley in the
interest of the Congo Association, and is presided over by Mr. and Mrs. Ingham,
who have charge of the mission. It is admirably located, and presents a charm-
ing aspect from the river. 'The station was created at a cost of barely $5006:
yet so admirable has been its management that it is a much more interesting,
inviting and prosperous place than Manyanga, only a few miles further north,
which had cost the Association $50,000.
SUPERSTITIONS OF THE NATIVES.
Though the natives at Lukunga and the region thereabout are under sub-
ordination and influence of the missionaries, they have lost very little, if any,
emacs
m";
WUD
,
l
a
mat"
M4— :’ &
o T L # A % dae:
al # /§~6e4 Ca # a
Bat Ba
a -A " "A/a Afif/LJ y, “fix/w ml. at cas s 24
LUKUNGA STATION.
of their old superstitions, by which they still continue to be largely controlled.
Mr. Herbert Ward, an attaché of the expedition, and who also spent a con-
siderable time at this station, has communicated, by private letter, many facts
respecting the natives of this region, from which I quote the following:
8 " *~ The most interesting item is, I think, an ordeal which took place!
the other day close by in this valley. It was a 'N Ganga N'Kissi,' or medicine:
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 405
man's palaver. I learn from Mr. Harvey, of the Livingstone Inland Mission,
that the general belief in the Congo is that nearly all sickness and death is the
result of witchcraft. 'The consequence is that, when anyone is dangerously ill,
the question arises, 'Who has bewitched him? 'The guilty person is supposed
to be secretly devouring the spirit of the unhappy sufferer. Should he die, a
' n AManga, or medicine man, is usually, sent for to determine who it is that 1s
possessed of 'N'Doki' (the devil), or is guilty of the witchcraft. The 'N'Ganga'
is invariably a crafty individual of another tribe or from a distant village. He
brings with him an elaborate apparatus, consisting of leopard's teeth and claws,
snakes and other skins, a fetish idol, perhaps a rattle, and above all a plentiful
supply of powdered chalk. On special occasions he also adds a huge mask made
of the inner layers of bark and painted in the most grotesquely horrid. manner,
with decorations of cowtails, which latter article seems indispensable. to all
African priests. Sometimes, especially when displaying his art before an audience
where white persons are spectators, he charges furiously up and down -as if
battling with, and fleeing and chasing imaginary spirits, until his breath is quite
spent. More frequently, however, the ' N'Ganga' seats himself on rising ground
and there displays his paraphernalia, which he cleverly manipulates. . He endea-
vors to make his audience believe that each article about him flies to his hand
at the mere wish, and it is not surprising, therefore, to learn that he is a fair
conjuror, in which sleight-of hand is well practised. Even the mat upon which
he sits seems now and then to be alive. He turns and looks at it occasionally
When its manifestations seem to him as it were excessive.» _ His well-feigned
astonishment is not lost upon the throng. 'The mat, they plainly see, is beyond
his control, as is everything else, his inspiration being from a superior and
unseen power.. Every now and then he pauses in his mummeries and listens
with his head bent to the earth, and then he will bound up again from his
listening attitude and intently examine the various persons near him, and turn
away from them with equal suddenness, practically clutching at the air as if
trying to lay hold upon some unseen being.> He shrieks and wails like one
possessed. Usually, before declaring the name of the guilty or suspected person,
the payment for his services (previously agreed upon) has to be made, and in
these transactions he shows that his connection with the unseen world has not
lessened his interest in the possession of the wealth that belongs to the material
world of his existence. He is not easily imposed upon, either, as regards the
quantity or quality of the cloth offered to him as his remuneration. The guilty
one being named, the poor wretch has to undergo the ordeal of poison. - He-
must drink a certain amount of n'kasa, prepared from a poisonous bark by the
'N'Ganga.' Should the potion act as an emetic, the accused is pronounced
innocent; otherwise, Satan's presence in the man is proved, the victim himself
being as well assured of the fact as his accusers. His body begins to swell from
the effects of the poison, and he is either buried alive (though in frequent cases
his throat is cut before burial) or is drowned."
(90Pp)
THE N'GANGA LOCATING THE DEVI
L.
107
, and longed
sul f a
eas
ale\.\\,\ s *
(
i
&
father, Rowland Ward, a
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
HOW WARD MET STANLEY.
Herbert Ward, above quoted, had been with Stanley on his first march across
the continent, and was left in charge of several stations on the Congo as the
U
Rs
«head
O0
fa)
C
8
[a»
" in|
3 . 9.
J * "4
> Z
rd
o 4
hh
_.. >
tus
2A 3 |
Mog:
A g
ye
< 2
€ D
122 . s par
I> +4
"a" {
"'" o,
"Y. 9
A g
a §
H g
-Z
me
o :9
ouch
.mh
3 2
f ZH.»
V
< P
of 6
U
g .8
C 8
T3 to
iy ip
> 0
om.m
tt
mm
SS
35.
WV
Js - Li
THE ASSYRIAN AND HIS TWO WIVES.
for a vacation that would enable him to visit his
naturalist, formerly of London
, but now settled on a fruit farm in California.
He had obtained a leave of absence for six months, and had commenced his
homeward journey, but had proceeded only a short way down the Congo when
408 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
he met Stanley, with whom it was his wildest ambition to make a trip into the
lake regions. It is no surprise, therefore, that he should immediately turn his
steps, his determination and change of plans being described in the following
letter: '
"Enmim PaAsHA RELIEFR EXPEDITION,
"MarTapE STATION, April 3d, 1887.
" You will be astonished to hear that my plans are changed. Instead of
returning to you,; I. am turning tound. the other, way and - goiiig. with
[ Stanley and the
Emin Pasha
Expedition.
"I was -on
my way down
country to em-
bark -for
England and
thence to Amer-
icd...cAboftt
two days from
here L-fiet:two
armed. Assyri-
ans. -~ Immedi-
ately - behind
t he m,: :samd
mounted 'on a
fine mule whose
new-plated trap-
pings glistened
in the sun, was
Stanley _- him-
self. - Behind
him - came _. a
Soudan e xe
giant, about 6
feet 6 > inches
high, bearing a
large American
flag. I saluted
the Congo king.
He smiled; and,
indicating the bare ground, said; ' Take a seat.! He dismounted, and, handing
me a cigar, we squatted ' and conversed for half an hour. He accepted me
as a volunteer (I had previously, as you know, written to him), and it was at
an- mode gph dr C elms 0 luge
» Mre" ze &
e **4, § uw 1s aim oat a Ltt gars r 3
i aat os ai x sh. % pte: r ss ~ s C
sy J * hp/w’»_ nes Erased din *. " as & r* T" att" Ite Ill}, ///IIA ....... ' \-\-\...'J<“~“.\ *M [fa
as* ea Ad a* =o.
"eu, l P x ayat.
p -puall ors i i angin anc
TIPO 'TIB'S FEMALE CONTINGENT AT CAMP DUTIES.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 409
once arranged that I should proceed down to this place and see to the transport
of some of his remaining loads. I have done so, and now leave here to over-
take him in four days.
"Of the eight whites he has with him, two have contributed to the expense
of the expedition for the privilege of accompanying him through the heart of
Africa, and the others are English officers on full army pay as volunteers.
"I never in my life was so struck with any sight as with Stanley's caravan
on the march. Egyptians, Soudanese, Somalis, Zanzibaris, and others, nine
hundred strong. It took me two hours to pass them, and then I met the second
in command, Major Barttelot, a young fellow, burnt very. dark, with a masher
collar fixed on a flannel shirt, top boots, etc. He was carrying a large bucket
that some fellow had abandoned. 'I say, are you Ward ?' he shouted. "I am
Ward," I answered, 'and now belong to your expedition.. 'I am very glad to
hear it,' he replied; ' Stanley has spoken of you, and so you are coming along;
that's right; very good business!' He seemed to be full of tremendous, spirits ;
looked very fit; and I admired him immensely.
"'Tippo Tib, the notorious slave trader of Stanley Falls, has come round
from Zanzibar with Stanley, and, in his silken robes, jewelled turban, and kriss,
looks a very ideal Oriental potentate. It is thought 'good business," as Maj.
Barttelot would say, getting him for an ally. He had forty-two of his wives
along with him. Some of them are handsome women. One little stout lady,
decked out in magnificent costume, appeared to be rather free in her behaviour,
I thought; she winked at me decidedly, and did not resent a gentle stroke
under the chin. I gave her a little present, and we parted on good terms."
CHAPTER XX.
THF . TRIP TO BOLORBGO.
®
4 [OURNEYING through a wild country may be pleasant
under certain. circumstances. . It is. not therefore to be
supposed that Stanley's expedition won its way through
Africa by constant fighting, or by cleaving a passage
through dense forests, over mountains, around cataracts,
in continual peril and harassments. Enough of these he
certainly had to encounter, but the march was relieved by
many comforts which the abundant supplies he carried
with him enabled him to secure. Besides, there were not
entlrely wanting the conveniences that settlement and 01v111zat1on provide. 'The
journey up the Congo to Nyangwe took about sixty days. All along the river
great changes have occurred since Stanley's memorable trip down that stream
twelve years ago. In many places the natives have disappeared from the banks,
and large Arab and Zanzibarian settlements have taken their place, for Tlpo
Tib has some rivals, though at present they live in peace with each other.
At: frequent places along the banks extensive fields of rice are found, and -all
round Nyangwe and Kasonge the country is covered with such fields, and with
plantations of all kinds. Nyangwe is no longer the important place it was in
the days of Livingstone, or at the time of Stanley's first visit. Three days'
distance from it is Kasonge, Tipo Tib's headquarters, a large town, with broad
streets and many fine houses." Here also are other great Arab traders, and
Arab and Zanzibar immigration is going on at an increasing rate.
On arriving at Stanley Pool, where Stanley stopped for two days, a steam
launch, named HZexzy ARe:rd, belonging to the American Baptist Missionary
Union, was tendered to the explorer to transport a portion of his men, mer
chandise and ammunition from that point to the intended camp on the. Aru-
wimi. Mr. Stanley was glad to avail himself of this kindly offer, as the boats
at his command had such small capacity that the transportation to Stanley
Pool had been attended with considerable discomfort for lack of space. 'The
Re:rd was therefore at once put into commission, and towed a steam lighter
besides the steel whaleboat. The lighter, which had previously been a paddle
steamer of the Etat du Congo, was formerly the quarters of Tipo Tib, Imis
officers and harem. 'The dark-eyed houris enjoyed their trip immensely. It
was, of course, a perfect novelty to them. 'They frolicked and danced and sang
the Whole of the day, while at night the sound of their rippling laughter could
be heard for a long distance.
(410)
HEROES OF -THE DARK - CON TINENT A 4 II
Upon leaving Kinchassa, the village at Stanley Pool, the expedition em-
barked in three steamers, Ze Stem/ey, the large stern-wheel river steamer of the
Etat du Congo, towing the F¥/orida, the sections of which had just been put
together. The F/oride is the steamer of the Sanford exploring expedition,
which came into existence in 1880, and which has just recently been converted
into "The Belgian Commercial Society of the Upper Congo." The
and her consort had on board four English officers and about 300. men;, ifn
addition to a cargo of ammunition, merchandise, and several donkeys on deck.
The other steamer was the Peace, kindly and promptly placed at Mr. Stanley's
disposal by the Rev. Holman Bentley, of the English Baptist Missionary
Society. A young missionary named Whitley was in charge of the vessel, and
NATIVE OF KASONGE WEAVING.
Mr. Stanley himself and Mr. Herbert Ward (to whom he had given the com-
mand of his No. 1 company of Zanzibaris), Mr. Stanley's valet " William," and
an English engineer, made up the rest of the travellers.
SCENERY AND GRANDEUR OF THE CONGO.
It does appear exceedingly strange, in the light of Stanley's discoveries,
that so mighty a stream as the Congo, and particularly since, as the river
Zaire, it has been known for more than two centuries, that so few efforts were
made before the time of Livingstone to explore its length. It is found to -be
ther great artery, the very aorta, of the arterial system of Africa, flowing
from the heart of the continent and affording a commercial waterway back
again to the central districts, whose fertility is positively amazing. Mr.
Werner and other recent travellers speak in terma-of enthusiasm of the scenery
of the Congo, and compare it, indeed, with other famous waterways, to the
disadvantage of the most magnificent rivers. Stanley himself led the way in
3 res- ------ s
$- 32. f sm ans, B
#
S= b
I\ s
% \\\
matiostn.
~
~
~
N
*
+- ~
by
~
\%
o $s
/ if/l’flfu ) aj ‘j'lwl‘f‘i/i//’///”/’/’// p 2 _‘
I sett: ,'/,////,l,"”/ 1 4.3
1 \v"////‘//:V/ 1/‘//’!,‘{/:1'
Rill I 1{f ' --*
ia C
/ s
{x
<3 ..::
ess i
or e
N
Pas \
mre]
muich 4
$3 fig =-- vey eog
87
all
§
MN
/
int Cz
a Y~
“n...“
Gy A
”31" Fifi
___. s- hus (\_\\
mmfifiiTmmf
SEL n
SJB
Y
"IIPO TBS HAREM EN VOYAGE."
/('(//({l,/W&(k E
atty
"w 1
V/ k:, I
a
\ //
BA-YANZIL MUSICIANS.
414 f HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
these glowing descriptions. 'Talking of comparisons, which naturally occur to
the reader, Stanley exclaims, " Why, the Rhine, even including its most pictur-
esque parts, is only a microscopic miniature of the Lower Congo; but we must
have the Rhine steamer, and its wine and food and accommodations, to be able
to 'see 'It properly. 'The Mississippi? The Congo is one and a half times
larger, and from eight to ten times broader. You may take your choice of
nearly a dozen channels, and you will see more beautiful vegetation on the
Congo than on the American river." Besides, there are its crocodiles, its hip-
popotami, its elephants-'" standing sentry-like in the twilight "-its buffaloes,
red and white, its parrots, its flocks of ibis, and a thousand other things that
are novel and picturesque. "And as for towns," says the great explorer, "I
hope the all-gracious Providence will bless our labor, and they will come by-
and-by ; meantime, there is room enough to stow half Europe comfortably on
its spacious borders." 'The Nile, the Danube, the Volga, the Amazon, Stanley
knows them all; and the Congo is still his king of rivers.
To the natural scenery and imposing size of this great river are added
many other attractions, not the least of which are the numerous villages of the
several tribes along its shores. f : f |
Just above Stanley Pool, and opposite the Ba-teke territory, is the land of
the Ba-yanzi tribe, who occupy the south side. Here will be found the first
fixed settlement of the tribes to be encountered on a journey up the Congo.,
Their village is very picturesque as seen from the water-" a broad lane leading.
-up to a grove of oil-palms and bananas, with compact and tidy-looking houses
interspersed among them; but the favorable impression is rather spoilt on
landing by the horrible black fetid mud strewn with decaying offal that one
has to cross." 'The people are a finer-looking race than any Stanley had seen.
on the Congo.. Some of the men are " perfect Greek statues as regards their
splendid development and pose of their figures." 'The Ba-yanzi have certain
cruel customs, but are in many respects much superior to some other natives
'of the great river. 'They make excellent pottery, knives, hatchets, articles of
furniture and other things, which they sell to the Ba-teke and the Wa-buma..
They are fond of music, and have a native instrument of the dulcimer class,
upon which they produce not unpleasant harmonies. 'T hey are clever fisher-
men, and cultivate fruit and vegetables, tobacco, manioc and other products. in.:
which they do a fair trade. According to ethnologists, they are not of the
negro race, but belong to the " Bantu" family, which includes the people
around Lake Tanganyika and Lake Nyassa, in Eastern Africa, and on' the
Zambesi. > :
They are remarkable for their great development of hair, which they treat
very decoratively, sometimes fantastically dressing it up from the crown, and
again twisting it so tightly as to be almost inflexible and horn-like in appear-
ance. A similar fashion also obtains at Bolobo, which, however, is quite natural,
since this station is on the north line of the Ba-yanzi country.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 415
ADVENTUROUS INCIDENTS OF THE VOYAGE.
The trip up the Congo was enlivened by many interesting and a few
thrilling incidents. 'The boats travelled continuously during the daytime,
except when having to stop to wood-up; but at night they lay by, not having
comfortable sleeping accommodations for so large a passenger list.. Camps were
therefore made in which the porters and soldiers slept, while the officers and
Tipo Tib's wives found quarters on the boats. If the days were happily spent,
with music floating over the waters from instruments tuned by deft houris'
hands, the evenings were yet more delightfully romantic.. Woman's influence,
as well as her presence, is always conducive to happiness, and on this journey
through a savage land even the half-civilized wives of the barbarous slave
raider contributed very largely to the happy content of the motley mixture of
those who composed the expedition. Music exercised a charm particularly
potent on the's s R =<
banks of the Con- =-
go, and at night, S
with bonfires leap- = saa
ing.. sky ward.
throwing dancing
shadows, and
guitars, - zithers,
mandolins and
violins - discours- |
ing a music. that | ~ pail p ease
harmonized sof Yale Sei ia,.
weirdly with Arab & doy.
gongs and the ~~ al onn !, ‘
wild woods, made
a minstrelsy that
woke each - heart
to the measures : _
of poesy and the sweet spirit of rhapsodizing romance. And by the light of
these fires that gave rapport to all the company, stories were told, the laugh
went round, and graceful figures, male and female, flitted with trained feet
in many a curious dance, but no more curious than the appearance of the dancers.
TIPO TIB'S NARROW ESCAPE FROM A CROCODILE.
The journey, however, was not an undisturbed excursion, for occasionally
incidents occurred which gave excitement to the usually pleasurable scenes
Along the banks were seen the rusty, grime-covered bodies of huge crocodiles,
watching with omnivorous appetites for prey, while in the reeds, and often
rising from the river beds, were monster hippopotami, blowing in their play
or grunting with anger over their disturbance. 'These furnished sport for the
hunters and lent a grateful divertisement to the party. But when the expedi-
::$?§- * rig:. -=
AN EXCESS OF SPORT.
(914)
NPO TIB'S ADVENTURE WITH A CROCODILE,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. ar7
- tion had reached the vicinity of the Aruwimi river, an adventure was met with
which came near ending the cruel career of the savage Tipo Tib. While the
boats were put in to shore to replenish their store of fuel, the great Arab chief
went out on the bank for a recreative walk, and seeing some very beautiful
wild. honeysuckles dependlng from the vine that had climbed a large tree
standing. near the water's edge, attempted to gather the flowers of delicious
fragrance. He had scarcely approached the base of the tree, however, when he
was struck a violent blow which knocked him several feet distant and fairly
into the river, but falling against a prostrate tree which extended into the
stream, he was thus prevented from being thrown into deep water. 'The blow,
too, chanced to 'be only half-delivered by reason of the dense brush, so that
Tipo Tib was hardly stunned, and he was able to immediately comprehend his
dreadful adversary. In another moment he saw a huge crocodile advancing
upon him with wide-open jaws, and but for his good fortune in having
a gun with him to make his defence,; he must inevitably have fallen a
. victim.to the monster. ~ Tipo thetfefore aimed his musket: quickly and sent a
ball into the eye. of the reptile, but did not succeed even with such a capital
shot in dispatching it; but he followed the shot with a thrust of his rifle into
the mouth of the crocodfle which made the reptile retreat to securer quarters
in the water.. But though the Arab won the battle, he was immediately after
the fight so prostrated with fear that his wives had to fan and coddle him for
two hours, and give him the restorative of admiration for his valor.
‘ BOLOBO STATION.
-One of the pr1nc1pa1 stations on the Lower Congo established by Stanley
on his first expedition, and where he made his first camp on his last, is Bo-
lobo, which is mentioned several times in the narrative of the relief expedi-
tion, because it was made a base of supplies. 'The Bolobo country commences
at the picturesque village of Itimba, which is admirably situated on a small
but very thickly-wooded hill. ." 'Then, as you sail up the- river," says Mr..
Stanley, -"*village: after village appears in 'a nearly continuous line for. about an
hour, when the station (Bolobo) comes into view on the open higher ground
behind a narrow belt of tall timber lining the riverside. Imagine a strip 'of
the left "bank of the -friver, about twelve miles long, a thin line of. large umbra-
geous trees close to the water's edge, and a. gently sloping background of
cleared country rising to about thirty feet above the tallest trees. Just
above the centre.of this strip, on the open ground is the station of Bolobo,
con51st1ng of a long mat-walled shed, a mud-and-water kitchen, a mud-walled
magazine with grass roofs, and about seventy huts arranged in a square, on
the outside of the inner group of buildings. Above and below it, close to the
water side, amid banana and palm groves, are sheltered about fifteen villages.
Seven of these-Itimba, Mimgolo, Biangulu, Ururu, Mongo, Mangu, Yambula
and Lingenji-are below the station. Eight are above among which is Mbanga
and a few villages of the Banunu tribe. 'These form What is called Bolobo.
27
Me
SS
g
f "I<
a)
ya
S
A
Ce
fas
K
sere
\
S
P
<'\‘ _‘
#B
< b
4
7
\ ~:\\\\\\\\\\\ I ‘\
b sgh.
elt
ye
=-
f
j
((
.
-
C
_
(/
\I\
(
[
n
L
C
+
»
t .Z
)e C I o
if 4L f
tiff“ “f! “U y a
ve 7
eX },
wath is th “huh/v
<
§
h,“
.Vl Sy a
|V"l";? »
y 2% Bas p‘
w1i$‘bnv" A
'r\_f(\Q4 é
U
Kere
(§ Nes
#G rap
&
Z
\
# a—zr; 1,9,me
7
Ch
1 {Mm
o Serer
Pe Ee -_
gress
§§t\‘\- s >
""" R t hry
1. Bolobo, on the Congo River. 3
#. Looking up the Congo from the honse of Shick Mahomed-bin-Seld, at Stanley
8. 3. View from below Stanley Falls.
a 6. Huts at Ym'nbinn.
8. Native Woman of Aruwim{ Falls.
alls.
4. The Babulu-Wasongolo Tribe (Three Types).
8. Village in Mahomed bin-Seid's District.
T. Our House at Stanley Falls,
9, A and B. Palm-oil Pots, Yambina. a
C. Pot containing Cam-wood and Olives, Articles
wimi Native's Toilet ; carried over the
Bark-box used for preserving Manioc Flour,
'l0. Stanley Falls. I
ative of the Aruwim{ Country.
in rows : Five hours' march
3. Itimba.
14, Houses of Tippoo Tib, Stanley Falls
SKETCHES IN AND ABOUT BOLOBO, AND STANLEY FALLS.
A PAT
f/177/ %/,1/; A
f M/ tor?
an da
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT, Jip
, THE BA-TEKE MUSICIANS.
Above Matade station, where the second camp was made, and just beyond
the influence of the missionaries, lives a small tribe called the Ba-teke, a quiet,
inoffensive people who are chiefly distinguished as what may be called natural
musicians. Stanley halted among them for two days, and gives an interest-
ing report of their proficiency on native instruments. . He says: " They dis-
~ course melody from a form of marimba, an instrument of wide-spread range,
which in principle is so many slips or keys of metal arranged along a sound-
ing board. These instruments are about eight inches long, and three to four
broad. They are provided each with metal bars tempered by fire and hammered
into a highly metallic elasticity, and when pressed down sharply with the
finger spring back and give a clear, distinct note. 'They are also tuned in
certain keys, each instrument differing in scale so as to play in harmony with
each other. When twanged by practised hands they yield delightfully sweet
sounds, comparable to the dulcimer, mandolin or zither, and when played well
by a pretty African girl the critical ear might fancy himself under the bower
of an accomplished Madrid Senorita." |
Among these same people, and in fact among all the tribes within one
hundred miles of Lukunga, there is a superstitious dread of the owl, which by
them is regarded not only as a bird of fll-omen but also the bearer 'of an evil
spirit sometimes sent by an ill-disposed person to plague an enemy. Speaking
of this superstition Stanley relates a very strange incident which seems to have
come under his own observation. He says:
THE BIRD OF ILL-OMEN.
"One day the King of Kanganpaka visited the Livingstone Inland Mission,
his face the very picture of misery and despair. 'What has happened ?' he
was asked, to which question, after a studied silence, he replied in a whisper,
that the people of a neighboring town had, during the night, sent a bad bird,
n'kiss1, or spirit in the shape of an owl, which had bewitched his plantain
trees and blighted them. Upon examining the trees they were indeed found
to be blighted and looked as if they had been struck by lightning, every one
being blackened and apparently dead. But as this had occurred in the long
dry season, when lightning is almost unknown, the mischief had evidently
been done by some chemical agency, probably only known to the N'Ganga, or
medicine man. 'The old king begged for some mund:lz:, or white-man medicine,
to counteract the effects of the wicked spirit. 'To satisfy his craving for the
moment, the missionary of the station gave the king some insect powder and
sent him away. Strange to relate, the old king in the fullest faith of the
magic powder, sprinkled it upon the blasted trees, whereupon in a little while
new plantains shot out from the seared trunks and flourished finely."
CEREMONIES OF THE NKIMBA TRIBE.
Beyond the Ba-teke are found the N'Kimba tribe, occupying a district some
fifty miles in length along the Congo. They are a naked, shiftless people, and
420 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
practise some singular customs which, though curious in origin, are identical
with some practised by ancient people in civilized sections of the world.
Writing of these ceremonies, Mr. Ward says they are associated with a certain
bacchanalian worship, during which the youthful initiates undergo the rite of
circumcision, which is quite common among many African tribes. Again he
likens the ceremonies to a kind of Free Masonry, which he thus describes:
"*All the lads of a town, or group of towns, from 'ten to twelve years:of
age, go through an educational course lasting from six months to two years.
During this time they are not allowed to wash themselves. They disfigure
Je ; a?”
é 7 7 Hog she /
f 1' 7! 7," U
///" 17.
,,,,,
”A
ne rit eron er nee
Tear Tier.. one tane
MAN AND WOMEN OF THE N'KIMBA TRIBE.
their bodies with chalk, and wear a hideous dress of grass. The women and
children of the towns are in continual fear of the N'Kimba, who are allowed
to parade through the villages at any time of the day or night. Any article of
food or clothing required by them can be appropriated without question, if only
the things belong to a 'mungwala' or uninitiated person. At the induction
ceremony the candidate is required to drink a certain potion, which renders
him insensible. He is then declared to be dead, and is carried into the bush,
where the operation of circumcision is presumably performed. After a while he
is restored, and by the simple towns-people he is believed to have been raised
HERORKS OFP THE DARK CONTINENT 421
from the dead. He then receives a new name, and he professes not to be able
to remember his former tribe or even his parents.
N'Kimbsa declare the rainbow is their father. They also adopt a
new language, which is of a mysterious nature, and though taught to the males,
it is never disclosed to females. It is possible that it is some old or archaic
form of the Bantu language, conserved for religious purposes-like the Sanscrit,
the old Sclav, and the Latin; or it may be nothing more than an arbitrary
transmogrification of words such as are found in the Mpongwe, or in such
artificial dialects as the Ki-Nyume of Zanzibar.
N'Kimba before initiation is called mungwala, and afterwards tungwa."
: __ A GRAND CALVACADE. ;
5 After reaching Kasonga the boats were abandoned and the march overland
for afiother considerable distance began. Between several of the cataracts a
steam launch service is maintained, but occasionally there are stretches of many
miles where rapids and cataracts are so frequent that no boats of any kind can
pass them. Around these therefore Stanley had to make the passage by land,
which he was well provided to do. Describing the caravan as it left the great
Arab station of Kasonga, Ward says: " First of all proceeded four Somalis
carrying their kit; then came Stanley, mounted on a fine mule; behind him was -
a great, tall Soudanese soldier, carrying James Gordon Bennett's yacht flag,
(American, with round yellow circle and anchor), then followed seven hundred
men, presenting the most imposing sight that I ever saw. All the men were
fresh and were dressed in their characteristic costumes: Zanzibaris, in their
white Arab shirts reaching to the knee, with just a little of their gaudy colored
loin cloth visible below it, boxes on their heads, water bottles slung over their
shoulders, their guns at their backs; Soudanese soldiers in their dark blue
great coats and hoods, their bayonets, cartridge belts, guns and kit; Somalis
with their fancy waistcoats and variegated loin cloths; sections of the whale
boat carried each by four men; donkeys with pack saddles and loads; large. _
horned goats with similar saddles and loads, and hoes, shovels, and axes; the
caravan stretched away for three miles, a fine subject for a painter; a most
unusual and strange sight along the Congo."
: STANLEY FALLS. .
The expedition continued on without mishap until in due time Stanley
Falls was reached, the last station on the Upper Cougo. The fiver scenery
"about Stanley Falls is very similar to that in the vicinity of Bolobo, but the
Falls themselves are very interesting, not on account of any surprising descent,
for it is not really great, but because they so nearly bridge the river as to divide
two main channels. The stakes and nets, as seen in the illustration on
p. 418, just below the Falls, serve to mark the various cataracts, and also the favorite
occupation of the Wenya people, especially the women, who are devoted fishers.
At this place Tipo Tib has one of his principal headquarters, and froni here 'he
conducts his most profitable raids upon the neighboring people from whom he
.....
l $5, ,::Z:/ g My ‘ #'s soak
laa \ j 7.) - a
4 § gfidflzé ..-_:: 3:1:1;'::‘2';1:2—-';:'-'-;::—_: o
_ mt */»
ie
53535 f
f at} Tp~ o /
\& § ngl/ A( Peles
>>> «Mestre
\\\\\\\\"'“l “fl: .’T/‘(/Z%;:ll ‘_ /
\=— U
m y
\ < NI (l',/’1"$/ “y
Ze h her l/ Mk" ) } 7
_ a. 2 # \p
a" A wi e mes: Wit Alfre: 3 ass s.. inp | cela a als o ia g tia s oo o in. (. A. al. .o ANN He bar:: c AAAE
§; .= l: )) Mer sox ANNAN
e '= /’/'£";"," # j 7/5" 1 L ,n UAL an igre;
AA fie, #i {f/fl/ s pi
- --® ss if Nun 3,
-- ss '
-e ~ ® 7
thy
z» -
(hes: * AMP
(% /(( Wi..
neram,
So
\
(
I
]
\\\\‘?\
A IJ
7 r i a e gat 4 7
Aj 7 e frr a ak 'a o
Sil 2 ( as
p a* erv
$2,*
sinh
”(wt he
il
Sd
Lh
A>
lesS
wer®
amay-
~W a
d F/A) «Bh
Ath F 1
fr (
$o
"h
cla 4
T l s
/ / *(
| ) "f C2.
{4\\\ G o I
any,:
| 37 NFA AP
/ iseilly Cy pare
an A A A wE Yee
_4//,‘:l:' 2. ; ; f -v4;'¢',.-
+ ay p 45 Fd I
PLM ff s, , Wae
a 44 7 Fol
ll at 4 fill}; f
l/x a / 5154,
1 a rt
AZ
jes w .
p ,,_.' A If};
//"‘o’/ 4 |
h> Brid
' I‘m :
..x fim A
Sa
8%
SX
\
"st
SOS
( Cr sk
| FWS
FX
Po Com
&
as
oms
p"; § f
';"¢= LP :t: .: '% ' ® t [
* Ta - = L "<% c m.
2,5" \‘ mt” 4/4 ? “,;f‘h':-'y Ps Q” ,.‘-:: P ififil’iufivfigr1 } ”v,” I
| Kktli‘l‘m’! 4!” f "A“ "eee - / i
des
- ry ys
Cu
W,
Nes
ts
%
"ii
)
I
W}
rpi 4
Tz
7
my ZP
|
IR
P
§
STANLEY'S MARCH FROM KASONGA.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 423
gathers both slaves and ivory. 'To convey his booty he keeps a steamer, named
Stanley, plying between the Falls and Yambuya, though not running regularly,
from which latter station the ivory and slaves are sent either up the Aruwimi
River and thence by way of the Lake regions to Egypt or Zanzibar, or are
conveyed down the Congo in large canoes, eighty or one hundred feet in length.
The immense influence, and especially the power which Tipo Tib possessed
in this large region, made his friendship absolutely necessary to Stanley, for he
had the ability to destroy the expedition at a single blow, or by rendering such
4,3 1k, P\ B xjj A .-—.- ’ - ""A;“ f i az gs ."
%
WENYA FISHER WOMEN
assistance as was at his command, to insure its success. Therefore when Stanley
found the cunning raider at Zanzibar, he at once obtained an interview and
sought to establish friendly relations. It was not long after this meeting before
Stanley learned of Tipo Tib's intention of making another raid along the Congo,
which the explorer knew the small garrisons at the several stations could not
prevent, and which in fact threatened their own destruction. 'To prevent this
and to save his expedition, Stanley entered into a contract with the great
Arab by which Tipo was to furnish 700 carriers to convey supplies and
also act as a military escort for the expedition from Stanley Falls to Wadelai.
“7/1 \
s§\\ a ) %
Wee
mut \\§
m ss
ill. ate rE o -)
"ole
éffA-V/UulflllwI/IIHV/éflflnuu
RV
v Inz/lfl. R
h o TCT
vat
4
¥:
Mm“
_\
sz
-ma
N SLAVES AFTEEK A RAID,
TIPO TIB BRINGING I
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 423
Stanley did not really expect Tipo Tib to carry out the terms of this contract,
for he well knew the treacherous character of the villainous raider, but he rightly
expected that the contract would serve the purpose of a compact of friendship,
and that while thus avoiding his opposition to the expedition, would also prevent
the intended raid upon the Congo stations.
The results prove that Stanley had correctly estimated the value of this
contract. Tipo Tib did accompany the expedition as far 'as Stanley Falls, but
here he halted with promises to furnish an escort when the camp at Yambuya,
comprising the rear column, should be ready to move. But how he broke
this promise will be seen hereafter.
CHAPTUR XXI
THE INTRENCHED CAMP AT YAMBUYVA.
N the 15th of June, Stanley, having returned from Stanley Falls,
disappointed in securing the seven hundred carriers promised by
Tipo Tib, made his permanent camp at Yambuya, near the mouth
of the Aruwimi, which he caused to be intrenched and. made the
base for his supplies. Tipo Tib had renewed his promise to fur-
nish the-required number. of. carriers in. a month,-giving..specious
excuses why he was unable to immediately comply with the terms of his con-
tract. Being for this reason unable to move the whole of his force at once,
and anxious. to push on without delay to the rescue of Emin Pasha, who was
believed to be in a dangerous situation, Stanley divided his command into two
columns. With one half his force he decided to move as quickly as possible,
leaving the rear column in command of Major Barttelot with his lieutenants,
Ward, Jameson, Bonny and Troup. Full instructions were left with Barttelot,
who Stanley thought would be able to follow him within a month, at which time
he expected Tipo Tib would supply the necessary carriers.
Stanley accordingly left Yambuya June 28th, 1887, by way of the Aruwimi
river, over an untrodden path through an unexplored country, with his compass
as a guide, for Lake Albert N'yanza, on whose shores he hoped to find and
rescue Emin Pasha. - The parting between those that started on this perilous
journey and those who were left behind was both impressive and affecting, for
in that dark region infested by savages and the yet more to be dreaded foe that
lurks in fens, morasses and miasmatic swamps, who might speak a lightsome
au revorr when separation by death appeared most probable? But if the part-
ing had in it the elements of sadness, it was only a portent of real sorrows and
death, which was to be a fulfllment of the gloomiest misgivings, and -a fatal
ending of the hopes and ambitions of those composing the rear guard.
Stanley marched off, though sad at heart, yet resolute in purpose, kissing
his hand to Barttelot as long as he remained in sight, and soon the advancing
cavalcade had passed out of view up the Aruwimi river.
The feeling of dread of consequences though considerable was somewhat
relieved by the belief that Barttelot would soon receive the aid. promised by
Tipo Tib and be able to move after his chief, though it must be confessed that
at no time did: either Stanley or Barttelot repose the. fullest confidence. in.,, the
treacherous Arab.. But-after the advance" column had departed,: Barttelot:-set
about establishing his camp and kept well employed for several days apportion-
ing the labors of his men, drilling his small force of soldiers and enforcing
(426)
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 427
sanitary regulations. 'The country about Yambuya was generally level, or
slightly undulating, with low hills rising about five miles from the Aruwimi
shores. There was considerable game to be found in the well-wooded hills,
chiefly antelopes, spring-boks, buffaloes and occasionally leopards, lions, ele-
phants and rhinoceri. 'These grazed in the rich pasturage of the low lands,
but sought the woods for shade, where they were more easily hunted. There-
fore after the camp was completed and thorough order established, which was
not accomplished for some weeks, Barttelot and Jameson went out for a hunt,
being accompanied by a half dozen natives as guides.
A RHINOCEROS IN PURSUIT OF THE HUNTERS.
The two met with such poor success the first day that with great discour-
agement they started on their return to camp; but on the way they met a
\‘\ Re
\ a .
< 1 a
\p
\\\P\\m tt \\\ | n Ho seams tt ¢ V ,\\\‘
AMAR NH) b ' f My A 80V \\ 2 A Xt
FORT YAMBUYVA.
native from a neighboring village who reported having that morning seer a
white rhinoceros in a grassy range about two miles distant. 'This news had
such an exciting effect that the hunters engaged the native to guide them to
the'spot, and off they set at once in search -of the royal-game.
It was now growing late in the afternoon and it was felt that the game
must be quickly located if the hunt were concluded before nightfall. 'The spot
indicated was soon gained and the beaters sent out in a semicircle to drive the
tal grass. was on the extreme right, a little to -the front of the beat-
ets, while Jameson took the left. In a little while a shout went up which was
unmistakable in its import, and in a few seconds out dashed a huge rhinoceros
that made off to the left in a sharp run, followed by the beaters. As the ani-
mal came near Jameson he fired at its head, but his aim was not good, for the
28 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
bullet struck the creature's long, sharp horn, tearing away a> portion of its
weapon. -But the shot served to swerve the rhinoceros, which now turned and
came charging to the right, and dashed right through the beaters, one of whom
fell in a frantic endeavor to get out of the way. Fortunately the beast did
not attack his prostrate foe but kept on in the direction of Barttelot, who now
fired at it but missed. ; f
In the next instant the rhinoceros was charging him, and the hunter now
turned suddenly from the sport to the more serions business of seeking a
retired position where he could avoid annoyance. It was of course a selfish
prompting, but it stood him well in need, for a good pair of legs at that june-
ture was as important as their vigor
ous use, a. fact which Barttelot, better
than the reader, perhaps, thoroughly
understood. At all events, he ran with
amazing speed, and succeeded in gain-
ing a friendly bush, by which the
rhinoceros, quite as much frightened
as the hunter, passed like an engine
with the throttle wide open. lt ran
on with undiminished speed until it
gained the woods and there. disap-
peared, leaving the hunters the one
satisfaction of thanks for their escape
f§§§§ as a solace for their having to. retfirn
- to camp without any game.
W1 ,
\
X A \“
ssa. ADVENTURE WITH A BUFFALO.
-- The unsatisfactory ending of their
f Z first hunt about Yambuya did not
wholly subdue the ambition of Barttelot
and Jameson, though it is more than
probable that they had no special
longing to avenge themselves upon the .
rhinoceros family. But in a few days
after the untoward event just related another hunt was projected in which
Mr. Bonny and Barttelot, with a goodly guard of Soudanese, concluded to
participate, leaving Ward, Jameson and Troup in charge of the camp.
The party started out early in the morning, expecting to be gone two days.
They had provided themselves with plenty of ammunition, but expecting to
confine their sport to antelopes, they took only 44-calibre guns. 'This time, toc,
they crossed the river, having heard that several miles from Yambuya, on the
south side, there was a beautiful park-like region in which springboks and
antelopes were plentiful. Nor were they disappointed; in fact, game of nearly
every kind was found, and the party had royal sport. Several antelopes were
MAJOR EDWARD M. BARTTELOT.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT, 429
bagged, and these would prove a great blessing at the camp, where meat had
become very scarce, so that the lack of it had indeed been seriously felt.
Towards noon of the second day, when the hunters were taking a rest
beside a brook, one of the beaters reported the presence of a small herd of
buffaloes near by. Four of the beaters had been sent back to the camp with
as many antelopes, and only four more remained with Barttelot and Bonny.
These were directed to surround the herd and to reach elevations from which
they could signal the location of the game. These instructions were faithfully
7
7
LZ
Cho
oal "..- \ A
2) v tim z # /\\¥ k /
¥ i ays ~ ~ - Steen
EBuliifinsy
yl l TF
U 7 P mn
mea 4 t . a Ri o
[f-
oa
,/ i
" BRB) --
lins
A SUDDEN CHANGE OF BASE.
carried out, and in a short time one of the men was seen standing on an ant-
hill, waving his hands as an indication that he had sighted the buffaloes.
Both the hunters were provided with field glasses, through which they were
able to clearly observe the beater and to understand his gestures. They
therefore spread out and advanced towards & depression in the park, where the
game was found to be standing in a shallow pond, whisking their tails as a
protection against the flies. Bonny was the first to fire, and succeeded in
wounding a cow, which shambled off into the high grass evidently badly hurt.
eternal e nient can's
i% *~ HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
The shot alarmed the herd, that now scattered and dashed in every direction,
one large bull passing so near Barttelot that, in the excitement, even by firing
at random, he struck the animal in the side and brouglhif it down. In the next
instant, however, the bull was again on its feet, foaming at the mouth and pre-
senting a picture: of ferocity aud madness. Barttelot fired a second shot as the
enraged animal stood for the moment as if trying to locate its enemy, and at
the discharge down it dropped, as if stricken instantly dead. Barttelot now
rushed forward to cut its throat, having never before hunted buffaloes, and
ofis h t Le s g eg algo jy ~ an & . Core -t- =
§ Aal) oo z 0 toy - T4] P‘ ¢ therefore not un-
(§ , A A #> L/ Ay " 4 yo - § a \ ‘ f | x
ca" WM" yyy) 9.2 "hys Ku §\,\ . derstanding - the
\" x "h I,- F / t
fess, danger that at
x74 tends approaching
even 'a -dyills
animal of this
kind. He carried
his gun at a
" trail-arms," least
suspecting any
peril, when,. hav-
ing come within
a few feet of the
apparently dead
buffalo, it arose
with the most
surprising - celer-
ity, and before
Barttelot. could
use his gun the
savage creatltte
rushed at: him,
82 f N
Mes 2 vel NN 7 a\l (Q e
=== <-. fix\\ 7/ {Qgé “Q and with a tremen-
-- = Sf) At \V "4. f
------- << -_ \ It was found that Barttelot had sustained a severe shock, besides a deep
wound in the left thigh where the buil's horn had struck" hin Moreover,
he complained of severe internal pains, so that it was for a while believed that
- he was dangerously hurt. 'The beaters were called in, and a litter constructed
op which the wounded man was carried to the brook beside which the party
had a short while before rested. Here the wound was carefully washed and
then bandaged by pieces torn from Mr. Bonny's shirt. Barttelot now seemed
much better, and it was thought expedient to carry him to Yambuya, even
though the march was a long one. He stood the journey much better than
Bouny had expected; but it was nearly a month before his wound. healed suff-
ciently to allow him to resume his active duties about the camp. ¥.
; AN ELEPHANT BAGGED. _ :
A short while after Barttelot's disastrous hunt, an elephant was discovered
by some natives within two miles of the camp, and Bonny, who had been some-
what successful as a hunter, set out to bag it, if possible. The .spot where it
had been located was a most uninviting place for a hunter, being in an almost
impassable thicket of dense brush and wait-a bit thorns. Eut an enthusiastic
hunter, like the devoted lover, makes no pause before obstacles,; so Mr. Bonny
did not hesitate to seek the giant game in such a covert. te.
The several beaters taken with him were less determined, however, and it
appeared for a time as if he niust be his own beater." Several Hours were thus
spent in a fruitless search for the game, but late in the evening the elephant
was located under the shade of a large tamarind tree, around which was a very
dense thicket. 'To move in such a place was to. give the alarm, hence Bonny
induced the-keaters to make a wide circuit and come in on the opposite side,
so that in case the elephant retreated if would run in the direction of the
hunter." The plan was so successful that in half an hour after the beaters
went to execute the order, Bonny heard the footfalls of the rapidly-approaching
game. It was a truly royal brute, in its stupendous majesty, and the incarna-
tion of terrible power, before which any but a brave heart indeed must quail.
But Bonny was nerved for the opportunity. He had a splendid double-barrelled
rifle, carrying a three-ounce ball, and had implicit confidence in his steadiness
of nerve, as well as his knowledge of the vital places in an elephant's head.
Therefore, he quietly waited, well hidden by the brush, until the huge form
came so near as to fairly rise above him. At this moment the great beast had
recovered from-sits alarm. finding that there were no pursuers," and at the
moment that it made its full appearance the elephant was walking slowly and
playfully tossing its trunk, wholly innocent of the danger that confronted its path.
T
Fel mi o o tpa peas <=); = x“? . . NZ
f; . d ~R
& 4m
WA W
(A
A yA fling o n
- &
A
AV.
$
t
Ri
R \\\\\‘
Aar wi
AS
o
aat
x
aC
r Cees \-
e . f f / 4 \ ( f ~. Z A ,. y 2 s 3 é ? 3 Re Y .. \.~ \l\.u‘~4.
t % t oat, / aa e r rae <.; Aims ol a
4 is My " 9 U T ¢ Ps o y ax elt % mam STa <
re
bad 4 7 2 4 « F A n # R E ~ v j : a j e 22
es ~ * ; f / +2 R - ry
op ie reapeat §\\ A et * *% he : § s 7 J
Yrs
I
HJ
l
\\§ 6
Ax Aun
SpA
2). ®»
Ga Ade
Idil
X Cw
w
SNT
§"
A
oe ,
ol],
1410
P
I .
d «AA fl» AK?“ é
A " A
(meds AnaM/Z
poe! my? 3 x
Dur
M UAE
JD
X“ \»
usin:
Ay NEM
“him.“
l
‘°.\\ xmtm. Zon ics '\ ¢
% ALVT IX : h AI] A f ; P A sate: P nH :
aun ‘ _ 2 PV TE \ \ is sa ly otal ae _._
\\\_\@> UHC AAV ya. ~SA [ j h | " =
4 . i ses f p
U
h
7
6
U
M
x {
L4
(433)
A STEADY HAND AT A SUPREME MOMENT.
28
434 HEROBS OF THE DARK.CONTINENT,.
As the ponderous creature came within a few feet of the hunter, who had
dropped on one knee, the rifle was raised and fired just as the elephant turned
its head fairly to the left. This enabled Mr. Bonny to reach the oval soft place
it the. skull just slightly in front and below the ear. 'The elephant stopped,
trembled violently and then staggered, but recovered itself and trumpeted shrilly,
though it was not able to run. Mr. Bonny now waited a favorable opportunity,
seeing that the animal was too badly wounded to make a charge, until he could
fire the second barrel into the right side of the head, at Wh1ch shot 'the. huge
beast fell over with great force and immediately explred
As soon as news of Mr. Bonny's success was sent back to camp, a large
crowd came flocking out to see the remains, and their numbers were speedily
2g,
m‘w lit/l/ §
Xfib‘ I\
/
NATIVES RUSHING TO DIVIDBR THE ELEPHANT.
swelled by an immense collection of natives. Mr. Bonny secured the tusks,
which were a beautiful pair, and then gave the gigantic body over to the
savages, who attacked it with everything they could procure that would cut, and
soon carried it away in pieces, not even rejecting the entrails. The four feet
were secured, however, by the Zanzibaris, who took them to camp, and prepared
what is esteemed a dehghtful repast of grllled elephant's fcet.
CHAPTER XXII:
AFFAIRS GROW DESPERATE AT YAMBUYA CAMP.
, Yim URING the long, long absence of Stanley, affairs at Yambuya
I & \\ camp became finally both critical and tedious in the extreme.
Stanley had. left the of June, promising to, return in
November. But month after month had passed beyond that
date and. no news of lum had reached the camp. The few
hunting diversions described had not sufficed to relieve the
desperate monotony of the camp; the same wearying rounds of duty had
palled on the members, food had become scarce, the rain and a long season of
gloomy weather had chilled the spirit of the bravest, game had become so rare
that the hunt was no longer enjoyed, while absence of news from Stanley, now
so long overdue, served to intensify the fears and privations of the camp. But
to these troubles must be added 'others equally great arising out of the evident
treachery of Tipo Tib in his refusal to supply Barttelot with the carriers he had
promised;
A SLAUGHTER OF THE NATIVES.
*The camp at Yambuya was therefore frequently monotonous, and life at
times became almost insupportable because of long enforced 1dleness and weary,
weary waiting for Stanley's return or the promised aid of Tipo Tib. But this
condition was not invariable, for at times most exciting events transpired to lend
the charm of intefse excitement. On February 4th, 1888, Ward writes from
the Aruwimi camp as follows: "Jameson's third anniversary of his marriage.
We were not able to 'do much in the celebration line. 'The Arabs started firing
at early dawn, and then set on fire the village they attacked (in the neighbor-
hood). ; It was a- pretty, it sad, sight to seerthe 'place burning." The Arabs
Killed eiglit men and brought in the head of one who must have been a fine
fellow. Jameson and I sketched it, and we shall pickle, salt and preserve it,
so that the head can be mounted. Another head they lost-dropped it in the
river. 'The unhappy natives in hundreds took to their canoes and made for
up-stream, but are being slaughtered by the Arabs who occupy an island in the
midst of almost impassable rapids."
But with these horrible sights, which were occas1onal1y witnessed, there
were other things that relieved the tedionusness, though they were the aggra-
vating results of the seemingly endless waiting and delusive promises. The
scarcity of food and the demoralization of a long-delayed advance, together
with the slave-hunting raids of the Arabs, made the maintenance of discipline
less easy as it became more important. - Major Barttelot seems to have been
forced into severely punishing his insubordinate: followers-an impression
gained by reading one of Ward’s letters written from Yambuya. He says:
(435)
436 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
" Bangari, who stole some goat-meat, and who had 200 lashes with a AZ
cotte, and who has to parade daily in heavy chains for punishment, has grown
tired of it, and succeeded in getting away with his guard's gun and twelve
rounds of ammunition. He is a very hardened scoundrel, and I should not be
surprised if he has concealed himself near by in the forest, so as to have a
shot at one of us as we walk up and down in the evening outside the post.".
ARAB SLAVE RAIDERS.
The: Arabs in their raids: do not have it always their own way. 'They
fall now and then, and after the fighting are used to furnish forth cannibalistic
feasts. Providence, however, is most frequently, it would seem, on their side.
-me S There are no in-
H i stances more pa-
thetic in the history
of slave dealing
than the inhuman
huntings, burnings
and. -h iman "Cap"
§ tures of the Arabs
§ of. Central Africa.
f But cccasionally
§ they meets a=sjust
Y retribution. Under
date of 's,
W ard ~ writes:
$ *This morning
' some of the raiders
% came down from
A up river, with news
2 of a defeat of ten
| of their number, cut
| to pieces by the
natives, who sought
refuge in their canoes above the rapids. Selim and his men started off, some
by the bank and some in canoes, to continue their awful work. 'They
returned in the evening having only killed two natives." On the next day
Selim informed Ward that 200 or more of the natives escaped in the darkness
down the river. 'Two canoes had not got away, and he was able to kill two
of the occupants. Arriving at the spot where his ten men had fallen, he found .
their fingers tied in strings to the scrub of the river bank, and some cooking
pots containing portions of their limbs and bones." :
On March 24th Major Barttelot decided to send - Ward to the coast with
dispatches and cable messages for the committee in London. - Writing of this
commission, he says: " I am to start in five days. Barttelot returned from the
HEROES - OF -THE DARK : CONTINENT. 437
Stanley Falls, Jameson gone to Kanongo. Both have been very ill at the
Falls, and indeed Barttelot looks awfully bad. Very sorry for him.'' At the
time stated Ward started and made a remarkably quick trip to Boma, arriving
there April 28, though he met many perils on the way.. W riting from Boma,
* \
e 3 _
/'//’ #
(h Lo
M/
o f \ Nb
\ bake st Ne) A\\‘N"\‘
xb {<6 55 teac
SALEM'S FORCES ADVANCING TO RAID A NATIVE VILLAGE.
in a reflective mood, he says: " What fatality there seems to be connected
with all Europeans who had to go to the Falls! First, Brung shot him-
self; second, a Belgian officer died on his way up; third, Werter, who went
home very ill; fourth, Deane, who underwent awful perils; fifth, Du Bois was
438 HEROES OF «THE DARK CONTINENT.
drowned; sixth, Vanderwelde, who died the other day at Leopoldville en route
for the Falls; seventh, Spelmann, his companion, got sick and had to go home
fo save lis lite; eighth, . Amelot, who. died on Mis way to Zanzibar."
since Ward made this sorrowful recapitulation Deane has died, Barttelot
has been assassinated, Jameson has died of fever, and Troup had to go bick
to England, as did Spelmann, to seek recovery that was impossible in Africa.
To these perplexities must be added the oppressive circumstances of the
camp surroundings, in which savagery in its worse than imbruted phases was
AN IVORY TRADER.
conspicuous, for to other abhorrent practices of the natives that of cannibalism
was frequent if not common. '
h CANNIBALISM ON THE CONGO.
In one of Mr..Stanley's letters, found elsewhere in this book, he makes his
defence against many cruel and unjust charges, and among other things he
enters a specific denial of the open acts of cannibalism which Rev. Wilmot
Brooke claims that certain English travellers told him came under their own
observation while travelling among the Manyuema and other Congo tribes.
The Manyuema have always been regarded as cannibals, the practice of killing
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 439
and eating human beings being quite as common among them as it is among
the Fans and Makkarikas. Stanley has entertained the idea that the Man-
ynemas have been in contact with Arabs so long that they have abandoned
cannibalism, as have others of the Congo tribes.. But in this opinion he is
evidently mistaken, as the following letter from Ward, written at the intrenched
camp at - Yambuya, Febrnary 26th, 1888, will clearly show.. He says :
"I went this morning to Nassibu's camp, which is situated about an hour's
march from our own rien, " -> --i acin __
camp on the Falls (Aru- S 3 : ---
wimi).. He-received me
with much ceremony,
and. at my request
drummed to the natives,
who. were in two clear-
ings at the back of his
camp. ~A number came
and went through the
usual demonstrations at
seeing. a. white man.
Among them were about
a dozen young women,
with pleasing counte-
nances and beautifully-
moulded limbs. They
would have made worthy
models for a sculptor.
I selected a man as a
model --for myself,. but
it was very difficult to
induce him to stand still
wifile -l sketched him.
I then started for their
village with Majuta, Mr.
Jameson's boy, carrying
my bag, and Fida, a { z=
native woman, who has s THE WALLS OF NASSIBU'S CAMP.
been with the Arabs for some time, to interpret from Swahili into the native
language. } '
"Almost the first man I saw was carrying four lumps of human flesh
(with the skin on) on a stick, and through Fida I found that they had killed
a man this morning and had divided the flesh. She took me over to a house
where some half-dozen men were squatting, and showed me more meat on sticks
in front of a fire; it was frizzling and the yellow fat was dripping from it,
440 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
whilst all around was a strong odor which reminded me of the smell given out
by grilled elephant meat. It was not yet the general meal-time, they told me,
but one or two of the natives cut off pieces of the frizzling flesh and ate it,
laughing at Majuta who, being disgusted, held his nose and backed into the
brush. I spoke with the natives, through Fida, and they told me from what
parts the meat was cut. One tall, sturdy native was quietly leaning against a
tree and picking off pieces of flesh from a thigh bone with good relish. Other
m- s Faz - -
m_, zz= ow sme &_
- ig t e ram fet, y c b\_~.
IN NASSIBU'S CA MP.
some day hope to tell you all the horrible details of the cannibal habits and
customs which prevail in this strange country."
PITIABLE SIGHTS IN CAMP. :
The terrible anxieties that harassed the camp by reason of Stanley's.pro-
tracted absence and the horrors of cannibalism as described are shown by
numerous letters from Ward, from which we are permitted to print the following
extracts. On February 8th (1888) he writes:
"I went to Selim's camp to-day, and they told me that two more of their
mm +4.
y fi-‘1‘Tl7'i 7—
ft tif |
1) 1h
/
Y a
soon
) R AY C
q) <
NOLs i k )
ts
¥
a rara s -W
pi T
ply . 6
“Mgfiu '!_
ms:
RY f:
)
a 31W \}‘\ f)
hibs"
e--
t
ch
&." p
--<1dl RL
o [3'/| R
)
/
if
H
rol
#4 7.44 WA
orm rion ain Waa
aril.
Chath / 4 M! +
_s
Z- ___
z fj,""{4Z;/’/////'{' ///
ZZ
Ff ;_///'/
assi L SVZ
f / 4 Z
T
f ea e a a ea il
=-
f ‘4~‘»;‘._;._..\;..Lfa‘ h
PTN Cask
roms a Co ss e =
git-”ff? “(h I § Z Shearer ce- ___ pp anl
CUS J <<
i 3 f eee s
BC \\ s - 4
if“ <7,
®
et OV
ng g
Chacusn' "itH e «AB
PNH “fiflf': \ r 5 h ”MW
:; Z P p e
~ dh t h -_-. p
s eee
| c ft ~ T e =~ ~~ r Z at
1. Cannibal Scene in Village near KNassbu's Camp on the ArnuwimL 8. Majuta (Mr. Jameson's boy). .- § 9. Native of Diva, between Yambuya and the River Cong
2 Yawkinl, ane hour's cance voyage abore Yahsuta, on the Congo. 6. Carved Tobacco-Bowl, bought from Selim's Manyemas 10. Native Pottery, Aruwimi Rapids. *
3. ¥enylmba, an Arab Stave Owner. T. A Corner in the Camp at Yambuysa. 11. Shore, with Fishing-Canoes, at Yabstita, Congo River.
A Ow Pronsenade, looking up the River from the Camp 6; Fallidi-bin-An. - 12. Native Utensils, Aruwtmi Rapids, Limbayo 1% 4
WARD'S SKETCHES ON THE CONGO AND ARUWIMI RIVERS.
(441)
442 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
men (Arabs) had been caught and eaten by the natives, whose village they had
raided and burnt some weeks ago. 'This will probably make Selim angry, as
he went with Barttelot much against his will, and only left a few men and his
women. .. This eternal waiting. is awful-waiting for what never comes! Day
after day passes; we see no fresh faces, we hear no news. Many of our men
are daily growing thinner and weaker, and are dying off. Poor wretches! they
lie out. in. the sun, on the dusty ground, most of them with only a narrow strip
of . dirty . loin-
eloth ;and -all
the livedlong
day they stare
into - vacancy,
and at night
gaze: at: a - Dit
of fire.
'" It, was a
pitiable sight,
a few days ago,
to see an emaci-
ated man crawl,
with, the: aid
[ of a stick, after
a. corpse, 'that
was being car-
ried on a pole
for interment.
He staggered
along, poor fel-
low, and squat-
ted down along-
side the newly-
made grave and
watched the
proceedings
with. large,
round, sunken eyes, knowing that it would only be a matter of a few days
when he himself would be a dead man. He told me in a sepulchral voice,
'Amekwa rapiki angu' (He was my friend). Another poor fellow is a mass of
bones, yet persists in doing his work, and every evening staggers into the camp.
He has been told to lay up, and that his manioc shall be provided for him, but
he refuses, and in replying to my sympathetic remark that he was very thin,
he said, 'Yes, only a short time more, imaster!' Death is written in his face,
and just as plainly in the faces of many others in this camp. Almost as many
¢ s &, < f ' t'.
a I1 & %
Ces €
vNW . A
2 )I\.\ i a> U +
e Reve .
S s \ i
g Ais R &
P p aes
Poy
h"
Trem nra, yess
$ ~- . han
*a monn 53>
bou
__
sA M
MEMBERS OF THE REAR COLUMN.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 443
lives, I fear, will be lost in this philanthropic enterprise as there are lives
of 'Bmin Pasha's people to save."
f THREATS AGAINST BARTTELOT'S LIFE.
Ward does not say positively that Tipo Tib is chiefly to blame for this
sorry situation, but he frequently refers to the suspicious nature of his delay
in supplying the men he had undertaken to provide. On January 18 he writes:
« Selim-bin-Mahomed, who has hitherto been most pleasant and agreeable, is
now beginning to get 'touchy.' Evidently we shall never get the:: 550 men
Tipo Tib promised us.'" In another of his letters dated February 8, he seems
to forecast poor Barttelot's fate. "To-day," he writes, "I am an orderly
officer. An old empty cartridge-box was picked up in the river (Aruwimi) to-
day. It was much broken and sodden; it must have been floating down the
river for a very long distance. Selim-bin-Mabomed told me this morning that
Bungari, the escaped prisoner, had told him, preparatory to escaping, that his
"life was not worth living, R ~--~2" r Uc a l
marching up and down 2X3. ~ 1}
in fhe, hot sun all ' day,
and that he knew. he
would. be shot - when
caught, and that Be in-
tended shooting Barttelot
dead before he would be a \[
captured f f : 1/2/1965? £5211" avs, f 3
Again lhe . writes; mense tt. mts. >
? ark" ocal ns... toes
"It is picturesque but | MMRC u ‘
dull, and wretched with frr ll fut ,‘,\\/\\4\ -_ CC
waiting and hoping for | W’i/Wfiéfififfi iE -=
* E 4 P AL l ude old)) R ”$5211; I. "fl, d =-
orders to move. Massibu, |__ {. * Wry CHAI
G IT EASY.
ait Arab of - Tipo: Tib's, —
visited us, bringing some Stanley Falls rice and a goat. He told us an absurd
yarn of Abdullah having seen Stanley. Jameson continues collecting birds and
painting them. We sketched the second rapids from below the camp. We have
not sufficient medicine, and very little food. 'The Zanzibaris and Soudanese are
suffering seriously, and there are many deaths. 'This awful delay of news from
Stanley bodes misfortune, and we are all compelled to conclude that he has met
with trouble and is in difficulties-if not worse. A brave, skilful and determined
man, a hero, one hopes, and hopes he may be safe and well."
Ward's letter of January oth, 1888, reads as follows:
" YamBINGA, INTRENCHED CAMP, ArUuwImMt RIVER.
"It seems very strange we have heard nothing of Stanley, who was to
have returned (from Lake Albert, whither he went to seek Emin Pasha) last
November, and we can only account for his prolonged absence by supposing
that he had to go a longer journey from the Albert N'yanza than he had pre-
. - HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
viously anticipated. If anything has happened to him it will be a bad look.
out for the expedition; and I do not know how the relief goods, merchandise
and ammunition, seven hundred loads, will ever reach him. There appears to
me to be some motive in Tipo Tib's delaying the seven hundred men he prom-
ised! ' It is hardly feasible, "his. exense 'that his men reftigsed" to carty 'our Toads
on account of their weight. His authority certainly ought to overcome any
scruples of that sort, and, besides, $7,500, is very good pay for his Manyuema
slaves" "Therelis something at the. bottom of "it all' whiclt we shail perhaps
know all about before long." .
These fears were not alone occasioned by the mere absence of news,
but were increased by a knowledge of Arab treachery. : The. Atabs: were.-cons
R tinually harassing the natives by plundering
them of slaves and ivory, and in turn the
natives were goaded into making reprisals on
their foes. Under these conditions it was a
difficult matter for the natives to distinguish
between Stanley's people and their Arab allies.
In this particular therefore, as in others, Stan-
ley's alliance with Tipo 'Tib really increased
his danger, which fact was well known by
Barttelot and his lieutenants.
DEATH OF BARTTELOT.
And thus did a sad and demoralizing
condition continue to prevail in the camp at
Yambuya. 'The fear for Stanley's safety, added
to the sufferings entailed by reason of in-
sufficient food, want of medicine, harrowing
scenes and insubordination finally determined
Barttelot to move, at all hazards in quest of
his long overdue chief. Several counsels were first held, at which Ward, Jame-
son and Barttelot expressed their conviction that Stanley was dead. Troup,
who was in charge of the commissary, alone dissented from this opinion and
urged further delay. But Barttelot's anxiety could no longer brook delay. He
felt that if his chief were dead other lieutenants of Stanley's might still »~be
living, and that most likely his aid was urgently needed. Already he had
waited too long, and should, some months before, have acted on the discretionary
order given him by Stanley. 'Therefore gathering his command together, he
first proceeded down to Stanley Falls to ascertain how many carriers he could
obtain from the Arabs there, no longer, however, placing any trust in Tipo Tih.
His trip was of no avail, for he could not induce the Arabs or Manyuemas to
give him any assistance though he offered $7,500, for the service.
Returning to Yambuya he resolved to proceed over the route taken by
Stanley with the aid of the few men he had at his command, among whom
BUNGARI.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 445
were several Manyuemas belonging to Tipo 'Tib. But when he gave orders to
prepare to march there was an open rebellion upon the part of nearly his
entire force. Being hot-headed, as Stanley says, he undertook coercive meas-
ures, and ordered some to be flogged and others shot.. At this there was
an uprising and in the confusion that followed a shot was fired from a musket.
No one seemed to know who fired the gun, nor has it since been determined,
because the confusion was very great and several of the men, including Sou-
danese, Zanzibaris and Manyuema, had guns, and no one, if they really knew,
<.
~*,
Z
A
» w
Ill 1‘
x
3 jay.) I): V'- )I'/.A'- (l, ,\ ‘ S \‘ ‘ we.)
- Q? z (iv y4 , W \\ © ® ,/
1
1~€¢yl noon
g A." fP 34 , s s & : if; Cess
A" ~Ky 77 Ninu\ 'ey?
- \ J“ ra
Posadas tti lil! /h .\ 3 R
THE KILLING OF BARTTELOT.
would expose the guilty party. But the result was, alas, too manifest. 'The
bullet had struck poor Barttelot in the back of the head, killing him instantly,
so deadly being the shot that he never uttered either word or groan. Thus
ended, in deepest shadows, the bright prospects of this young officer, who fell
in his enthusiastic devotion to Stanley, and his loyalty to the purposes of the
expedition.
ABANDONMENT OF YAMBUYA.
Two weeks before this inexpressibly sad event Jameson died of a fever, no
doubt superinduced by his anxieties and the hardships which he had been com-
(9FF)
thts 2»?le SM) .\
.§§§§§Nc ap
fd os *\\\"\§“£* ke
,%§§@WW§N§Q
w Syu? .n ie We
% fifi,%§¥fi%@\fi\ # YES /- 4/8 fia \ f
R a s y Aub \ & S R S e f A
a 4a: yn IRs ceo o a
R. F & __\ j l,“ I f s & y \\‘ AJ fe / 7 ////,rl/ \.
mes yuty 2 o
AXS s 6 I /////}/l// C
F
R
/
l‘h- Q'x // i dt As a S
it x»; \*‘*‘k~t""\ ory.. b as \ \t
Q;§\<§\ g A [UL‘Z\\, I / //QI l a. A é X ‘k ( 1 » X wt | A\ Sk U / 4 f it
KONA {li Nu AW) & R ( R d / ei I ien Ao '
AAI --- 12 a) I%
‘ N
I \ 6
NX W R .
fi£§3 \ Fevre //’ \ 3
u§§é§ \,__ L A IIA \\ \
"OA ,-- >. l/I/Whfi: A
'a]. PAI
(kr .\\>,-\ % 1523; y t‘-—¢_ s
\
n» ALUES - =
d Oon:
(KLE U 7
[
Al
iy
Ches j
SS
+ c pes
ia, > ~
PUNISHMENT -OF-PETTY INSUBORDINATES,.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 447
pelled to undergo in common with other members of the expedition. Troup
also fell ill and it appeared that he too must die, but seeing that all hope of
the rear column proceeding eastward must now be abandoned, he turned his
steps homeward and reached England more dead than alive, but ultimately
recovered. |
Ward, who had, with the other officers, except Troup, and possibly Bonny,
believed Stanley was dead, after giving his best efforts to a reorganization of the
demoralized rear column, or the few that now remained, left for England, leav-
ing Mr. Bonny, the sole white man now in the camp, in charge. Bonny there-
fore finding that all the responsibility was now upon his own shoulders, decided
to follow, as nearly as he could, Stanley's written orders to Barttelot, and in
pursuance of this resolve he removed the supplies and the few men yet with
him, to Banalya, estimating that station to- bee much more» secure than
Yambuya, besides at this place he was more likely to hear news from Stanley,
as traders passed more frequently from Banalya to the Lake regions than
from Yambuya, or even from Stanley Falls. 'The wisdom of this removal will
presently appear.
CHAPEER XXII
NEWS FROM STANLEY AND EMIN.
ONTH after month went by in dreary succession, with no news
from Stanley. His departure from Yambuya was known to
readers in both Europe and America, but after the beginning of
that important march nothing further was heard for nearly two-
years. And the silence of Emin and his companion, Casati,
the Italian, who, acting as a representative of the Khedive as well
as an explorer, was known to have joined him, was equally oppressive and.
ominous. ' §
At length the long, long, fearful silence was broken by the receipt of the
following letter from Casati, addressed to Campino, and published in the Reforma,
Rome. It was like news from the dead :
| LETTER FROM CAPTAIN CASATL
TuncGurRU, Lake Albert, March 25th, 1888.
The ill-concealed hatred of King Kabba Rega has vented itself, superstitious.
fear has conquered him, preparing the ruin of his kingdom. Kabba Rega,
urged by his rapacious instincts, had closed the entrances of the country to HS,
and granted us a miserable concession, which he daily attempted to restrict or
elude. The transmission of the post by way of Uganda was a scarecrow which
disturbed his rest, and our continual exposure of his infamous designs had ex-
asperated his naturally cruel soul. His hatred for us, and especially for me, had.
reached its height, and he, like the coward that he is, was hesitating and.
awaiting an opportunity which finally presented. itself. Armed troops were
approaching from the west and, having encamped at Luche, their presence cer-
tainly menaced his kingdom. Hence an end to all delays! He breaks the
thread which he thought might lead to ruin, and completes the isolation of the
kingdom by closing the road to Uganda. On January 9, 1888, I was therefore
treacherously arrested by order of this wretched monarch, barbarously bound,
and driven along hap-hazard, from village to village, always towards the country
of the chief Kokora, along the Victoria: Nile, a river which, as you know,
unites the Victoria and Albert lakes. 'The chief, Kokora, had received orders
to prepare to put me to death. '
However, after eight days of suffering and three of absolute fasting I, with
my men and two soldiers of the Government, was rescued by Emin Pasha, who
came to my relief with a steamer.. A soldier sent by me to Tunguru, on the-
shores of the Albert Lake, in a boat which we happened to find amongst the:
reeds, had borne the announcement of our unhappy plight to the Pasha.
(448)
HEROES OF 'THE DARK CONTINENTE, 449
A merchant named Biri, who was a guest in my house, a refugee from
Wadelai to Uganda, underwent the same ill-luck as I, but was even less
fortunate; lhe is reported to have killed Iinmninself on the 'road. All my-goods;
those of Biri, and the ivory belonging to the Government, were sequestrated
by the robber-king, but we were permitted to provide ourselves with a little
grain to keep off starvation on the road. I will say nothing of my writings,
my notes taken during the journey --
-the grief is too strong. It is the
first tinie. I have felt annihilated ;
my soul yields, and in the face
'of this irreparable misfortune. my
mind is confused.. Meanwhile, Stan-
ley is near us; Emin Pasha Jas
already - received notice of an ex- f
pedition towards the north. On f
April 1s he will start .with . two
steamers and a sufficient number
of soldiers and make minute re-
searches. Kabba Rega has sent
soldiers to intercept Stanley's march.
If my Health is restored I_ shall f
accompany Emin Pasha. I have f
made him acquainted with the tenor f
of the letter which you sent to [
him, and which Kabba Rega inter-
cepted. «He thanks and salutes you.
Will Kabba Rega remain un- R
punished as did Mwanga? May M
the life of a European be attacked [#
with impunity, and an African king
openly violate the laws of hospitality,
betray and break his plighted faith ?
-make himself the executioner of
a person living in his country as
representative of a Civil Govern-
ment, such as the Egyptian? It
would be too shameful. CAsSATI. SON AND DAUGHTER OF KABBA REGA.
f Captain Casati was agent for the Egyptian Government, stationed near
Kabba Rega's capital in Unyoro, east of Lake Albert, and all letters from
Emin for Europe were sent to him, whose task it was to get them through
to Zanzibar; it was this advantage that enabled him to transmit the above
communication, though many that were written before had miscarried.
29
450 HFROES OF PHE DARE CONTINENT, s
A LETTER FROM STANLEY;
A few months after the receipt of Casati's letter came a communication
from Stanley, being the first news received from him since his departure from
Yambuya in. quest of Emin.
_ This letter, which by. chance fell into. the
hands of a missionary and was thus transmitted, was from his own hand and
written under date of August 17th, 1888, from Boma of Banalya (Urima), and
addressed to Sheik Hamed Ben Mahomed, better known as Tipo Tib.
63
this letter he announces his meeting with Emin and Casati, who he declares
have a great abundance of ivory, sheep, fowls, goats, food of all kinds and
10,000 head of cattle. At
the time of writing this letter Stanley had" with him
PFs
rex
c- (4
22 ©
<
s
5
a
Z
y
z .
:
ye
7
CZ
2
4
2
p
2
#
{é
F1
NATIVES OF UNYORO.
130 Wangwana, three soldiers and 66 natives, and 82 days had then passed
since he had left Emin on the Albert N'yanza. Stanley wrote Tipo Tib to
come to him at Boma, where he would wait ten days his. arrival, and then
move to a big island in the lake, two hours journey from Boma.
To this letter the great Arab chief replied, and refused to accompany
Stanley, just as he had refused a few weeks previously to accompany Jameson,
who offered him, surprising as the statement appears, $150,000 to make the
journey with him from Stanley Falls to Wadelai.
HEROES-OF FHE DARK CONTINENT:
STANLEY'S IN-
STRUCTIONS TO
BARTTELOT.
Shortly : after
secgipt of. this
first news from
Stanley came
transcripts of two
other letters which
he - addressed - to
Major Barttelot,
and which satis-
fied our longing to
know just what he
expected of the
Major upon: leav-
ing - Y ambuya.
The first: Aetter
was sent by three
messengers, and
the second 'was
dispatched under
an escort of twenty
men from Boma,
on | the: 14th 'of
February. Neither
of these messages,
however, - reached
their destination.
The - messengers
who carried the
latter, finder. 3
reward of $50 each
for | its safe- de-
livery, were de-
tained at an Arab
camp which Stan-
ley passed through
on his first jour-
ney eastward, and
both letters were
recovered in. that
place by him on
his: return trip to
j ,’~x » /
(A) i
"P
STANLEY IN THE - DARK CONTINENT.
452 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
ascertain what had become of Barttelot and his companions. The letters
read as follows: '
Camr on SoutH Bank AruwrmMt RivEr®, (Opposite Arab Settlement),
SEPTEMBER I8TH, 1887.
My DrEar Major. -You will, I am certain, be as glad to get news, definite
and clear, of our movements as I am to feel that I have at last an opportunity
of presenting them to you. As they will be of immense comfort to you and
your - assistants
and followers, I
shall confine my-
self to give you
the - needful de-
tails. We have
travelled 373706
English miles to
make only.: 103
geographical
miles of our east-
erly course. "Bhis
has" beens per-
formed in 83 days,
which gives us
four and
tenth miles per
day. We have
yet to make 130
geographical
miles, or a wind-
ing course;, of
perhaps . 230
English - miles,
which at 'the
same: rate sof
march -as)
erto, owe. cwill
f make in 55 days.
We started from Yambuya 389 souls, whites and blacks. We have now
333, of whom 56 are so sick that we are obliged to leave them behind: ns at
this: Arab camp of Ugarrowwa. We are 56 men short of the number with
which we left Yambuya. Of these, 30 men have died, four from poisoned arrow
wounds, six left in the bush or speared by the natives; 26 have deserted ex
route, thinking they would be able to follow a caravan of Manyuema which we
met following the river downwards. But this caravan, instead of going on,
CC
CUTTING A ROAD TO THE RIVER.
*
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 453
returned to this place, and our deserters, misled by this, will probably follow
our fracks downward, until they meet you, or be exterminated by the natives.
Be not deluded by any statements they may make. Should you meet them
you will have to secure them thoroughly. '
| FIGHTING THEIR WAY.
The first day we left you we made a good march, which terminated in a
fight, the foolish natives firing their own village as they fled. Since that day
we have had probably 30 fights. 'The first view of us the natives had inspired
them to show fight. As far as Panga Falls we did not lose a man or: meet
with any serious obstacles to navigation. Panga is a big cataract, with a de-
cided fall. We cut around it on the south bank and dragged our canoes and
went on again. f
We had intended to follow a native path which would take us toward our
destination with usual windings of the road. For ten days we searched for a
road, and then took an elephant track, which carried us into an interminable
forest totally uninhabited. Fearing to lose ourselves altogether, we cut a road
to the river, and have followed the river ever since. From the point whence
we struck the river to Mugwye's country, four days' journey below Panga, we
fared very well. Food was abundant; we made long marches, and no halts
whatever.. Beyond Mugwye's up to Engweddeh, was a wilderness, eleven days'
march, villages being inland and mostly foodless. From this date our strength
declined rapidly. People were lost in the bush, as they searched for food, or
were slain by the natives. Ulcers, dysentery, and grievous sickness, ending in
fatal debility, attacked the people. Hence our enormous loss since leaving
Panga, 30 dead and 26 deserters. Besides which we are obliged to leave
56 behind so used up that without a long rest they would also soon die. Of
the Somalis, one is dead (Achmet), the other five remain at this camp until our
return from the Lake (Albert). Of the Soudanese, one is dead, we leave three
behind to-day. All the whites are in perfect condition, thinnish, but with plenty
of go.
Among our fights we have had over 50 wounded, but they wall recovered
except four. Stairs was severely. wounded with an arrow, which penetrated an
inch and a half, within a little below the heart, in the left breast. He is all
right now. We have had one man shot dead by some person unknown in the
camp; another was shot in the foot, resulting in amputation. . This' latter case
in: a fair state of health. ... f
“ HEWING A PATH THROUGH THE FOREST.
The number of hours we have marched ought to have taken us back to.
you by this time, but we have had to daily hew our path through forest and
jungle to keep mMoug the river, because. the river banks were populated. The
forest inland contains no settlements that we know or have heard of. By means
of canoes we were able to help the caravan carry the sick and several loads.
'The boat helped us immensely. Were I to do the work over again I should
#
(PSP)
-
/ »
a “7? * 1" & 4¢ ___ 4 2. 24. 26 EX ee: y+) ogee 4G era 272 ca
7&5 M/Wéuflrmljé wa "4 -~ * X Ez t. 4 *
M o x 0/7” Hc Ic L.< éu’l/é 402} o DAhA -STDAMA
=~ Z Bay on 5 1:BA |LArE a ¢ # “A
43 49.441 @ 5 koro s
~ k *=
Qh i wa ua __ MA ID OF Vay BEndos |ptstRiGT §( f Early? \
A |z "~A. | " & nove a uw _, ist
<0 Q IAL AEF {s z 5
4\\\§ Eff C \ (JI) \_ AWA $ "l, 417K 2” ARP EL LIWUN K
\\ {héé A ¢ < GANANAH - N
<= syouthis rpitt5 of #2 L he ¢
& #; £, \/ Jp A o
‘ g- 0 3 € /¢./ a
SITANEXS AQNWEYR metre a 7% renumnefestar as
Heg{® , (s | "Ang § {},, SAMBU AW §
10 Kun C&A - ANDA éo % G04, o gf"
"Ae ' 5 Pla "C pe
~ aran, fe g & LAKE “I it!” ”2:13 ig!
s tht. ¢ <- (@AuNGO .x ? __| £34. EV a JUBA}
f SL JC. s aT" << | ~ - -
f A i \\\ & ad $5" > Y. ‘\\\\\\E s
"m VICcTORtA NYAbZA $ # ¢ 5 k
L.“ 80 n Tye Come "MTZENIA
/ ye «k NW" ¢ --' 3‘ AE 13k ;- -
¥4 9" vo ~ (‘W’M‘ [nil-4” # & "at 7% "“/\'\
Ins ~ hensyt ea
ll [my/W TA mr Pris CG
i we" Hi U a i* C f o--
© IS] «, «iitinc$ h , yw
<,, 0° rake ve es JKAM BAN ~ ~.
YA \IV¥2u - uvusanve < S-
$y ,, \Sozim a y U wip --= - "fn
47 hag p, yg __ 768, --->
5 Ag \ Cf memelt! x. a f =- -f- A
4 lRo |- a MOMBASSAP~ §
r a - A- -a
Le - [ 4 ow“ MAGASSI ”SAMBA S-- -- «]
W C= pP pemBa -- |z
G gueen® MTV" x a s )
| EMSHAZ ye AyEN 43°“. A '; -$ As [# e .a {|__ R
_C \ -%& C| W as -.‘ AN ZIBAR is N
IMB G he:
AL, ukimao] Yay , mak | | p $8 GB .. -
b
R
C KV KA
[k : ‘.~'1*... {is $5351 t Ame u\I////,§“-‘Twfi..\\\|v t 49-001. a"" wim 18" Nt My
1 & 4] & Tos AM Whig: yurt \\l"“""‘“fl‘° j WQ ”fl“ (
EYS ROU € s ESSAI “x" < ¢ ul _-_ &*
: Cls Fal * 24
T|KAVAIUN \ | ASDAR | e ee
216 ~- +B 2lg ¥ "Slo «£ __ 1} \| _ f f
, f STANLEY'S ROUTES,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 455
collect canoes as large as possible, man them with sufficient paddlers and load
up with goods and sick. On the river between Yambuya and Mugwye s country
the canoes are numerous and tolerably large. The misfortune is that the Zan-
zibaris are exceedingly poor boatmen. In my force there are only about 50
who can paddle or pull an oar, but even these have saved our caravan immense
labor and many lives which otherwise would have been sacrificed.
Our plan has been to paddle from one rapid to another; on reaching strong
water, or shoals, we have unloaded canoes and poled or dragged them up, with
long rattan or other creepers, through the rapids, then loaded up again and pur-
sued our way until we met another obstacle. 'The want of sufficient and proper
food regularly pulls people down very fast, and they have not that strength to
carry the loads which has distinguished them while with me in other parts of
Africa;
If Tipo 'Tib's people have not yet joined you I do not expect you will be
very far from Yambuya. You can make two journeys by river for one that
you can do on land. Slow as we have been coming up and cutting our way
through, I shall come down the river like lightning. 'The river will be a friend
indeed, for the current alone will take us twenty miles a day, and I will p1ck
up as many canoes as possible to help us for our second journey up the river.
Follow the river closely and do not lose sight of our track. When the caravan
which takes this passes you, look out for your men, or they will run (desert) in
a body, taking valuable goods with them.
I need not say that I wish you the best of health, and luck and good
fortune, because you are a part of myself.. Therefore Good by,
Yours very truly,
Major Barttelot. HExry M. STANLEY.
The second letter was written from Fort Bodo Ibwiri District, February
Iqth 1888. <
"My DEAR MAJOR After much deliberation with my officers upon the
expendlency of the act, I have resolved to send twenty couriers to you with this
letter, which I know W111 be welcome to you and your comrades, as the briefest
note or word from you would be to us.
Fort Bodo is 126 English miles from Kavalli, on the Albert N'yanza, or 77
hours of caravan marching (west) and is almost on the same latitude. It is
527 English miles almost direct east from Yambuya or 352 hours of caravan
marching.
After giving explicit directions as to the route Barttelot should take, and
the villages where food might be purchased, Stanley continues :
"'The object of this letter is not only to encourage and cheer you up with
definite and exact information of your whereabouts and the land before you,
but to also save you from a terrible wilderness whence we all narrowly escaped
with our lives. I wrote you from Ugarrowwa's a letter sufficiently detailed to
yee: HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. -
enable you to understand what our experience was between Yambuya and
Ugarrowwa's, therefore I begin from Ugarrowwa's and go east to the N'yanza.
"After leaving Ugarrowwa's on September 19th we had 286 souls with us,
and 56 sick at Ugarrowwa's, total, 341... By October. 6th, we' had travelled
along the south bank of the river amid a country depopulated and devastated
by Arabs; and our condition was such, from a constant pinching want, that we
had eight deaths and fifty-two sick, that is, sixty utterly used up in sixteen days.
I was forced to leave Captain Nelson, lamed by ulcers, and 52 sick and 82 loads
pes mee - -p -as:
* "tar . 2:
# f 4 fa P 2 HLL IRF *a "o DU /) J/ dt p uo
M ,r/// aly $ FHP z ' 42 anl? l by * //, z P4 " S ; E A } / o / up I 7A
hat / f /y Pa 2-27 6. 0B 49 # Cf f- . tip ably a /A f 4 f
r 2 y _ 6/54 7 7 z 7 2 ( M ‘ / 4 f ,
E f Z ZZZ E f f /N LM
P i * g 7 -
Jf: Mi , L9 < il sale
RZ 4/(“0/J/ t ly ) 1A®\
inp rss
NATIVES IN THE DISTRICT OF UGARROWWA's.
with him at a camp near the river, while we would explore ahead, find provi-
sions and send back relief.
"Until October 18th, we marched in the hope of obtaining food, and on this
day we entered a settlement of Manyuema, but in the interval we had travelled
through an uninhabited forest, where we lived on wild fruit and fungi.. In
these twelve days we had lost twenty-two by desertion and death, while the
condition of the survivors was terrible. f ae
"We were all emaciated and haggard, but the majority were mere skeletons.
On the 29th Nelson's party was relieved, but out of 52 there were only five
(LSP)
&
mess
c ~ -P-
BST
\
suus:
eter
0
ney Re Bii
SATISFYING A 1,ONG-REPRESSED HUNGER.
458 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
left. Many had died, many had. deserted, about 20 were out in the forest
foraging, out of which party only to ultimately turned up.
"On October 28 we marched from the Manyuema settlement to this place,
Ibwiri. Here we found such an abundance that we halted to recuperate until
November 24. The killing of a bullock immediately upon our
lowed by one of the wildest scenes that I ever beheld. Naked
153
\\ 3
S
Al
pst
/A
E"
fg_
MANYUEMA SOLDIER AND WIFE.
trated, consequently we suffered no scarcity, and on November
arrival was fol-
and starved the
men. fought
like: dogs for
every morse!
they could tear
from the
slaughtered ani-
mal. - On tms
day the ad-
vance column
mustered. as
follows: Sick
at Ugarrowwa's
(Arab settle-
ment), 56; sick
at -~Manyuema
settlement, 38;
presents in
Ibwiri,. tyd;
total:268. ~ Op
September - Ig
we numbered
341 ; November
24, 2168; dead
and missing, 73.
A SAD STORY OF
SUFFERING AND
DEATH.
"Beyond
THis" " place,
Ibwiri, no Arab
or - Manyuema
had ever pene-
24 we marched
from Ibwiri for the Albert Lake, which we reached December I 3, having lost only
one by death, result of wilderness miseries, and we returned to
this place from
the Lake Albert January 7th, having lost only four: two of whom died from
cause of wilderness miseries; one, Klamis Kaururu (chief) of inflammation of
the lungs, and one, Ramaguebin Kuru, of fever and ague contracted near the
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 456
iake. Thus between November 24th, and January 7th, we had lost but five ,
three of these deaths being a result of privations undergone in the wilderness.
"We first met the Manyuema on the first day of August, and parted from
them January 6.) In this interval we have lost 118 through death and deser-
tion.. In their camps it was as bad as in the wilderness, for they ground us
down by extortion so extreme that we were naked in a short time. They
tempted the Zanzibaris to sell their rifles and ammunition, ramrods, officers'
blankets, etc., and then gave food so sparingly that these crimes were of small
- ~._ ~
\\‘-\ : j
| \\'§\'\ >a~
Siga ,
se
Myla
I
apt
will
emmm
L
ict
MBH]
A
""""
.........
.........
wert" ' e 2
WARRIORS CHALLENGING STANLEY.
avail. Finally, besides starving them, tempting them to ruin the expedition, they
speared and scourged them and tied them up, until in one case death resulted.
"Never were such abject slaves to slaves as our people had become under
the imifluence of the Manyuema. - Yet withal they preferred death by spearing,
scourging, starvation, ill-treatment, to the duty of load-bearing and marching
on to happier regions. Out of 38 men left at the Manyuema camp 11 have
died, 11 others may turn up, but it is doubtful. However, we have only re-
ccived 16; 16 out of 38. Comment is unnecessary. '
#
460 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
"When we left the Manyuema camp, October 28, we were obliged to leave
our boat and 70 loads behind, as it was absolutely 1mposs1ble to carry them:
Parke and Nelson were detalled to look after them. We hoped that we should
find some tree out of which we could make a sizable canoe, or buy or seize
one already made. But arriving at Albert Lake we found neither tree nor
canoe, therefore were obliged to retrace our steps here quickly to send men
back to the Manyuema settlement for the boat and loads. 'The boat and 37
loads were brought here by Stairs and nearly 100 men day before yesterday.
ANXIETIES. _ f
“You will understand, then, that Emin Pasha not being found or relieved
by us, made it as much necessary that we should devote ourselves to this
work, as it was iniperative when we) set ont June 28, 1887, from Yambuya
And you will also understand how anxious we all are about you. We dread
your inexperience, and your want of influence with. your people. If with me
people preferred the society of the Manynema blackgnuards to me, who are
known to them for twenty years, how much more so with you, a stranger to
them and their language. Therefore, the cords of anxiety were strained to an
exceeding tension. I am pulled east to Emin Pasha and west to you, your
comrades, people and goods.
“Nearly eight months have elapsed, and perhaps you have not had a word
from us, though L wrote a long letter from Ugarrowwa's, We were to have
been back in December; it is now February, and no one can conjecture how
far. you may have reached.. Did the arrive in due time? Did she
ariive at all" Did Tipo Tib join you?: Ate you aloue with your party, of is
Tipo Tib with you? - If the latter, why so slow that we have not a word? - If
alone, we understand that you are very far from us. 'These are questions daily
agitating us. ®
"According to my calculations we shall, be on the Lake Aprll 0. . All
about Emin Pasha will be settled by April 25; on the 13th of May we shall
be back here, and on the 29th we shall be at Ugarrowwa's, if we have not met
you. . We shall surely, I hope, meet with the return messengers. 'These mes-
_sengers, whom I send to you with a reward of $50.00 each for the safe delivery. .
into your hands of this letter I advise you to retain, two of them as gnides-
Rugu and Ruga-in front, but they should be free of loads. Send the 18 and
two others 'back to me as Sloan as you can, because the sooner we hear from
you the sooner we will join hands ; and after settling the Emin Pasha question
we shall have only one anxiety, Wthh will be to get you safely up here.
'' Assuming that Tipo Tib's people are with you, onur guides (two) will
bring you quickly on here, and we shall probably meet here or at Ugarrowwa's.
You have arrived at some station on our former journeys from Yambuya, below
Mugwyes, as I take it. - Hence, before you get near the Arab influence, where
your column will surely break np if you are alone, I otder you to go to the
nearest place (Mugwyes, Aveysheba, or Nepoka Confluence) that is to you,
HEROES OF -THE DARK: CONTINENT. 461
and there to build a strong camp and wait us; but whatever you decide upon
let us know. If you come near Ugarrowwa's you will lose men, rifles, powder,
everything of value; your own boys will betray you, because they will sell
food so dearly that your people, from stress of hunger, will steal everything.
"At either of these places above you will get safety and food until we relieve
you. So long as you are stationary, there is no fear of desertion, but the daily
task, added to constant insufficiency of food, will sap the fidelity of your. best men.
" With everybody's best wishes to you, I send my earnest prayer that you
are, despite all unwholesome and evil conjectures, where you ought to be, and
that this letter will reach you in time to save you from that forest misery and
from the fangs of the ruthless Manyuema blackguards. 'To every one of
your officers, also these good wishes are given, from i
'* Yours- most sincerely,
"Henry M. SranuEy.
£/BFo Major Barttelot, Commanding Rear Column."
CHAPTER XXIV.
STANLEY'S DESCRIPTION OF HIS JOURNEY.
? NDER the most favorable auspices and conditions a journey through
Central Africa is attended by perils and hardships which only
the most persistent, courageous and strong-constitutioned trav-
eller can endure. But in the march now before us, so graphically
A| described by Stanley's own pen, the privations and dangers were
i accentuated by many obstacles rarely met with even in that
savage region. The territory which lay between Yambuya and
pres Albert Lake, a distance of three hundred and sixty miles, was
__ totally unexplored. No white man's foot had ever passed over
any part of it; there was no highway marked even by the feet of wild animals,
while traditions of tribes between, and of Tipo 'Tib, peopled that region of
darkness with the most surprising forms of both human and animal life. The
journey must be made along the southern line of a country that has been
dreaded for ages, because around it has always clustered the most fright-inspiring
stories ever told by the tongue of ignorant and superstitious man.
WONDERFUL SUPERSTITIONS.
On the northern borders of this unexplored region is the city of Bornu,
already described in an early chapter of this book. 'The town is said to take its
name from the ship of Noah, called Pwrzz by the Mohammedans of the place,
having landed at the spot on which the town is built. To the east of Bornu is
said to be a town called Futa, which it is alleged was founded by Phut, the
grandson of Noah, and from whom it is believed the Fellahs are descended.
This much of Bible history is preserved connecting the people of that so little
known region with civilization. But south and south-east of Futa the wildest
fancies and beliefs run riot, because it has long been maintained that no one
dare venture therein. 'The Moors and Arabs entertain the most astonishing
conceits and traditions respecting the inhabitants of that so-called cursed country.
They declare that somewhere on the other side of Yakoba is a tribe of people
called Alakere, none of whom are more than three feet in height. 'The chiefs,
they say, are somewhat taller than the common people. 'The Alakere are said
to be a vety ingenions~ people, especially in working iron, and they are, so
industrious that their towns are believed to be built on high hills surrounded
by iron walls.
~ MEN WITH TAILS AND FOUR EYES.
Another tribe living near the Alakere are the Alabiru,, who it 'is declared
have inflexible tails about six inches in length. As the stiffness of their tails
prevents the Alabiru from sitting flat on the ground, each person carries a sharp-
| (462)
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 463
pointed stick with which to drill a hole in the earth to receive the tail when
sitting. 'They are also said to be industrious manufacturers of iron bars out of
which the fine swords of the Soudan are believed to be made. Another adjoin-
ing tribe, called the Alabiwoe, it is alleged, are distinguishable by having a
small goat-like horn growing from the middle of the forehead. It is said that
a woman of this tribe was captured and held a long while in slavery by an
Arab in Offa, near Ilorrin. She seemed to be ashamed of her horn and always
wore a handkerchief around her head to conceal it.
'There are said to be many other strange people in this " Doko "region,
some of whom it is declared have four eyes, others who possess such extraordimary
&
make . use . of - 2
s tty "All
one to lie upon, \y "al
like a blanket, |
fud the other |
as a covering
for the body.
Some live : in
trees and others
in. su bterra-
nean galleries, 2
but 'all alike E
are represented
as being won-
derfully . cour-
ageous. and
ferocious, while
not a few pos- E _
sess such a Pap E
knowledge of |f
the black art @
that, to their J =
ferocity they Gees
add the power NATIVES OF THE TOWN OF FUTA.
of torturing victims without even touching them. The dwarfs, most of whom
AAF 1s believed, wear long beards and sharpen their teeth like the Fan Cann
balss, 'are very vindictive and cruel, guarding their kingdom with the greatest
jealousy and visiting inconceivably terrible punishments upon all who invade
their territory. It will be remembered that Kabba Rega gave Stanley, on his
second expedition into Central Africa, surprising descriptions of these much
dreaded manikins, and fully indicated the great fear in which they are held.
To the superstitions here mentioned, which are current throughout a greater
part of Africa, and which made Stanley's men so reluctant to enter this proscribed
464 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
/
and horror-associated country, another trouble quite as serious was encountered
by Stanley in Tipo Tib's refusal to supply the armed escort that he had promised
under coutract. Thus was Stanley forced to use his own resources, consisting
largely of persuasion and moral influence, to induce his column to continue an
advance towards:-the Albert Lake, and that He succeeded is another proof of his
wonderful power over the ignorant natives and his extraordinary abilities as a
commander in the most direful exigencies. His own story as herewith given is
as exciting in the detail of facts as it is modest in tone and description.
BUNGANGETA ISLAND, [TURL OR ARUWIMI RIVER,
August 28, 1888. '
To the Chairman of the Emin Pasha Relief Committee.
short dispatch briefly announcing that we had placed the first
instalment of relief in the hands of Emin Pasha on the Albert N'yanza was sent
| sss to you by couriers from Stan-
fha --- -- ley Falls, along with letters to
-- Tipo Tib, the Arab governor
of that «district, on the. 17th
inst., within three hours of our
meeting with the-rear column
of the' expedition.. I propose
f to relate to you- the story.: of
__ "J“ F pM & IC 3 our movements since June 28,
alles, rms L <2. I had established an en-
f Gin? figgwfi 4 trenched and ‘ palisaded camp
&%\\vfiw B An Aba ‘ tw. ---. at. YeOLmbu’ya, -on the Lower
Sxy > ' Aruwimi, just 'below the first
yao rapids. Major Edmund Bart-
Py Cp
.- G § " ‘ ,‘:I\\:T-\ Can C /}/ A | [ )'\’: e R (ge ‘\, r! $
w‘: N mt}, YT . =z ‘s Ml him“ As s W!
8 p y. iv? MAD 2% T A Qfiiwg‘préfi‘wqut“ 11, ‘n &
j fin k “a!” 1L? 1m, “A X1
telot, 'being senior -of those
3 officers with me, was appointed
commandant. Mr. J. S.:Jamie-
~ ===, ne son, a volunteer, was associat-
soy, ater mee. 38 ed with him. On the arrival
Ehsan INQQQ‘ ia a on s of all men and goods from
| AN ALAKERE VILLAGE. Bolobo and Stanley Pool, the
officers still believed Messrs. Troup, Ward and Bonny were to report to Major
Barttelot for duty. But fo important action or movement (according to the
letter of instructions given by me to the Major before leaving) was to be made
without consulting with Messrs. Jamieson, Troup and Ward. 'The columns
under Major Barttelot's orders mustered 2 57 mell. f ‘
As I requested the Major to send you a copy of the instructions issued
to each officer, you are doubtless aware that the Major was to remain at Yam-
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 465
buya until the arrival of the steamer from Stanley Pool with the officers, men
and goods left behind; and, if Tipo Tib's promised contingent of carriers had
in the mean time arrived, he was to march his column and follow our track,
which, so long as it traversed the forest region, would be known by the blazing
of -the trees; by -our camps and etc.. 'H Tipo Tib's: carriers did. no.
arrive, then if he (the Major) preferred moving on to staying at Yambuya, he
A; e fe AX reap \1\!\ e \:\\ c
\W§§ es S. Apt §§:
¥} a_ "§§ Sy (Ag ML \\ se
Ar: (K API SNC \\
s 4
S/ feS)h
Xt
11/7]. ll, 4 ~
Pe
I"}
«*'
,
M
| WWW“
, --" mm A22 a=
me 6 Gee % c R *" . ake
s, A900 *rraa i> t+ s Q??? vim. 4 D\ A
- 5 5 * bo- ama an year ang us L yea aa ~-- # < hom «~ _,__..‘:-—-‘ <
wo * M hal > oar wre & ar I”, f zm n_." "> «& I fiw‘ M ~.\k€:\-=’— o rolics, nisin , mme
‘ P* inst w‘fi'l ""R, . f N a A J {-* _ nur Tes panies
" 5 * hocaicall ke! Tun tims s = ao n ng one a _j mag-» Song & e a
dG k Afan. TL sean. C_. e tt aas. " aas e e_" aio ** “fr“~\—<* s ”I
. P __ ze me merous ins cos cota Sini (4 ae, %
SHARPENING THE TEETH.
making double and triple journeys by short stages, until I should come down
from the N'yanza and relieve him. 'The instructions were explicit and, as the
officers admitted, intelligible.
FIRST CONFLICT WITH THE NATIVES.
The advance column, consisting of 389 officers and men, set out from
Yambuya June 28, 1887. The first day we followed the river bank, marched
twelve miles, and arrived in the large district of Yankondé. At our approach
the natives set fire to their villages, and under cover of the smoke attacked the
30
466 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
pioneers who were clearing the numerous obstructions they had planted before
the first village. 'The skirmish lasted fifteen minutes. The second day we fol-
lowed a path leading inland but trending east. . We followed this path for five
days through a dense population. Every art known to native minds for molest-
ing, impeding and wounding an enemy was resorted to; but we passed through
without the loss of a man. Perceiving that the path was taking us too far from
our course, we cut a north-easterly track, and reached the river again on the 5th
of July. From this date until the 18th of October we followed the left bank
of the Aruwimi. After seventeen days' continuous marching we halted one day
Mt
ilk
VC
1
s
Wet
Ewen
CROSSING A SMALL AFFLUENT OF THE ARUWIMI.
for rest. On the twenty-fourth day from Yambuya we lost two men by deser-
tion. In the month of July we made four halts orly. On the Ist day of
August the first death occurred, which was from dysentery ; so that for thirty-
four days our course had been singularly successful. But as we now entered a
wilderness, which occupied us nine days in marching through it, our sufferings
began to multiply, and several deaths occurred. 'The river at this time was of
great use to us; our boat and several canoes relieved the wearied and sick
of their loads, so that progress, though not brilliant as during the first month,
was still steady. - ‘
On the 13th of August we arrived at Air-Sibba. 'The natives made a bold
front; we lost five men through poisoned arrows; and to our great grief, Lieu-
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 407
tenant Stairs was wounded just below the heart; but though he suffered greatly
for nearly a month, he finally recovered. On the Is5th Mr. Jephson, in com-
mand of the land party, led his men inland, became confused and lost his way.
We were not"renunited-until the 3 1st.
On the 25th of August -we arrived in the district of Air-jeli. Opposite our
camp was the mouth of the tributary Nepoko; and on the 31st of August we
met for the first time a party of Manyuema belonging to the caravan of Ugar-
rowwa, alias Uledi Balyuz, who turned out to be a former tent-boy of Speke's.
Our misfortunes began from this date, for I had taken the Congo route to avoid
~Arabs, that they might not tamper Wlth my men and tempt them to desert by
their presents, yet twenty-six men .
deserted within three days of this
unfortunate meeting.
On the 16th of- September: we
arfived at a camp opposite the
station at Ugarrowwa's. - As food
was very scarce, owing to his having
devastated an immense region, we
halted but one day near him. Such
friendly terms as I could make with
such a man I made, and left fifty-
six men with him. All the Somalis
preferred to rest at Ugarrowwa's
to the continuous marching. Five
Soudanese were also left. It would
have been certain death for all of
them .to have. accompanled us. At
[Ugarrowwa§ they might possibly [: ; ”gar WV 58
recover." Five dollars a monthiper 1," ~~," | 4m © AP wwf (
head was to be paid to th1s man |/, A
for thelr food.
THE DEATH MARCH.
~On September 18th we left aro
Ugarrowwa's, and on the 18th of __ ON THE ROAD TO KILINGA-LONGA'S
October entered the settlement occupied by Kilinga-Longa, a Zanzibari slave
belonging to Abedbin Salim, an old Arab whose bloody deeds are recorded in -
"The Congo and the Founding of its Free State." 'This proved an awful month
to us; not one member of the expedition, white or black, will ever forget it. 'The
advance numbered 273 souls on leaving Ugarrowwa's, because out of 389 men we
had lost sixty-six by desertion and death between Yambuya and Ugarrowwa's, and
had left fifty-six men sick in the Arab station. On reaching Kilinga-Longa's we
discovered we had lost fifty-five men by starvation and desertion. We had lived
principally on wild fruit, fungi, and a large, flat, bean-shaped nut. 'The slaves
468 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
of Abedbin Salim did their utmost to ruin the expedition, short of open hos-
tilities; they purchased rifles, ammunition, clothing, so that when we left their
station we were beggared and our men were absolutely naked.. We were so weak
physically that we were unable to carry the boat and about seventy loads of
goods; we therefore left these goods and boat at Kilinga-Longa's under Surgeon
Parke and Captain Nelson, the latter of whom was unable to march, and after
twelve days' journey we arrived at a native settlement called Ibwiri. Between
Kilinga-Longa's and Ibwiri our condition had not improved. 'The Arab devas-
N
s/ 220 iid j Coene d t
Tor $44 Nimi q +e. Z
A MEAL, IN 'THE, WILDERNESS.
tation had reached within a few miles of Ibwiri-a devastation so complete that
there was not one native hut standing between Ugarrowwa's and bwiri; and
what had not been destroyed by the slaves of Ugarrowwa and Abedbin Salim
the elephants destroyed, and turned the whole region into a horrible wilderness.
But at Ibwiri we were beyond the utmost reach of the destroyers ; we were on
virgin soil, in a populous region abounding with food. Our suffering from
hunger, which began on the 31st of August, terminated on the 12th of November.
Ourselves and men were skeletons. Out of 389 we now only numbered 147,
&
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 469
but
several of whom seemed to have no hope of life left. A halt was therefore
ordered for the people to recuperate. Hitherto our people were sceptical of what
we told them; the suffering has been so awful, calamities so numerous, the
forest so endless apparently, that they refused to believe that by-and-by we should
see plains and cattle and the N'yanza and the white man, Emin Pasha. We
felt as though we were dragging them along with a chain round our necks.
"Beyond these raiders lies a country untouched, where food is abundant and
where you will forget your miseries; so, cheer up, boys; be men, press on a
base
HUTS OF IBWiRI VILLAGERS.
little faster." They turned a deaf ear to our prayers and entreaties, for, driven
by hunger and suffering, they sold their rifles and equipments for a few ears
of Indian corn, deserted with the ammunition, and were altogether demoralized.
Perceiving that prayers and entreaties and mild punishments were of no avail,
I then resolved to visit upon the wretches the death penalty. Two of the worst
cases were accordingly taken and hung in presence of all, and others were whipped.
& FOOD AT LAST.
We halted thirteen days in Ibwiri, and revelled on fowls, goats, bananas,
corn, sweet potatoes, yams, beans, etc. 'The supplies were inexhaustible, and
470 _ .~ HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
the people glutted themselves; the effect was such that I had I72-one was
killed by an arrow-mostly sleek and robust men, when I set out for the Albert
N'yanza on the 24th of November. We were still 125 miles from the lake ;
but, given food, such a distance seemed nothing. ay -_
On the 1st of December we sighted the open country from the top of a ridge
connected with Mount Pisgah, so named from our first view of the land of
promise and plenty. On the 5th of December we emerged upon the plains, and -
the deadly, gloomy forest was behind us. After 160 days' continuous gloom
mtare % r n s > p r r wa R
s Cece m ive pean anion omnes e...... nomen cone ences. onne notes Raie a Sean . cants _
|
a>
12,28.
Mm,“
Sole, P; ¢?
"".. & ‘,L-‘I'—/r;. = fix J *. Ca
pt ~—,/.,/ //n\l/,// gs -—“: t>
\$Yy , seme Seo K N
2 ~Supe. grugifi-AL54; "Alli p T ~s A ete rat- *, e
WHIPPING AN INSUBORDINATE.
we saw the light of broad day shining all around us and making all things
beautiful. We thought we had never seen grass so green, or country so lovely.
The men literally yelled and leaped for joy, and raced over the ground with
their burdens. Ah, this was the old spirit of former expeditions successfully
completed all of a sudden revived.
Woe betide the native aggressor we may meet, however powerful he may
be; with such a spirit the men will fling themselves like wolves on sheep.
Numbers will not be considered. It had been the eternal forest that had made _
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.. A71
them abject, slavish creatures, so brutally plundered by Arab slaves at Kilinga-
Longa's.
On the oth we came to the country of the powerful chief Mazamboni. The
villages were scattered over a great extent of country so thickly that there was
106 'Other road except through their villages or fields. From a long distance
the natives had sighted us, and were prepared. We seized a hill, as soon as we
arrived, in the centre of a mass of villages, about 4 P. M. on the oth of December,
and occupied it, building a zariba as fast as bill-hooks could cut brushwood.
The war cries were terrible from hill to hill; they were sent pealing across the
intervening — manpage =
valleys; 'the |
people gathered
by hundreds
from every
pornt; war-
h«orns- a nd
drums a n-
nounced that a
struggle was
about fo take
pigee. Such
natives as were
too bold we
checked with [=
but little effort, (2
and a slight
skirmish ended P
in our captur-
ing a cow, the &
first beef tasted &
since we- left
the ocean. The
niglit passed [ mE
pCacc fi' Y , PURCHASING A SIGHT OF KING MAZAMBONI
both sides preparing for the morrow. On the morning of the 10th we attempted
to open negotiations. 'The natives were anxious to know who we were, and
we were anxious to glean news of the land that threatened to ruin the expe-
dition. Hours were passed talking, both parties keeping a respectable distance
apart. The natives said they were subject to Uganda; but that Kabba Rega
was their real king, Mazamboni holding the country for Kabba Rega. 'They
finally accepted cloth and brass rods to show their King Mazamboni, and his
answer was to be given next day. In the mean time all hostilities were to be
suspended.
472 _ HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
THE WAR SLOGANS.
The morning of the rith dawned, and at 3 4, M. we were startled at hearing
a man proclaiming that it was Mazamboni's wish that we should be driven back
from the land. 'The proclamation was received by the valley around our neigh-
borhood with deafening cries.. Their word " kanwaua" signifies to make peace,
"kurwana" signifies war. We were therefore in doubt, or rather we hoped we
had heard wrongly. We sent an interpreter a little mearer to ask if it was
kanwana or kurwana. Kurwana, they responded, and to emphasize the term two
arrows were shot at him, which dissipated all doubt. Our hill stood between a
lofty range of hills and a
lower range. On one side of
us was a narrow valley 250
yards wide; on the other side
the valley was three miles
/ wide. East and west of us
the valley broadened into an
extensive plain.. The higher
range of hills was lined with
hundreds preparing to de-
scend ; - the broader valley
was already mustering its
hundreds. 'There was no time
to lose. A body of forty men
were sent, under Lieutenant
Stairs, to attack the broader
valley. Mr. Jephson was sent
with thirty men east; a choice
body of sharpshooters was
sent - to - test the- conrage. of
those descending the slope
of the highest range. Stairs
crossed on, passed a deep and
narrow river in the face of
% 8 hundreds of natives, and as-
ASCENDING A HILL OVERLOOKING THE ALBERT N'YANZA. saulted the first Village and
took it. The sharpshooters did their work effectively, and drove the descending
natives rapidly up the slope until it became a general flight. Meanjcime, Mr.
Jephson was not idle. He marched straight up the valley east, driving the
people back, and taking their villages as he went. By 3 P. M. there was not' a
native visible anywhere, except on one small hill about a mile and a half
west of us. ' f '
On the morning of the 12th we continued our march; during the day we
had four little fights On the 13th we marched straight east; attacked by new
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. a73
forces every hour until noon, but these we successfully overcame; then we
halted for refreshments.
A SIGHT OF THE N'YANZA.
At 1 P. M. we resumed our march in a driving rain storm up a steep hill.
Fifteen minutes later I cried out "Prepare yourselves for a sight of the N'yanza."
The men murmured and doubted, and said, "Why does the master continually
talk to us in this way. N'yanza, indeed; is not this a plain and can we not
see mountains at least four days' march ahead of us." At 1.30 P. M. the Albert
N'yanza was below them. Now it was my turn to jeer and scoff at the doubters,
but as I was about to ask them what they saw, so many came to kiss my
r.’ 11} \
VT o ; : a . ¢ s 4% « -g "fr:— ' se 002 C "J: Nea 4 _ % f Xi’.’ - 3 aA
) (peesl
f K/€5\x\x
PA 4
*P.tm. ~ . *
NATIVES FORBIDDING A PASSAGE THROUGH THEIR DISTRICT.
hands and beg my pardon that I could not say a word. 'This was my reward.
The mountains, they said, were the mountains of Unyoro, or rather its lofty
plateau wall. Kavalli, the objective point of the expedition, was six miles from
us as the crow flies. |
We were at an altitude of 5,200 feet above the sea. 'The Albert N'yanza
was over 2,900 feet, below us. .We stood in 1 deg. 20 min. N. lat.; the south
end of the N'yanza lay largely mapped about six miles south of this position.
Right across to the eastern shore every dent in its low flat shore was visible,
474 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
and traced like a silver snake on the dark ground was the tributary Simliki,
flowing into the Albert from the south-west. :
After a short halt to enjoy the prospect we commenced the rugged and
stony descent. - Before the rear-guard had descended too feet, the natives of the
plateau we had just left poured after them. Had they shown as much cour
age and perseverance on the plain as they now exhibited, we might have been
seriously delayed. 'The rearguard was kept very busy until within a few hun-
dred feet of the N'yanza plain. We camped at the foot of the plateau wall, the
aneroids reading 2,500 feet above sea-level. A night attack was made on us,
but our sentries sufficed to drive these natives away.
Wooly
12m . }."
ARGUING WITH A CHIEF FOR THE RIGHT OF WAV. ;
At 9 a. M. on the 14th we approached the village of Kakongo, situate at
the south-west corner of the Albert Lake.". Three hours were spent by us at:
tempting to make friends. We signally failed. T hey would not allow us to go
to the lake, because we might frighten their cattle. They would not exchange -
blood-brotherhood with us, because they never heard of any good people coming
from the west side of the lake. 'They would not accept any presents from us,
because they did not know who we were. ' They would not give us water to
drink, and they would not show us our road up to Nyam Sassic. But from
these singular people we learnt that they had heard there was a white man at
Unyoro, but they had never heard of any white men being on the west side, nor
had they seen any steamers on the lake. 'There were no canoes to be had,
except such as would hold the men, etc.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 475
RETREAT BACK TO IBWIRL
There was no excuse for quarrelling; the people were civil enough, but
they did not want us near them. We therefore were shown the path and fol-
lowed it a few miles, when we camped about half a mile from the lake. - We
began to consider our position, by the light thrown upon it by the conversation
with the Kakongo natives. My couriers from Zanzibar had evidently not.
arrived, or, I presume, Emin Pasha with his two steamers would have paid the
south-west side of the lake a visit to prepare the natives for our coming. My
boat was at Kilinga-Longa's 190 miles distant. 'There was no canoe obtainable,
and to seize a canoe without the excuse of a quarrel my conscience would not
permit. 'There was no tree anywhere of the size to make canoes. Wadelai was a
terrible distance off for an expedition so reduced as ours. We had used five
cases of cartridges in five days' fighting on the plain. A month of such fight-
ing must ex- p ns onc a
haust our stock.
There was no
ye
l, 7 Re -- m
‘ )
/4((‘(\ \\ N \ (lik 7
plan suggested M mutt ly,
which seemed A/ If . if \ vas
feasible to me, .,’,; ”Kg/7,396 Met MW wo NW
except that: of / , {ff/W/fili/ffl; Huun, gs. mat wor LH GM? s
retreating to Ib- B& BSO | aya, 82 A a Mi i iid. fl/
wiri, build a fort, , uo mi el te 0 /p 1 | .T
send a party back
to -Kilinga-Lon- t Svce. |
ga's for our boat, ==--. \f Aae , iyo -- &= =
store up every
load in the fort
not conveyable, ' & - |
leave a garrison f ‘ VILLAGE OF UGARROWWA.
in the fort to hold it, and raise corn for us; march back again to Like Albert,
and send the boat to search for Emin Pasha. 'This was the plan which, after
lengthy discussions with my officers, I resolved upon. ~
On the 15th we marched to the site of Kavalli, on the west side of the lake.
Kavalli had years ago been destroyed. At 4 P. M. the Kakongo natives had
followed us and shot several arrows into our bivouac, and disappeared as
quickly as they came. At 6 P. M. we began a night march, and by to A. M. of the
16th we gained the crest of the plateau once more, Kakongo natives having
persisted in following us up the slope of the plateau. We had one man killed
and one wounded. §
By January 7th we were in Ibwiri once again and after a few days' rest
Lieutenant Stairs and a hundred men were sent to Kilinga-Longa's to bring the
boat and goods up, also Surgeon Parke and Captain Nelson. ~Out of 38 sick in
charge of the officers only 11 were brought to the fort, the rest had died or
476 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
deserted. On the return of Stairs with the boat and goods he was sent to Ugar-
rowwa's to bring up the convalescents there. I granted him 309 days' grace. -
Soon after his departure I was attacked with gastritis and an abscess on the
arm, but after a month's careful nursing by Dr. Parke I recovered, and 47 days
having expired I set out again for the Albert N'yanza, April 2d, accompanied by
Messrs. Jephson and Parke. Captain Nelson, now recovered, was appointed com-
mandant of Fort Bodo in our absence with a garrison of 43 men and boys.
A LETTER PROM EMIN.
On April 26th we arrived in Mazamboni's country once again, but this
time after solicitation Mazamboni decided to make blood-brotherhood with me.
Though I-had-so-rifles less with me on this second visit, the example of
Mazamboni was followed by all the other chiefs as far as the N'yanza, and
every difficulty seemed removed. Food was supplied gratis; cattle, sheep,
goats, and fowls, were also given 'in such abundance that our people lived
royally. One day's march from the N'yanza the natives came from Kavalli
and said that a white man named " Malejji" had given their chief a black
packet to give tome, his sour Would L: follow them? " Yes to-morrow," I
answered, " and if your words are true I will make you -fich." '
They remained with us that night, telling us wonderful stories about 'big
ships as large as islands filled with men," etc., which left no- doubt: in our
minds that this white man was Emin Pasha. . The next day's march brought
tg the chief. Kavalli, and 'after a wiule he handed me a note from Emin Pasha,
covered with. a strip over black, American oiléloth. - The note: was to the effect
"that as there had been a native rumor to the effect that a white man- had
been seen at the.south end of the lake, he had gone in his steamer to: make
inquiries, but had been unable to obtain reliable information, as the natives
were terribly afraid of Kabba Rega, King of Unyoro, and connected. every
stranger with "him. - However, the wife of the Nyamsassie chief had told a
native ally of his named Mogo that she had seen us in Mrusuma (Mazamboni's
coulitty), "He therefore begoed me to remain where I was itntil he could com-
unicate with me. 'The note was signed " (Dr.) Emin," and dated March 26.
The next day, April 23d, Mr. Jephson was dispatched with a strong force
of men to take the boat to the N'yanza. On the 26th the boat's crew sighted Msaw
station, the (southernmost belonging to Emin Pasha, and Mr. Jephson was
there hospitably received by the Egyptian garrison. The boat's crew say that
they were embraced one by one, and that they never had such attention shown
to them as by these men, who hailed them as brothers.
MEETING WITH EMIN.
On the 29th of April we once again reached the bivouac ground occupied
by us on the 16th of December, and at 5 P. M. of that day I saw the Khedive
steamer about seven miles away steaming up towards us. Soon after 7 p. m.
Emin Pasha and Signor Casati and Mr. Jephson arrived at our camp, where
they were heartily welcomed by all of us. ‘
HEROES OF 'THE DARK CONTINEN'TE. 477
The next day we moved to a better camping place, about three miles above
Nyamsassie, and at this spot Emin Pasha also made his camp; we were to-
gether until the 25th of May. On that day I left him, leaving Mr. Jephson,
three Soudanese, and two Zanzibaris in his care, and in return he caused to
accompany me three of his irregulars and 102 Mahdi natives as porters.
Fourteen days later I was at Fort Bodo. At the fort were Captain Nelson
and Licutenant Stairs. The latter had refurued from Ugarrowwa's 32 days
aiter I had set out..for the . lake, April 3; bringing with him, alas, only 16
men out of 56. - All Fe -- ~ = ' ©
the rest were dead. ‘
My 20 couriers whom
I chad sent with let- 5
ters to Major Bart- E
telot, had safely left E
Uigarrowwa's for
Yambuya on March F
16th:o
Fort Bodo was
in a flourishing state. R '
Nearly ten acres were If
under-cultivation.
One crop of Indian R
corn had been har- R
vested, and' was 'in
'thegranaries ; they
had just commenced
planting again. R
-On the 16th of E
June I left Fort Bodo &
with 111 Zanzibaris §§
and ror of Emin #K Spe x ts, s
Pasha's people. cas // s 7/22}?
Lem tenant Stairs f ap P f
had 'been appointed RW §§F§§>
P ate ws a AB
A\ a \ # k s fed'u“ fifi
aes 3 wes
f \\L Q \ §§Q§‘\\7zfyé/® \ s TAA
; AXS Sai aa ~~ Maas -i It]) sttm niet \ B} N20; .-
commandant O the 3 l i
fort, Nelson second NATIVES OF THE FORT BODO DISTRICT.
in command, and Surgeon Parke medical officer. 'The garrison consisted of 59
rifles. I had thus deprived myself of all my officers in order that I should
not be encumbered with provisions and medicines, which would have to be taken
if accompanied by Europeans, and every carrier was necessary for the vast stores
left with Major Barttelot. On the 24th of June we reached Kilinga-Longa's,
and July 19th Ugarrowwa's. 'The latter station was deserted. Ugarrowwa, hav-
ing gathered as much ivory as he could obtain from that district, had proceeded
mere 33???
SJS
% >
ie»
+27 a
P
{MeS:
\:
st
MARCHING INTO BANALYA.
fl
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 479
down river about three months ~before.= On leaving Fort Bodo I had loaded
every carrier with about 60 pounds of - corn, so that we had been able to pass
through the wilderness unscathed.
Passing on down river as fast as we could go, daily expecting to meet the
couriers, who, had been stimulated to exert them§gelves for a reward of $50 per
head, or the Major himself leading an army of carriers, we indulged ourselves in
these pleasing anticipations as we neared the goal. -
, sap NEWS.
On the 10th of August we overtook Ugarrowwa with an immense flotilla of
57 canoes, and, to our wonder, our couriers, now reduced to 17. They related
an awful story of hair-breadth escapes and tragic scenes. Three of their number
had been slain, two were still feeble from their wounds, all except five bore on
their bodies the scars of arrow wounds.
~A*INX week later, on August 17, the rear column 'of. the expedition at a"
place called Banalya, or, as the Arabs have corrupted it, Unarya.. 'There was a
white man at the gate of the stockade whom I at first thought was Mr. Jamie-
son, but.a nearer view revealed the features of Mr. Bonny, who left the medical
service of the army to accompany us. __
"well, my dear Bonny, where is the Major ?." .
"He is dead, sir; shot by the Manyuema about a month ago."
'"'Good God-and Mr. Jamieson? " f
"He has gone to Stanley Falls to try and get some more men from 'Tippoo
f f
'And Mr. Troup?" ~
«Mr. Troup has gone home, sir, invalided." .
" Hem-well, where is Ward?"
"M+. Ward. is at Bangala, sit."
_" Heavens alive-then you are the only one here!"
pty Yes, sit." ~ |
f A DEPLORABLE SITUATION. |
I found the rear column a. terrible wreck. Out of 257. men there were
only 71 remaining. Out of 71 only 52, on mustering them, seemed fit for
service, and these mostly were scarecrows. 'The advance had performed
the march from Yambuya to Banalya in 16 days, despite native opposition.
The rear column performed the same distance in 43 days. According to Mr.
Bonuy, during the 13 . months and' 20-days~ that- had:-elapsed since I had left
Yambuya, the record is only of disaster, desertion, and death. I have not the
-' heart to go into the details, many of which are incredible, and, indeed, I have
rot the time, for, excepting Mr. Bonny, I have no one to assist me in re-organ-
izing the expedition. ~ There are still far more loads than.I-can. carry, at. the
same time articles needful are missing. For instance, I left Yumbuya with
only a short campaigning kit, leaving my reserve of clothing and personal effects
in charge of the officers. In December some deserters from the advance column
480 _- HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
reached Yambuya to spread the report that I was dead. 'They had no papers
with them, but the officers seemed to accept the report of these deserters as a
fact, and in January Mr. Ward, at an officers' mess meeting, proposed that my
instructions should be cancelled. The only one who appears to have dissented
was. Mr. Bouny. Accordingly, my personal kit, medicines, soap, candles, and
provisions were sent down the Congo as " superfluities." Thus, after making this
immense personal sacrifice to relieve them and cheer them up, I find myself naked
and deprived of even the necessaries of life in Africa. But, strange to say, they
have kept two hats and four pairs of boots, a flannel jacket, and I propose to go
back to Emin Pasha and across Africa with this truly African kit. Livingstone,
ye > poema r
an ean =o
"Cv yy
1L,OOK OUT FOR THE CROCODILE.
poor' fellow, was all in patches when I met him, but it will be the reliever myself
who will ::be in. patches this time:; - Fortunately,; not one of my officers will envy
me, for their kits are intact-it was only myself that was dead.
I pray you to say that we were only 82 days from the Albert Lake to Banalya,
and 61 from Fort Bodo. ''The distance is not very great-it is the people who
fail one. Going to N'yanza, we felt as though we had the tedious task of drag-
ging. them; on returning each man 'knuew the toad and did. not 'need afly
stimulus. Between the N'yanza and here we only lost three men-one of which
was by desertion.
als "4
s i | hey \ \ \
} \\\\\\\\\
ata
U \ 4\ “A ¢
it. he
whl
ls P,
3“\ ;
" |
Rss 77
&
C ats? Ault
+ Sts _ \ "lt
2llhA - (ARES a q\\.\‘\\\\\‘
(4863)
484 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
undermine my authority and nullify all my endeavors for retreat. When I
informed them that Khartoum had fallen and Gordon Pasha was slain, they
always told the Nubians that it was a concocted story, that some day we should
see the steamers ascend the river for their relief But of the regulars who
compose the Ist and 2d Battalions I am extremely doubtful; they have led such
a free and happy life here that they would demur at leaving a country where
they have enjoyed luxuries they cannot command in Egypt. 'The soldiers are
married, and several of them have harems. Many of the irregulars would also
retire and follow me. Now, supposing the regulars refuse to leave, you can
imagine that my position would be a difficult one. Would I be right in leaving
them to their fate? Would it not be consigning them all to ruin? I should
have to leave them their arms and ammunition, and on returning all discipline
would be at an end. Disputes would arise and factions would be formed. The
more ambitious would aspire to be chiefs by force, and from these rivalries would
spring hate and mutual slaughter until there would be none of them left."
" Supposing you resolve to stay, what of the Egyptians ?" I asked. ;
" Oh, these I shall have to ask you to be good enough to take with you."
" Now, will you, Pasha, do me the favor to ask Captain Casati if we are to
have the pleasure of his company to the sea, for we have been instructed to assist
him also should we meet ?" f
Captain Casati answered through Emin Pasha :
" What the Governor Emin decides upon shall be the rule of conduct for me
also. If the Governor stays, I stay.. If the Governor goes, I go." '
"Well, I see, Pasha, that in the event of your staying your responsibilities
will be -great."
A laugh. The sentence was translated to Casati, and the gallant captain
replied : % ,
" Oh, I beg pardon, but I absolve the Pasha from all responsibility connected:
with me, because I am governed by my own choice entirely." | f
Thus day after day I recorded faithfully the interviews I had with Emin
Pasha; but these extracts reveal as much as is necessary for you to understand.
the position. I left Mr. Jephson, thirteen of my Soudanese, and sent a message
to be read to the troops, as the Pasha requested. Everything else is left until I
return with the united expedition to the N'yanza. |
Within two months the Pasha proposed to visit Fort Bodo, taking Mr:
Jephson with him. At Fort Bodo I have left instructions to the officers to
destroy the fort and accompany the Pasha to N'yanza. I hope to meet them all
again on the N'yanza, as I intend making a short cut to the N'yanza along a new
road. Yours respectfully, f ‘
HEnxry M. StanuEy.
CHAPTER XXV.
STANLEY'S REPLY TO HIS CRITICS AND DESCRIPTION OF HIS JOURNEY.
VERY great man naturally becomes a target at which jealous
persons aim their shafts of venomous criticism. Mr. Stanley, im-
portant, hetculean, heroic and philanthropic as have been his labors
in Africa, has not escaped the flings of contemptible critics, nor
the- bites: of pismires . in Iuman form.: His undertaking : was
at first considered as foolhardy, and success in the face of direful
predictions intensified the jealously of the rueful. prophets who: seek now to
sustain their suffering reputations by attacking Mr. Stanley's purposes and his
honor. 'The inspiration of these onslaughts is well known to be a savagely be-
grudging disposition which actuates so many men and makes them color-blind
to the good deeds and triumphs of others.
So offensive, as they are unjust, became the criticisms upon Stanley's general-
ship, his orders, intentions, aspirations, and his conduct generally in his efforts
to relieve Emin Pasha, that he was at length moved to make a full answer to
all the harpings of these miserable fault-finders and traducers of noble reputa-
tions. In making this full reply Mr. Stanley incidentally describes, briefly it
is true, nearly the whole of his journey from Yambuya to Kavalli, as will be
seen, hence his letter is one of extraordinary interest, as well as of value.: It
is as follows : ; f
C. M. S. STATION ar WsaLaALA, South end of Lake Victoria,
Central Africa; August 31, 1889.
My DEar DE WINToN.-We arrived here on the 28th inst. and found
the modern Livingstone, Mr. A. M. Mackay, safely and comfortably established
at this mission station. I had always admired Mackay. He has never joined
the missionary attacks on me, and every fact I had heard about him indicated
that I should find him an able and reliable man. When I saw him and some
of his work about here, then I recognized the man I had pleaded, in the name
of M'tesa, should to sent to him in 1875; the very type of a man I had de-
scribed as necessary to confirm M'tesa in his growing love for the white man's
créed.
A packet of newspaper cuttings was given to me on my arrival: here.
The contents of most of them have perfectly bewildered me. I am struck with two
things, viz., the lack of common-sense exhibited by the writers, and the .ntter
disregard of accuracy shown. Not one seems to have considered my own letters
to the Emin Pasha Relief Committee, or my speech at the Mackinnon dinner
before starting, as worthy of regard. 'They do not care for the creed that I
have always professed-the one great article of faith of the working portion
(485)
486 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
of my life-" Never make a promise unless you meal- to keep it;" and my
second article of faith, which ought to have been as generally known, if words
and corresponding actions may be judged-'" Obey orders if you break owners."
"All I prayed for," said I at the Mackinnon dinner speech, "is that the same
impelling power which has hitherto guided and driven me in Africa would
accompany me in my journey for relieving Gordon's faithful lieutenant."
THE RELIEF OF EMIN PASHA EXPLAINED.
Now, in this White Pasha affair, tell me why I should budge one foot
to right or left from the straight line described to you in my letters. Kavalli's,
on the Albert N'yanza, almost due east from Yambuya-that is the objective
point, natural obstacles permitting. I have never yet departed from the princi-
ple of fulfilling my promise to the letter, where there is a responsibility attached
; é f ; to at. ' -Have
people at any
time discovered -
any crankiness
in me? Then
why should
¥) they s uppose
fJ that I, who ex-
s" pressed my
g views that
Gordon diso-
beyed orders
§ Gordon's wil-
| fulness, you re-
member the
phrase in the
Mansion House
speech - would
be - ten times
more disobedient and a thousand times more disloyal, deserving of such charges
as '' breach of, faith," " dishonesty," " dissimulation," by going in the direction
of Bahr Gazelle or Khartoum? I should not have gone were it to win the
Imperial crown, unless it had been an article in the verbal bond between the
Committee and myself. 'The object of the expedition, as I understood it, was
simply the relief of Emin Pasha, so far as the Committee was concerned in
the undertaking, but the Egyptian Government added "and the escort of-
Emin Pasha and his people to the sea, should he require it."
Now, in the Emin Pastia affair, the latest Blue Book which Lord Iddes:-
leigh furnished me with, contained many expressions through Emin Pasha's
letters which seem to prove that he had faithfully maintained his post until he
could learn from his government what its intentions were, and that he had
INTERRUPTION OF THE PASHA'S REVERIE,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT ° 487
force enough with him to depart in almost any direction towards the sea if
~ mals »
= %
z ___
> 3 me ree 0 meat f
a T ar -<
Trl, one mer of a rag ' = C ze s="
Bho 120000 mages sith
p Z bs a i mu fik
J; h = ; ' im :__~- ”fig. m~§3 ig
#s rs mae" sue e cea A > <3
To s (pom asp 4
tr a> # ts p>"
MONBUTTO WARRIORS.
such was the government's wish: by the Congo, by Monbutto or via Langgo
Land, and Musai-were equally alike to him,. But on November 2, 1887, forty-
488: -_ HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
two: days before I reached the Albert N'yanza he (the Pasha) writes to his friend,
Dr. Falkin:-"Do not have any doubt about my intentions ; I do not want a rescue
expedition. Have no fears about me. I have long made up my mind to stay."
- A COLD MEETING WITH EMIN PASHA. f
All thlS is very unsatlsfactory and imexplicable.= He (the Pasha) also
said he had sent searching parties in the direction I was supposed to come.
- Qn-Becembeéer (1888) 15, 16, 17, I- made inquiries of. the people at the south
end of Lake -Albert, and they had seen no steamer since» Mason Bey's visit in
1877, consequently this absence of news of: him cost us a 300-mile journey to
obtain our boat and carry her to the N'yanza. With this: boat we found him
within three days. Finally he steamed up to our camp, but instead of meeting
with one who had long ago made up his mind to stay or to go away with us,
he would first have to consult his people, scattered among fifteen stations over
arlarge extent" of country.: - I foresaw a long stay, but to avoid that aud to give
the Pasha ample time to consider his answer. and learn-the wishes of his peo-
ple, I resolved 'to go back even to Yambuya to ascertain the fate of the rear
column of our' expedition - under Major: Barttelot. 'This diffidence on the paftt
of the Pasha cost me another rough: march of 1300 miles. When I returned
to the N'yanza, after eight months' absence, it was only to find that Emin Pasha
and Mr. Jephson, one of our officers who stayed with him as a witness, had been
made prisoners four months previous to this third arrival of ours on the N'yanza,
and that the invasion of the Pasha's province by the Mahdists had utterly up-
gsetieverything.
L. When Mr." Jephson,. according to: command, - detached> himself from. the
Pasha and came to me, I learned then for the first time that the Pasha had
had no province, government or soldiers for nearly three years; that he was
living undisturbed and that the people sometimes yielded to his wishes appa-
rently through mere sufferance and lack of legitimate excuse to cast him off
utterly. - But committed himself by a gust of awakened optimism to
venture into the presence of his soldiers he was -at once arrested, insulted,
menaced, and imprisoned.
| TIPO TIB'S ENGAGEMENT.
In relation to the -subject of Major Barttelot and Tipo 'Tib, I have seen
. more nousense than on any other. 'You remember the promise I made "to do
as much -good as I could, but as little mischief as possible."" Let us see how
this applied to the engagement with Tipo 'Tib. 'This man had grown rich
through his raids, which had been the boldest and best rewarded with booty of
any ever made. T hat error of judgment which led Captain Deane to defy the
-Arabs for the sake of a lying woman who had fled from her master to avoid
punishment, had irritated all the Arabs at Stanley Falls, and especially Tipo
Tib and all his relatives, friends, subjects and armed slaves. Tipo Tib was
resolved. to retaliate on the Cougo.Free State:-he- was at Zanzibar collecting
material for the most important raid of all-that is, down the Upper Congo.
o
n\\‘.!\\.
.A.u\\\hum\wm hm‘vu ‘
,..\H\¥\\
2A
Cess
Pomp > Eom
each
S,
e Z
1
po p
\\\\\\V\\ 72)
3?
NESSED BY STANLEY,
TIPO TIB'S FRESH CAPTIVES BHING SENT INTO BONDAGE-WIT
iJ \\
)
I } f
Mikie
Cus
SDP»
".m. lh o | Eeez Sl rr o S y
- + (ane
} \N\\m\\\ f : /P 4 I 4 m \ \ ,.. .; , f rM Az/mcx
.\\\\ \\\.\\ t : MLN/IJ/
7 i
Ex
J \\\H\N\
FP ¢
ie
4 ary
atas
«=
e.
-->
~*
e
\\\.\.\\\\ fas
wop = 2.
Seme,
races.
an ws
D
as
e ¢
pree r rre N
7 cen
: eto eee rear
i s
swfixmwwv T a
A NY rR!
4 z RV LPL LL a
LZ IP a
a
~
&
a'v *« .s
oce thay 5s 6
met B
, g Ev;
as (tlhe OO
4go :: HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
Who could have stopped his descent before he reached Stanley Pool? Who knew
the. means: of the State: for defence better than I did? - Therefore it. was. either
a fearful desolating war, or a compromise and a peace while good faith was
kept. If both parties are honest peace will continue indefinitely. To secure
Tipo Tib's honesty a salary of $150 per. month is given to him.. For this
trifling consideration thousands of lives are saved and their properties secured
to them... No Congo State is permitted. to consolidate until it is readier with
offensive means than at this time. _- f
Thank -God. L ' Have. loug left that: immature age. when one becomes a
vigtinr to-every: crafty rogue he meets. I anm-not a. gushing youth, and we
may assume that Tipo Tib's prime age is far from dotage. We both did as
much as possible to gain advantage. I was satisfied with what I obtained, and
‘ f Tipo. Tib; se:
cured, ..a hat
money H
wanted.. At
the time. ,he
agreed: ;:I,; feel
certain that hs
was sincere. in
his intentions.
You: remember
your Scripture,
I dare say, .and
you remember
the words
"'There is more
joy in heaven
A over one sinner
that repenteth
f , , t h.a n ov er
ninety-nine that need no repentance." Who had been a greater sinner than
Tipo Tib, at least in our estimation? But he could not sin down the Congo,
for pecuniary as well as for more powerful reasons, which cannot be mentioned
lest other crafty rogues take advantage of the disclosures.
THE APPOINTMENT OF BARTTELOT.
After disposing of Tipo 'Tib, the pirate, the freebooter, buccaneer and
famous raider, I may say a word about poor Barttelot. - He was -a Major-in
the British army. His very manner indicated him to be of a frank, gallant, dar-
ing, and perhaps somewhat dangerous disposition if aroused. His friends
who introduced him to me in London spoke of him in some such terms. 'They
named the campaigns he had been in, and what personal service he had per-
formed. As I looked at the Major's face I read courage, frankness, combative,
ONE OF TIPO TIB'S SLAVE GANGS.
HEROES-"OF THE DARK CONTINENT- - 491
ness in large quantity, and I said to these friends: " Courage and boldness are
common characteristics among British officers, but of the most valuable quality
for an expedition like this I have not heard anything, I hope you can add
forbearance." f |
The only quality perhaps in which he was deficient was that of forbear-
ance, though I promised myself that he should have little chance to exercise
combativeness. _ ;- f f growm=»
Yon -. must - not ---
think this was
ay in him.
It was merely
the result of high
spirits, - youth,
and good consti-
fution.. / He was
just pining for p
work. - I prom- ~ %%
ised him heshould fe _, fh
have so much of -| " = op
it that he would
plead" "for rest,
But"? "unfortu-
nately, want of
sufficient vessels
to" float 'the ex:.
pedition - at one
time on the upper
Congo compelled
me to leave about
oie half of my
stores in Charge
ef Mr.: Troup at
Stanley Pool, and
126" men -nuder
Messrs. - Ward Jl
and Bonny at t; | i~\lDASESTSAE NPM T- a
BOlOlO, an d as NATIVES OF THE BOLOLO DISTRICT.
the Major was senior officer and Mr. Jameson was an African traveller of
experience, after due consideration it was concluded that no other two men
could be fitter for the post of guarding the camp at Yambuya. With me for
the advance column were Lieutenant Stairs, R. E., very intelligent and able,
Captain Nelson, of the Colonial forces, Mounteney Jephson, a civilian, to whom
work: was as. much- a vital necessity as bread, and Surgeon 'T. H. Parke,; of
IS
492.~ -~ "HEROES OF THE DARK
the. A. 'M.: D.,; a brilliant 'operator 'and: physician. All were equally ignorant
of the -Kiswahili, -the language of the Zanzibaris, as Major Barttelot and Mr.
Jameson. - 'The only two who knew the language were Messrs. Ward and Troup,
and they were not due at Yambuya until the middle of August. Would it have
been wise to have placed either Stairs, Nelson or Jephson, instead of Major Bart-
telot, the: senior.-officer,;.in. command -of Yambuyar. I, feel sure you will agree
with me I made the best choice possible. V -
CIRCUMSTANCES LEADING TO BARTTELOT'S DEATH.
When young officers, English, German or Belgian, come to Africa for
many months, -no. abatement of that thirst for action, that promptitude
for work, that impatience to be movmg, which" Charactenze them 'at: home.
has not sapped the' energies and thinned the blood. 'They are more
combative at this period than any other. If any quarrels or squabbles arise it
is at this time: I had to interfere twice between fire-cating young Arabs and
strong, plucky young Englishmen, who were unable to discern the dark-faced
Arab from' the nigger before we reached Yambuya. 'Well,; it just happened
that the Major, forgetting my instructions as to forbearance, met these Arab
fire eaters, and the consequence was that the Major had to employ the Syrian
Assad. Ferran to interpret. for him.. ''Whether the man interpreted falsely I
know not, but a coolness arose between the high-spirited young Major and the
equally high-spirited nephew of Tipo Tib, which was never satisfactorily healed
up, and which, in the long run, led to the ever-to-be-regretted. death of poor
Barttélbt.
_ STANLEY'S INSTRUCTIONS TO BARTTELOT.
Inthe written instructions to Major Bartelot, June 24, Yambnya stockaded
camp, paragraph III., reads as follows :
~. _ It-is" the- -mon- arrnal of the goods from Stanley Pool and the men from
Bololo which compels me to appoint you commander of this post. But as I
shall shortly expect the arrival of a strong re-enforcement of men (Tipo 'Tib's
people), greatly exceeding the advance force, which must at all hazards proceed
and push on to the rescue of Emin Pasha, I hope you will not be detained
longer than a few days after the departure of the Sfar/ey on her final return
to Stanley Pool in August (say August 18, 1887, as the steamer did not arrive
in time August 14).
Paragraph V.-The interests now entrusted to you are of vital 1mp01tance
to this expedition. All the men (Zanzibaris), who will shortly be under your
command, will consist of more than a third of the expedition. 'The goods are
needed for currency through the regions beyond the lakes. The loss of these
men and goods would be certain ruin to us, and the advance force itself would
mneed to solicit relief:in its: turn.
«Paragraph VIL--Our colrse from here wilt "be due east, or. by magnetic
compass east by south., The paths niay not exactly lead in that direction at
times, 'but it is the north-west corner of Albert Lake, near or at Kavalli, that
fik i '“
ily wl‘,_
3
N” 1 JL‘ ‘u\ A‘ © N
i
s
as -
y yA
Alm
-
s(t.) s
\ S A ”ii Kl (
Cas “g 3
Pliko ~
[film
J lb”; /
"N B "ty b
Wat ths
I g; f $59;
He “Xv-h“ \ d f NA?! f
9m" M" "\\\“\\‘\\.f a/ AA
NMTUV
UU \p
2 r1~'\5.“g3,\“ AF Y" Mint
“Vt“.v‘m, T ks h (em J Y
auat n ft..
7 vhat
7 Month -gal
BARTTELOT ENFORCING ORDERS. (493)
494 HEROEFS-OF IHE D&XRK CONTINENT.
%
is our destination. .-. -. Our after conduct must be guided by what we shall
learn of the intentions of Emin Pasha. «
Paragraph .Y lIIL.-We shall" endeavor, by. blazing the trees and cutting
saplings, to leave sufficient traces of the ronte taken by us.
Paragraph VIll-It may happen, should Tipo Tib send the full comple-
fuent of men promised (yoo), and if the 126 men have arrived by the S/aniey,
that you will feel competent to march your column along the route pursued by
me. - In that event, which would be most desirable, we should meet before many
days. You will find our bomas or zeribas very good guides.
Paragraph IX.-It may also that Tipo 'Fib has sent some men,
but he has not- sent enough. In that event you will, of course, use yofir dis-
cretion as to what goods you can dispense with to enable you to march.
fers
> J
li
& ie eons
# yoo
T‘.;-‘€_
(3 <
w
al
(Kane
tlf
=> f“
X N “\\‘.-f.
Sat imin mop (pe
\ it N) \ | 5 Tht fi'a‘ E J 4) “yl‘
}; i fiw 1 }) | v5
f P md fo n a TW ti 19. rhe wR: AT: Ag Jr
o } HV ."4i}lfi SW hous fifidflflm‘
tin lins nears bor 4 fries to, 4
"W L‘ KP a W “AI ! i,
< $) Go Heol ats 3] e Wi)
_ | | T wilt if
f U
1
\ '\=“
pa 8): ‘nwj" meld No +. "ed a , f in“? | 4
R
J an
"plis “hi,“ ; qQanl Fis
'(f|!:"ll‘2"~ll|x:,:fl“ Mu all as" ”j,
tam
My -: NP mi >
ts s e "gA
AANA ALA P
B MH 4 3 dans mP eee at
- " Ler
E eRe £ Aerie \ & >= 8...
A tray i f s Coens zz ss, y> -we
i % {6M 4 PS «AAPA '\ Y.~ Llf AOKXt » k - 4 -
[ N ue hi\\~ , read PANL A- y - ’»,.ka, 2 A, cr3 IJ ro by -x" Tz 2s
: t g PCa areas v e Ir satin," ASC op a ~1‘ PU ste LA sa Pi r F Rp
{ g; es w railey, "l res tera rrp Es s Sarva a dites pied f a 4 S
TIPO TIB'S SLAVES MARCHING OUT OB STANLEY FALLS.
9 34
"ugh“
o 4
« a* ne a
2M IF * *. - AICA
ae a A ; r 17
AP
(List of classes of goods, according to their importance, here given. Nos.
1,.2). 3) 4145, 6, the highest nnmbers to be first thrown away.) ‘
If. you . still cannot march, then it. would be Better to make donbl
marches than throw too many away, if you prefer moving on to staying for
our arrival. :
TIPO TIB'S UNRELIABILITY.
- These instructions were supplemented by verbal explanations, giving per-
mission» to. march the very,. next day after the contingent. from.: Bololo, had
arrived, if he could prepare his goods in time-urgently impressing him not to
place any stress on the -proinises of Tipo Tib, if lhe failed to make an appeat:
ance within a reasonable time- of the promised date. His carriers were not
absolutely necessary, but. they. would serve to keep 'our men fresh for other
journeys.. If 'Tipor"Fib came, why, well and good; if he did not come, then
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 195
be indifferent, adapt your goods to your carriers, and march on after us.: The
sooner you can march the sooner we will meet. If Tipo Tib broke his written
agreement made with me before the consul, his promises to you would be more
unreliable. When you last saw him, he promised to come within nine days,
-that date will be over day after to-morrow. If he comes any time before the
arrival of the Stanley all will be well; but if he does not come by that time it
will prove that the man never intended to keep his promise. Do not bothe
your mind about him, but come along with what you can-ammunition, beads,
cloth, private luggage, and European provisions. If you make double marches
of four or six miles a day, you will do very well, etc.
The Major rose up in his frank, impetuous manner, and said:- By
George, that's my style. I will stop very few days indeed after the people
from Bololo come up. I wouldn't stop longer for anything." Unfortunately,
tantalizing delays, accompanied by constant fair promises on the part of the
Arabs, prevented the forward movement, with what unfortunate results to the
expedition and to the rear column is too well known to be again referred to here.
~~ MISREPRESENTATIONS ABOUT CANNIBALISM.
In regard to atrocities reported on the Congo, I do not know who made
the horrible statement that I have seen connected with the names of Majo:
Barttelot and Jameson. It is inconceivable nonsense-a sensational cenard.
The Rev. Wilmot Brooke has written a letter to the 7Zzimes about atrocities on the
Aruwimi. - There is one part of a sentence which reads as follows: Eye-wit-
nesses, both English and Arab, have assured me that it is a common thing, which
they themselves have seen on passing through the Manyuema camp, to see human
hands and feet sticking out of their cooking pots."
The question I should like to ask here is, "Who are those English who have
seen this curious sight-hands and feet sticking out of cooking pots ?" - Mr. Wilmot
Brooke is an independent missionary seeking for a nest. It must berthat there
is something of an " untravelled" look about him for him to have been chosen
as the recipient of this interestingly sensational item. I would not mind guaran-
teeing that "those English" are as undiscoverable as Prester John's traditional
crown. I have had 150 so-called Manyuema, or rather Wasongora, and Wakusu
slaves of Manyuema headmen with me-Tipo Tib's people-some twelve months
now, and not one Englishman has seen anything of the kind. '
Is Mr. Wilmot Brooke, or is it Assad Ferran, the author of that tale, that
an execution of a woman was delayed by Jameson or Barttelot that a photo-
grapher might make ready his apparatus? - Would it surprise you to know that
there was no photograph apparatus of even the smallest kind within 500 miles of
Stanley Falls or the camp at Yambuya, north, south, east, or west, at that time
or at any time near that date. f
, But I might go on at this rate forever with the " infinite finite" nonsense
I find in print in these scraps. - Major Barttelot did punish men twice with
severity, but, singular as it may seem, the white person who accused him was
Me H Cg
tlre
} my” ch.,
4 onficfl sr es
[p é is
I ubi
4
V
HET ida rare
M :
Miffy
Fh?
\\ Ph
\.vv\\€ P /
+ //////;///4/
Neer
to
P me,
LZ
LZ GGZ
A
wif to
vd
4
/}
y" 7
N\»\\O \§\r\v\\w\‘
W\\\ \H\ A
& 6"
©
DRAGGING THE MURDERER TO EXECUTION
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 497
present on both occasions during the flogging scene-he never even protested ;
the second time he gave his verdict-death-at a fair trial, and signed the docu-
ment consigning him to instant doom.
f I have had to execute four men during our expedition; twice for stealing
rifles, cartridges, and broken loads of ammunition; one of the Pasha's people for
conspiracy, theft, and decoyving about 30 women belonging to the Egyptians,
besides for seditious plots-court martisled by all officers, and sentenced to be
hung; a Soudanese soldier, the last, who deliberately proceeded to a friendly
tribe and began shooting at the natives. One man was shot dead instantly,
and another was seriously wounded. 'The chiefs came and demanded justice, the
people were mustered, the murderer and his companions were identified, the.
identification by his companions confirmed, and the murderer was delivered to
thein, according to the law, 'blood for blood." Yours very faithfully,
f ' @ Henry M. STANLEY.
32
CHAPLER XXVI.
ADVENTURES ON THE ROUTE.
HFE description which Stanley gives of his journey from Yambuya
to :Kavalli;-on Lake Albert, is in the nature of a feport toia
scientific body, and therefore, while reciting the perils of the
march, it does not descend to the particulars of adventures,
which he reserved for subsequent description, for publication
as well as to add exciting interest to the letters which he wrote
from Africa to his friends. It was my good fortune to be able
to secure facts from his correspondence and to add here the principal adven-
tures of his most memorable Journey :
As an explorer, whose chief mission, while philanthropic, was hardly less an
ambition to familiarize himself with new regions, Stanley could not afford to dls-
regard even the traditions respecting
the country lying along the Aruwimi
river, especially since, though possi-
bly idle stories, they were evidently
grounded: firmly -in the beliefs of
both Arabs and natives of all Central
Africa. By this careful attention .'"to
beliefs, as well as critical observation,
he has been able to.give us muich
information about tribes which have
never before been brought to the
notice -of even ethnologists, much
less to the great mass of people. 'To [§ s.
features of his march not described Ofori Huston:
in his letter to the Relief Committee we must therefore now address ourselves.
CRUEL DEVICES ADOPTED BY THE NATIVES.
Among other difficulties encountered on the journey, Stanley says that very
shortly after the expedition departed from Yambuya the members were initiated
into the subtleties of savage warfare. Among other arts practised by the natives
for annoying strangers was that of filling shallow pits with sharpened splinters,
or skewers, deftly covered over with leaves. For barefooted people the results
were terrible; and ten men were wounded by these skewers, which would often
perforate the foot quite through, or the tops would be buried in the feet, pro-
ducing gangrenous sores.
(498)
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 499
To these distressful annoyances, or more properly murderous obstructions,
complaint is added against swarming insects, such as gnats, flies and ants, which
in some places attacked the expedition in such numbers and with such venom
> A|
luat
/ WW WW
A
0
ous bites as forced the men to throw down their burdens and fight for life.
The mornings along the river were generally lowering and very sombre,
everything being buried in thick mist, which frequently did not clear off until
nearly noon. While this lasted the air was still as death, and gave the insects
500 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
opportunity for foraging off every living thing. When the sun came out, and
the breeze sprung up, the small winged creatures fled away to the deep forests
and settled. " f es
'The Nejambi Rapids marked the division between two different kinds of
architecture and language. Below were the cone huts; above were villages long
and straight, of detached square huts surrounded by tall logs of wood, which
added materially to the strength of the village. But all the villages were hostile,
: ~ ., (C55 - __ $§~§§$ and were also
‘ a rmred with
strong bows from
which - poisoned
arrows were dis-
charged . with
gf] deadly effect.
wea Stanley and his
H officers became
s much - exercised
M as to what might
be the poison on
the heads of the
arrows by which
§] Lieutenant Stairs
f and sev eral
others we're
wounded, and
from the effects
of which four died
almost directly.
During a halt at
Arisibba several
packets of dried
red-ants were
found, 'and -the
secret was out.
ELEVATED DWELLINGS ALONG THE ARUWIML. The . bodies of»
these insects were dried, ground into powder, cooked in. palm oil, and smeared
on the arrow tips, and thus the deadly irritant, by which so many men had
been lost after the most terrible suffering, was conveyed into the arrow wounds.
'This poison is so potent that it is forbidden to prepare it near a village.
Stanley also mentions having seen immense piles of oyster shells on several
Islands in the Afuwinil, thouglt this peculiar species of bivalves is not now found
living in the river. He also notes a curious means emplpyed by the natives in
clearing the forests of tall white stemmed trees characteristic of the Lower Congo,
NB
Mug "ss
r Crem ir- W
( ta |
T mes
\
[MRH
Se. '>
Say
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. sot
which is by building a platform about the trees, ten, fifteen, and even twenty
feet high, and then cutting off the trunk at that height. 'The purpose of this
most singular practice could not be discovered, except that the natives considered
too much labor involved in the clearing out of trunks and stumps, and therefore
thought all useful means were accomplished by the lopping off of that portion
of the tree whose foliage would give too much shade to what they planted. Nor
is this theory without reason, for in Africa land has no ownership, and the
tribes are usually migratory. A single, or at most two crops are harvested by
ne family on the same ground in many districts, hence a thorough clearing
cannot be afforded. Stanley also incidentally notes having seen occasional huts
built on piles, and even stumps of trees, at a considerable elevation, but does
not give us the reasons for this kind of architecture.
EXCITING SPORT ON THE ARUWIMI.
While a much larger part of the journey toward Kavalli was made on land,
along the river shore, yet in several instances large canoes, called muggers, were
procurable at native villages, and in these the expedition travelled until an inter-
ruption in the navigation compelled a return to the land. Canoes were always
hard to obtain, and in nearly all cases where they could be hired the owners
aes hos te i s would - not allow - them «to 'be!
esas : taken beyond a few miles. It
$ is true, Stanley had a. suffi-
§ ciently well-armed force with
* him to take by violence what
"_ «gence
-ma. ear,
~ he was unable to secure by
| purchase, but his was a peace.
ful mission, and he avoided, even to the point of seeming cowardice, collisions
-with the natives, in no instance beginning an attack, and always resorting to
every possible means for evading a fight even in his own defence. Notwith-
standing his sufferance, however, he was forced many times to make a vigorous
defence to avoid destruction at the hands of violently hostile tribes who opposed
every conceivable impediment at their command to his advance.
The short relays of canoes that were obtainable gave great relief to the
weary and footsore travellers, besides often affording exciting sport to the hunters
and venturously inclined members of the expedition. 'The river has little cur-
rent, on which account, as well as the few disturbances of the ancient quiet of
that region, it is made the haunt of great numbers of hippopotami and croco
diles, while monkeys of. many varieties are to be constantly seen in wanton
gambols among the trees that line the banks. Being well supplied with arms
and ammunition,.Stanley and his lieutenants found much amusement shooting
the larger game from the canoes; and even their Arab auxiliaries, who generally
maintained a melancholy mien, threw off their sullenness for an occasional hunt
along the shores. '
Many times during the trip the party were sorely pressed for food, and were
X SCHOOL, OF HLIPPOPCO'T A MA.
502 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
forced to many expedients to obtain it. 'The natives were generally very poor
themselves, and while having little to sell, were even less inclined to furnish
food to strangers. Hunting, too, was frequently a doubtful resource, because,
while in certain sections game was abundant, in others there seemed to be no
animal life whatever. The Arabs-about a dozen having followed the expedi-
tion after Tipo Tib left it at Stanley Falls-fared worse than the others, because
of their religious scruples about eating hippopotamus flesh, which they regard
as unclean. But the gnawing pangs of hunger finally overcame the proscrip-
tion of creed and belief, so that they were brought to partake of the forbidden
food. It was a ludicrous sight to Christians to see a lay Mohammedan acting
BLESSING THE DEAD BODY OFR A HIPPOPOTAMUS.
the part of priest and blessing the dead body of a hippopotamus preparatory to
making a feast, and in the ceremony to see so strong a religious barrier destroyed.
A common affliction does indeed make us all brothers.
A HIPPOPOTAMUS ADVENTURE. f
The monotony of ruthless slaughter, which had continued for several days,
was at last disturbed by an exciting incident in which Lieutenant Stairs figured
more conspicuously than even his adventure-loving disposition desired. Slow
progress was being made by some of the party on shore while others were poling
and paddling at equally slow pace in a half-dozen nuggers, Stairs being in the
lead, and Stanley following in his steel whale boat, the Advance. In a consider-
able cove, where the river had once made a turn and then swept back again into
# //
o 7
f /////// 7,
4
4
\\\‘
RSR
s
as
maas
ys
STAIRS' ADVENTURE WITH A BULL HIPPOPOTAMUS.
504 HEROES:: OFP THE DARK CONTINENT.
its former channel, leaving a half-stagnant elbow, several - hippopotami were seen
sporting, and decision was immediately made to attack them.. Stairs pushed
forward, his approach being hidden by a jutting point, until he had gained 'a
position sufficiently near to permit an efféctive shot. 'The nugger was now
brought round to an unexpected meeting with a large cow hippopotamus, which
Stairs fired 'at and badly wounded. In its violent struggles the animal turned
\\\\\
NATIVES PREPARING A FEAST OF SNAKE-FLESH.
over and over in the shallow place until its movements excited the compassion
of its' companions, three of which came cliatging to tlic resone, with one
uncommonly large bull in the lead. 'The shallowness of the water prevented
the huge animals from diving and coming up under the canoe, as is their custom,
and forced them to make the approach in full view. Thus when the bull,
re-enforced by its almost equally dangerous companions, came rushing towards the
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. " top
canoe with wide open mouth, Stairs opened fire upon it, but to so little effect that
the animal was not checked, while its rage was greatly increased. 'The other
three, however, were frightened by the discharge of the gun and made off in
great haste, leaving their leader to fight the battle alone. 'The bull, whose head
now presented a horrible sight by reason of his gaping jaws, red and frothing,
with blood pouring from three wounds that seemed to be discharging their flood
directly into. his mouth, came charging onto the canoe, which it actually seized
and would have torn in pieces together with the occupants had not those following
behind in the other canoes come up at this juncture and poured an effectual
broadside of- shots into. the mad monster. The result, however, was a badly
broken canoe, and an impromptu bath by Stairs, who had leaped out of the
boat when he saw the enemy's mouth apparently opened to receive him.
| ~ AMONG THE CROCODILES.
Along the Aruwimi, especially in the more desert regions, where famines
are said to be frequent; the natives -are-omnivorous in their diet, eating every
kind of animal dosta, -z, | MMM 1 --=
food, not except- rik ANM» ' ~ MMP -ef < e f
ing human f
flesh, croco- kn M$
_diles, monkeys,
snakes, lizards
and worms.
'The snake: f
caters are' par- m
ticularly repul- [P»
sive in- their f¥;32
appearance no |
less than in
their habits;
for: not oily is
their food most
V116 but thell‘ #¥e N25? fere: ,,/; ar " [A P au. A V
filthand squalor ? NOVEI, MEANS OF KILLING CROCODILES.
are equally so. . A group of these miserable people gathered about a fire, cooking
their evening meal of snakes and lizards is a sight not only appalling but one
at once so disgusting and loathsome that we sorrow because all mankind is
made of one likeness. ;
Having no effective arms with which to hunt the crocodiles, some of the
Atruwiimt tribes exereise a cunning expedient to effect the capture of these
dangerous. reptiles: IK requires a cool head and steady nerves to put the plan
into practice, but these requirements are seldom wanting among savage people.
'Fhe.native hunter, when he seeks this kind of game, takes with hima very
simple arm, being only a thick stick some ten inches long, through which runs
Ms
3B."
M
506 HEROES: OF THE: DARK CONTINENT:
a slender piece of iron sharply pointed at both ends. Finding his quarry asleep
along some sedgy bank, he cautiously and noiselessly approaches until within a
dozen feet or more of the crocodile. 'The hunter now. drops down into a prostrate
position and crawls carefully along towards the reptile's mouth. When within
three or four feet he makes a peculiar clucking noise, which arouses the
crocodile but does not alarm it. His motions are now such that the creature
believes a meal to be near at hand and
turns. his head to seize the prey ; at this
moment the hunter thrusts his instrument
into the mouth of the crocodile, who seizes
it with avidity only to find itself helpless
to: do any harm with. its: teeth. Gener
ally the pain caused by the sharp points
of the weapon makes the crocodile very
angry and in its rage pursues the hunter.
In this case the creature only hastens
its doom, for the hunter can easily keep
out of reach of the crocodile's tail, which
is now its ouly means of offences und
when it is sufficiently far from the water
the hunter boldly seizes it and either
doubles the forelegs up over the back,
beats it to death with a club, or rips .it
up with a sharp piece of iron which serves
the purpose of a knife.
Crocodiles are also caught by means
| of spring-traps made by bending over a
strong sapling and attaching to the end
a vine with an iron hook fastened to it,
| and a hoop so set that in reaching the
J bait on the hook the creature must thrust
his head through the ring. When ‘ thick lips, flat nose
and. large mouth.
'They are: certainly
very courageous, but
not nearly so. vin-
dictive. andcun-
ningly, ecruel as
Kabba Rega. and
Tipo. Tib repre;
sented; but. that
they: are. guilty a of
cannibalism there
was not wanting
the-strongest evi-
dence.. Mnman
skulls were fre-
quently to be seen
on poles about their
villages and in a
single instance a
fairly well-eured
human arm was seen
hanging to the out-
- side wall of a hut.
CA APY AT Afan s fe ca - It bore the appear-
DWARF SHOOTING SOCIABIE WEAVER BIRDS. ance of havmg been
smoked for a considerable time, but none of the v1llagers could be induced
to talk about any of their habits. In fact, there was no one in the expedition
who could understand their language.
While the Wambuttis are evidently extremely barbaric, and no doubt prac-
tise cruelties which distinguish all barbarous tribes, yet Stanley had octt1ar
proof of the fact that they also possess the most admirable traits of character
and are moved by the instincts of love. There was no evidence of polygamy,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. : 509
while the domestic ties were evidently very strong. Each family resided
together in an elevated hut that was thatched with grass and carried up in a
cone shape to a ' f
sharp point, 'or
central support, ~~~ ~
which projected ## ps.
several feet above $o &,. C
the crown of the
roof." During. a
short stay at one
of the villages a
child of one of :: AOA W* :
the natives died, ~~~ . \t
and Stanley saw I7 P ¥ ~fy-=
the evidences of ins" . pe. - < $0
inteng@&grict a a _ _ -- pika s 32 -
which the event WAILING OVER THE BODY OF A DWARF CHILD.
Caifsed. The mother appeared to be crazed by her sorrow.and had to be te-
strained by her friends from committing some desperate act. Another woman,
Any tL ~- ' " probably the grandmother, judged by
"her appearance; took. the. dead- body
& upon her lap and poured out a liba-
tion of tears and wailings that was
deeply affecting to behold.
The disposition of their dead is
similar to that practised by the Sioux-
Indians, the bodies - being placed in
rude coffins, frequently made from
the hollow of trees. cut of 'a proper
leugth and: closed at the 'ends, and
then deposited on scaffolds, where
they are secure from wild beasts..
"Arps
ge “fly;
a
THE QUIMBANDES.
Beyond the dwarfs, or nearer Lake
Albert, lives an exceedingly fine ap-
pearing tribe called the Quimbandes,
e 9 who are chiefly noted for their physical
(LAC a ¢ symmetry and the peculiar manner
_ Fangio eps P Pap 22s >>-- 5 V |
s : in which they dress the hair. Their
GATHERING HONEY, only clothing is a narrow leathern
girdle about the loins from which hangs, 'before and behind, a strip of hidfz,
or cloth when procurable. But while they bestow small attention to their
LA
510 HEROES: OF BHE: DARK CONTINENT.
bodies, infinite care is evidently taken with the hair, quite as much, indeed,
as is bestowed by the Manyuemas. Some are to be seen with the hair tightly
rolled, with bright feathers rising out of a chignon, while the more fastidious
contrive by some artful means to arrange the hair, by plaiting and twisting,
into the form of a Roman helmet, while yet others present the appearance of
wicker-work. |
The Quimbandes are an indolent people, whose only known manufacture is
willow baskets. They live chiefly by fishing, but vary their diet of fish by
eating various insects, notably the locust-our grasshopper-which is highly
esteemed by them. They also gather considerable quantities of honey, as
THE DWARFS' MANNER OF DISPOSING OF THEIR DEAD.
large stores were invariably found in their villages. 'Their houses are miser-
able pretences, made by setting up a few poles with a rack on top, which is
then covered with loose grass, A Indicrous. scene was precipitated by Mi.
Williams, when he attempted to photograph a group of females: who mistook
his camera for a magic guu.
_ A TRIBE WITH TAILS.
Adjoining the. Quimbandes is anotlhier peculiar tribe almost equally sym-
metrical in form and greatly resembling the Bongos, but Stanley has neglected
to give us even their local designation, though from a photograph we have
liom m!
s w Mop .!
E
AN
AY “EXP"
°\\X\'\\\
N i
CA
((ad
N“
Assit
fl M
X
“$9 9\§
wo
N \t
(las
.‘\\| X
uk. (D
Wik
lt‘ ( 6/14, f
(
4
\x lf/ly‘? Ali
+ y ‘gzl‘tfitfin4 f/z
At
\ \
¢ Jflx‘ 10. &
VR 3h! “flit b
\ i
¢
| “waif AAMC
alg y
oi o y *
ita ts a
ftc. (3
ume y o
N K‘é’éfijfl Hoult
A ' a
aree.
AX
3\
\\\§
(
n
\ Ney
$ U
Pas |
I7, /
Pa .,
&,
Bile io (MN
pl Mp 4,
WKAW F a
“I\' ll (
© “,"}'."//,*é/lmé
Arabe
(tope Las
Sy sl
if An “T1 In I’fim‘w‘ |
Up
u
A
\|
QUIMBANDES WOMEN.
nail
A A 2A AB
l'lfll’lih'hzi j
eom
$2, HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
a
been able to make an excellent illustration. They wear 'searcely as much
clothing as their neighbors, nor do they bestow any care on the hair, leaving
it to run-riot like the indifferent pure Africans that they are. But they never-
theless have some idea of decoration, though it develops, to our tastes, in an
increasing unsightliness rather than an improvement. 'The women affect the
pelele, or lip ring, -like some of the South American tribes, and by inserting
a bit of ivory in the lower lip gradually enlarge the wound until pieces of
bone, wood, or ivory, more than an inch in diameter, may be inserted and
worn. - Besides this singular, so-called ornament, they wear a cinctire of hide,
with a bundle of grass tied in front to serve the traditional purpose of fig-
t
-
--->
\\ DNB a h‘ & # wop l\
/ iit \ A \o \ PS Mi? = W\\\ MOW" Hately [1]
# a N \a \ (l % BNN ( Is lik i
/ifi k ous ha) & w it WOA To h \ iS ESS 3
Sif f \ w WW N H & L
i R A ® \ ce S I \ i |
// "Fi \O\ erties Js Rt § our Ot fl I
*C & \ I R
SSA \ Couse So & (A SIAC! hay T \
Spass N &A App i \ f
Pe S arm & s WD & lll
he ro ; want A I % QIA
f / & fo I uM
So ) N ai
1% WE Sact
P
y //////3 i E
$
$e
z
‘
leaves, and a cow-tail hangs from the belt behind, which led to the belief
among travellers that they had natural tails. 'The wrists and ankles are. in-
variably encumbered by numerous iron rings, a form of jewelry that is strik-
ingly common among savage people. f a-
___ Unlike the Quimbandes, these neighbors are an agricultural people, and
are also somewhat pastoral, though their herds of cattle and sheep are always
very small. 'They raise grain and tobacco and give considerable attention to
poultry.. Their pretentious in size, but are so fragile in con-
struction and material as to serve only a short time; either a fire burns them
F
#7,
y
C
‘ & Z tf 4
/ i Rs R f \
¢
f \ , ..v.\ I -\
f 1, ( h J APE
é Ke F
R + F f u u Is / \ \\ \\ \\ / 4
p ; f UY
. and F 4 f f
f . f }
A g + \ .
- ite Pack é / 3 2
? § T. \ v-.l 7, : f
rs ‘ f
Wis: R ?
pica § oss
+ 5 t> te nse meng
<4 5 f 91.8 ¥ bs, +
I1 Cage t Lo f is ..
c ike
£0 dt». atf o 4 w
end apie trot ag
f
. \\,\\\\
prams /
[
P
, mam <_x Til
hr
mie c (ce o--
v ; » M ‘ ZV\\
|
IV a ,,;_%%‘&mwm
¥ Apap
TYPES OF A TRIBE LIVING NEIGHBORS TO THE QUIMBANDES.
(513)
23
514 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
or a wind-storm soon destroys them. They are made almost entirely of grass
and bear a striking resemblance to a large wheat. stack, except that the apex,
instead of being pointed, is made to assume a bushy appearance. f
THE M'TEITA.
Still further eastward is the M'teita
tribe, who are a picturesque people
by reason of the numerous gewgaws
the women especially affect, which, while
they: do not clothe or-conceal the body,
certainly do highly decorate. ;
The women are of pleasing features
and often real pretty, even to the critical
eye of" an American. 'They are espe-
cially fond of bead-work and the belles
ornament their bodies with strings of
various colored beads wound round and
round the waist, breast, neck and head.
In front = is worn a lappéet: of- cloth or
skin, also decorated with beads, and the
buttock is covered with a piece of fringed
cloth, while the arms and legs bear a
very burden of: rings made: of ivory,
iron, and occasionally of copper. 'The
men are not nearly so vain and are con-
tent with a plain piece of cloth about
the loins-in this respect being more
modest than the women-and sometimes
'a' necklace: of either beads or a small
: bit of leather with some equally simple
ornament strung upon it. |
'The M'teita do a little farming and
raise a few goats and sheep, but they
care 'chicfly traders and as: such travel
prs. ep - considerably in Uganda, Unyoro, Usoga,
s uM - >> and other kingdoms about Albert Lake.
4 ._ 4 They construct very crude dwellings of
© A DANDY. _-_ grass, and with this crudeness is also
found an utter lack of comfort or convenience, the floors having no covering
except a thin layer of grass, which is not changed often enough to prevent! a
very foul odor, while the sides of "thatch are so.loose as to freely admit both .
wind and rain. ~But for all this they appear to be a contented, and certairily
a hospitable people. x m f ave
&
i
A
Aw
&
A
%
P
AN M'TEITA MAN AND WOMAN,
.% we**
uaF a
,..acv~...._"-v",_"‘ #
bu vent., 4. eh nits
yee** y
CHAPTER XXVIL
THE APPROACH FTO LAKE ALBERT.
TANLEV'S approach to Lake Albert was indicated by not only
a marked improvement in the natives, whose proximity to the
- semi-civilized lake tribes had produced a distinct influence
for their betterment, but also the change was clearly notice-
able in the game, which became gradually more plentiful. As
Stanley has said, a considerable part of the journey was
made through an almost desert region, which was not only
an untrodden wilderness, but one in which nature had with-
_ held her- bounty. - Very: frequently the expedition . was
reduced to such desperate straits, for want of food, that the men were almost
ready to excuse the practice of cannibalism among the people whose homes had
to be made in such a country. Stanley mentions an incident somewhat ludi-
crous in its aspect, to illustrate the hunger from which the whole expedition
suffered. He had bravely endured the privations in common with his men,
and went on an allowance so small that his strength became much im-
paired. On one occasion 'he subsisted for an entire day on a single small
box of sardines, and in the evening, seated alone in a place where he hardly
expected to be observed, he ate the last little fish and then licked the oil out
of the can as clean as ever a starving animal picked a bone. But what was
his astonishment when at last he threw the empty box away to see three natives,
who had been secretly watching him, make a violent scramble for it, and in the
struggle for its possession they fought as do hungry dogs over a piece of meat.
At length the stronger one secured the box and spent quite half an hour, both
smelling and licking it, just as Stanley himself had done. Possibly the tin
attracted their admiration, but certain it is that they would have prized, at that
time, its former contents much more, for hunger was plainly stamped on their
pinched. features.
CHEER UP, BOYS!
As the country became more park-like the spirits of those composing the.
expedition grew buoyant. All the way Stanley had sought to sustain their
courage by many promises both of rewards and assurances that the hardships
would soon be at an end. His words were always, "Cheer up, boys, it is only
a short distance to the station where we shall find plenty." Thus so cheerful
did he always himself appear, as did also his lieutenants, that the influence on
the carriers was such as to keep them on the march. To turn back and go
again through the desert wilderness was not to be thought of, hence the men
(516)
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINEN'T 517
could hardly consider any other alternative than that which lay before them, but
many more would no doubt have fallen exhausted by the way had not Stanley
appealed to their courage as he did. At one place, however, there was a mu-
tiny which but for Stanley's prompt action in visiting .upon the leader a swift
punishment by his own hand, might have proven quite serious. But when the
leader went down under a blow from the handle of the great leader's axe, the
others, only half persuaded to make resistance, quickly resumed their burdens
and thenceforth continued obediently on..
A show of force is the best preventive of actual violence, and the native
Africans never respect a man so much as the one who shows determination.
§ - ==
a rg 7
> - feces iin iia a> y -l ; :
b - S s e-- _. one
, -- ~ =--. might
f a Cs W\w\m— %
f & e ie ~ Saor £ G
-~ ag ~ <<-- ere "- fik
LJ ® sone
+ R i ---+ -- v k-
f pam a a> .. fll
« ai f - r : hees = z
* - reas oy pmo orem ear eos
thee o a ims & ernans tin
Fal dre nie. cq uaa Z ear aas, "ts Teg #
# a. t. __ e>
n ne ug. me nle de densa tac
STARVATION PRECIPITATES A SCRAMBLE. e
'This knowledge is what induced Stanley to take with him a Maxim gun, quite
as much as the possible need for it. A mere exhibition of its dreadful de-
structiveness would serve to over-awe the natives, and therefore Stanley had not
really expected to have to put it to a deadly use, unless it should be necessary
against well-armed and hostile Arabs, who it was not unlikely would be met,
or against the Mahdi's forces who were believed to have Emin Pasha a prisoner.
But with his keen perception of every situation, and his great forbearance,
518 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
Stanley was not forced to slaughter the natives, and drove his way through the
darkest regions with a very small sacrifice of human life.
CHARGE OF A MAD BUFFALO.
As the expedition reached the hills that overlook the great lake basin,
which is about twenty-five miles wide, game began to appear, and to procure a
, i
See
een ae
sss 4 (>-
\\ e
Sy
\~\
supply of fresh meat, a hunting party was. organized to make a drive among
the buffaloes, several of which had been seen. 'The main force, and the carriers,
continued on the route, while Stanley, Nelson and Parke, with a dozen beaters,
started on the hunt, intending to move parallel with the marching caravan.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 519
They had covered several miles before a herd was discovered in a position
favorable for an attack, as they did not wish to be led away any considerable
A
(w
‘,‘\D.\\\ $19.
wy
dram ati it
¢
%
jus
W
7
<2
plary,
- \
N\ \\
AQ
\; ay «B
el ®
L7 Pox a
amin
2 wm.
Z,
/// j, f _?/1
F tiv « P
¥ Z e> ~
”7 F5: a s
7 fz. # 2 aa) a
s 45/1/17" ezra josh N /
// ";-$¢'?/// , + f ‘ af (£6 01“) I \\' 7
s ’{-./v/'§'/’l 7 [1,051 N i‘yflllr
{/f UN
e ope A]]! M!!! **
A BUFFALO'S MAD CHARGE.
distance from the column.
f At length a drove was descried less thin a mile
off to the right, and the beaters were sent out to get on the far side and drive
them in. They accomplished their purpose so well that the buffaloes headed
520 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT:
directly for the hunters who had dropped down in the grass out of sight: of the
game. On they came at great speed until within a few yards, when the three
hunters rose up and delivered. a> volley that killed two -cows. and severely
wounded a bull.. But the latter kept on at a thunderous pace and, as if blinded
by its wound, drove directly for the column of carriers:. 'The mad animal was
discovered when it was perhaps a hundred yards off, when immediately there
was an excitement that did not wait for the order to break ranks. Every man
for the motnent. was an independent out of file and the burried manner of their
wild, distracted retreat was as laughable to the disinterested. spectator; as it was
serious to those in flight. Burdens were dropped with extraordinary prompt-
ness and each man prepared to climb who could find a tree, while others just.
ran any way under an impromptu call to find another place. 'The bull perhaps
never thought of making an attack, though its lowered head and high-flying
tail certainly looked very dangerous, but it passed on through the broken ranks
and out of sight without making any other demonstration.
LOOK OUT FOR THE RHINOCEROS !
Most singular to relate, on the next day the experience with the wounded
buffalo was repeated almost identically with a black rhinoceros. 'The hunters
had been shooting antelopes, when a rhinoceros was jumped, at which Parke
made a shot bringing the animal to its knees, the bullet having no doubt struck
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 521
the animal in the shoulder; but on the next instant it was up again and
became a target for Stanley, who fired an ineffectual shot, which struck it too
high on the back to penetrate the armor-like hide. The rhinoceros now had
his anger up, but instead of turning to attack, which they seldom do, tore away
and went " whoof-whoofing" towards the moving column, less than half a mile
distant. The scare of the preceding day was yet fresh, and the sight of a charg-
ing rhinoceros filled the cavalcade with a terror which may not even be con-
ceived, much less described. Down went the packs with the violence of extreme
haste, and away went the carriers with a swiftness truly astonishing, every man
for himself in tumultuous eagerness to reach safety first. 'The animal, seeing
his supposed enemy in retreat, took courage and tossed one of the bundles on
his horn, but did no further damage, taking himself off into the brush with this
'single exhibition of his temper.
3 _ A DISAPPOINTMENT.
At length Stanley and his party sighted Lake Albert, and the end of the
toilsome and perilous journey was at an end, at least for the time being." . Inf
Stanley's letter, found on preceding pages, is contained a de few
facts which Stanley has since reported by private letter.. His men were so
overjoyed at the sight of the lake, where food and rest were promised, that
regardless of their heavy burdens the cartiers ran at their top speed. and as
the day was very hot, some of them actually sped down the hill and into
the lake, so eager were they for the relaxation and enjoyment which its
clear L001 waters offered. A stop was made of some hours on the banks,
«during which the entire expedition, of men women and children, indulged the
incomparable pleasure of a delightful bath, in which the interest was so charm-
~ing that every past misery was forgotten.
a. ' A RETURN TO THE ARUWIML
After sporting in the refreshing waters for a time the expedition entered
Kavalli and remained there for nearly two weeks, Stanley all the while using
every possible effort to procure boats to go on to Wadelal and hoping all the
while that news of his arrival would reach Emin and result in a meeting. -
But as Stanley has so graphically reported, all his efforts and hopes were in
vain so that there appeared to be nothing for him to do but retrace his steps
to Banalaya, on the Aruwimi, (also called the Ituri) river where he had left
his steel steam launch, as that was the only craft that could be obtained.
_Jephson had been sent on with an escort, by land, to Wadelai, which was known
to be Emin's headquarters, some time before, and Stanley felt that by communi-
cating a knowledge of his proximity to Albert Lake and his purpose to afford
relief, that Emin would send one of his steamers to Kavalli to await him. In
this belief, Stanley gave direction to a Kavallis chief to report his intentions
(522)
A WILD RUSH INTO THE LAKE.
4
f
€
%
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 523
and then prepared to plunge again into the wilderness which promised a repeti-
tion of all the perils and dreadful hardships through which he had just passed.
His carriers were only induced to accompany him by his agreement to pay
them very large rewards and by threats of punishment in case of their
refusal. '
-This return journey was accomplished in the manner already partly told, as
also the third march which took him back to Yambuya in search of the rear
column. 'To the descriptions previously given, however, I am permitted to add
further particulars from Stanley letters just to hand.
- After Stanley's return to Kavalli with the steam launch he still was un-
able to reach Emin, because in the mean time Emin had been to that station
and went away almost immediately without informing the Kavalli chief of his
intended destination, and particularly because reliable information, in the form
of letters from Jephson reached chim giving a brief account of a Mahdi upris-.
ing that had occurred in the mean time which had resulted in the capture of:
both Emln and Jephson, who were then held prisoners at Wadelai. Stanleysv
force at Kavalli was too small to cope with so powerful an antagonist as the
Mahdi, so he hurriedly left Kavalli again for Yambuya to bring up the rear
éoluifmn, with which additional force he hoped to be able to effect- a resceue
of Emm and Jephson, even should a battle be necessary.
' DEPLORABLE CONDITION OF THE REAR COLUMN. |
Writing. from a village called Kaffurro, on the Kaggagwe river, A branch
of the Aruwimi, Stanley says: "My last report was sent off by Salim Beham-
mod~in the latter part of September, 1888. Over a year full of stirring events
have taken place since then. I will endeavor to inform you what kas occurred.
When we reached the camp, after great privations, but nothing to what we
were afterwards to endure, we found the 102 of the yet remaining members of
the rear column in a most deplorable condition. I doubted whether 50 of them.
would live to reach the lake; but having collected a large number of canoes,
the goods and sick men were transported in these vessels in such a smooth and
expeditious manner that there were remarkably few casualties in the rear col-
umn. But wild natives, having repeatedly defeated the Ugarrowas raiders and
by this discovered the extent of their own strength, gave considerable trouble
and inflicted considerable loss among our best men, who had always to bear
the brunt of the fighting and the fatigue of the paddling. However, we had
no reason to be dissatisfied with the time we had made. When progress by
river became too tedious and difficult, an order to cast off canoes was given.
'This was four day's journey above the Ugarrowas Station, or about 300 miles
above Banalaya. We decided that as the south bank of the Itura River was
pretty well known to us it would be best to try the north bank, although we
should have to traverse for some days the despoiled lands whlch had been a
common centre to the Ugarrowwas and Kilongalangas bands of raiders. We
were about a hundred miles from grassland, which opened up a prospect of fu-
rptese
4
¢
i
&
h
&
THE EXPEDITION INDULGES§ IN A BATH.
as
stam
Eovandt
I,
i
#, f
po ofm *
_ 3
( fQ§x wef aN
K aflfihfi/‘Qwfi Va‘fimmv “a, Aw
(524)
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. - 525
ture feasts of beef, veal and mutton, and a pleasing variety of vegetables, as
well as oil and butter for cooking. . .
On October 30, having cast off the canoes, the land march began in earn-
est, and we two days later discovered a large plantation in charge of: Dwars.
The people flung themselves on the plantains to make as large a provision as
possible for the dreaded wilderness ahead. 'The most enterprising always
secured a fair share, and twelve hours later would be furnished with a week's pro-
vision of plantain flour. The feeble and indolent revelled for the. time. being
on an abundance of roasted fruit, but always neglected providing for the future,
and thus became victims to famine after moving from this place. Ten days
lost - between
Banalaya and
Ugarrowwa's.
S MA L L - P O X
AND OTHER
SsUFFERINGS. § f
adanac tim 6why W;
Small-pox === s . UOP lus » t
broke out Ef gs yon, i outs
among the
Many uem a,
and the mor-
tality was ter-
fible: Qur
Zanzibaris es-
caped the pest,
however, ow-
ing - to: the
vaccination
they had un-
dergone . on
board . the |
Madura. We e gf 'A DWARIS VILLAGE.
were now about four days' march above the confluence of the Thura and Ituri
rivers, and within about a mile from Ishuru. - As there was no possibility - of
crossing this violent tributary of the Ituri or Aruwimi, we had to follow its
right bank until a crossing could be discovered. Four days later we stumbled
across the principal village of the district, called Andikumu. It was sur-
rounded by the finest plantation of bananas and plaintains we had yet seen,
which all the Manyuemas habit of spoliation and destruction had been unable
to destroy.. 'There our people, after starving during fourteen days, gorged
themselves to such excess that it contributed greatly to lessen our numbers.
5260 HEROES OF 'THE DARK CGCONTINENE:
Every twentieth individual suffered from some complaint which entirely in-
capacitated him for duty. |
The Thuru River was about four miles south-southeast from this place,
flowing from east-north-east. It was about sixty yards broad and deep owing
to heavy rains. -From Andikumn six days' march brought us to another
flourishing settlement, called Indeman, situated about four hours' march from
a river supposed to be the Thuru. Here I was considerably nonplussed by a
‘ grievous -- discrep-
ancy between native
accounts and my
own - observations.
The natives called
it the Thuru River,
and my instru-
ments and chfono-
meter made :it very
evident it could not
be the Ihuru.'. We
knew finally. After
capturing. some
Dwaris we discov-
ered it was the right
branch.: of-
Ihuru, called the
DPDurt River, this
agreeing with my
own views. We
searched and found
a place where we
could build a bridge
across. - Bonny and
our Zanzibari chief
threw - themselves
into the. work, and
in a few hours the
Dura River - was
safely bridged. We
passed from Inde-
mau into a district entirely unvisited by Manynema.". Here the writer de-
scribes daily conflicts with the Wambutti dwarfs, which he found very numer-
ous in this region, which have already been noticed. 'The Wambuttis clung to
the north-east route, which Stanley wanted to take; accordingly he went south-
east and followed elephant tracks.
DWARIS WOMEN.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 527
- He says: But on December 9 we were compelled to halt for forage in the
middle of a vast forest at a spot indicated by my chart to be not more than two
or three miles from Ituri River, which many of our people had seen. While
we resided at Fort Bodo I sent 150 rifles back to a settlement that was fifteen
miles back on the route we had come, while many Manyuema followers also
undertook to follow them. I quote from my journal part of what I wrote on
December 14, the sixth day of the absence of the foragers : Six days have trans-
pired since our foragers left us. For the first four days the time passed rapidly,
I might say pleasantly, being occupied in recalculating my observations from
Ugarrowwa's to Lake Albert down to date, owing to a few discrepancies here
and there, which my second and third visit and duplicate and triplicate observa-
tions enabled me to correct. My occupation then ended. I was left to wonder
why the large band of foragers did not return.
ON THE BRINK OF STARVATION.
On the fifth day, having distributed all the stock of flour in camp, and
having killed the only goat we possessed, I was compelled to open the officers'
provision box and take a pound pot of butter, with two cupfuls of my flour,
to make an imitation gruel, there being nothing else save tea, coffee, sugar and
a 'pot of sago in the boxes. In the afternoon a boy died and the condition of
the majority of the rest was most disheartening. Some could not stand, falling
down in the effort to do so. 'These constant sights acted on my nerves until I
began to feel not only moral but physical sympathy, as though the weakness -
was contagious. Before night a Mahdi carrier died. 'The last of our Somalis
gave signs of a collapse and the few Soudanese with us were scarcely able: to
move. . When the morning of the sixth day dawned we made broth with the
usual pot of butter, an abundance of water, a pot of condensed milk and a cupful
of flour for 130 people. ” f |
| CALLING A COUNCIL.
The chiefs and Bonny were called to a council. At my suggestion of a
reverse to the foragers of such a nature as to exclude our men from returning
with news of the disaster, they were altogether unable to comprehend such a
possibility. They believed it possible that these 150 men were searching for
food, without which they would not return. 'They were asked to consider the
supposition that they were five days searching for food, without which they would
not return, and then had lost the road, perhaps, or, having no white leader,
had scattered to loot goats and had entirely forgotten their starving friends and
brothers in the camp. What would be the state of the 130 people five days
hence? Bonny offered to stay with ten men in the camp if I provided ten days'
food for each person while I would set - out to search for the missing men.
Food, to make a light cupful of gruel for ten men for ten days, was not difficult
to procure, but the sick and feeble remaining must starve unless I met good
fortune, and accordingly a store of buttermilk, flour and biscuits was prepared
528 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
and handed over to the charge of Bonny. In the afternoon of the seventh day
we mustered everybody besides the garrison of the camp, ten men.
f ' SEARCHING FOR THE MISSING.
Sadia, . Manyuema chief, surrendered" fourteen of his men to- their doom.
Kibbobora, another chief, abandoned his brother, and Fundi1, another Manyuema
chief, left one of his wives and her little boy. We left twenty-six feeble and
sick wretches, already past all hope unless food could be brought them within
twenty-four hours:. In. a. cheery tone, though my Heart was never heavier, I
told the forty-three hunger-bitten people that I was going back to hunt for the
missing men. . We travelled nine miles that afternoon, having passed several
'dead people on the road ; and early on the eighth day of their absence from
camp we met them marching in an easy fashion. ~But when we were met the
pace was altered, so that in twenty-six hours from leaving starvation camp. we
were back with an abundance around us of gruel and porridge, boiling bananas,
boiling plantains, roasting meat and simmering soup. - 'This had 'been my nearest
approach to absolute starvation in all -my African experience. - Altogether,
twenty-one persons succumbed in this dreadful camp. ‘ ' l
. LETTERS FROM JEPHSON.
On :the umited expedltlon continued the march eastward and
as we now had to. work by.relays, owing to the fifty extra: :loads; we. did not
reach the Iturt ferry,. which. was: our last camp in the forest region: before
emerging on grass land, until January 9. My anxiety about Mr.. Jephson and
Emin would not permit me to dawdle on the road, making double trips in this
manner,; so, selecting a rich plantation and a good camp east -of the Tturi River,
I left Stairs in command with 124 people, including Parke and Nelson, and on
January "tr I. continued. 'my march .eastward. . The people of the plains, feating
a repetition of. the fighting of Deceniber, 1887, flocked to the camp 'as" we
advanced and formally tendered their submission, agreeing to the contributions
and supplies. . The blood-brotherhood was entered into, the exchange of gifts was
made and a firm friendship established. 'The huts of our camp were constructed
by natives, and food, fuel and water were brought to the expedition as soon as
a halting place was decided on. We heard no news of white men on Take
Albert from the people until on the 16th, at a place called (Gevaris. Messen-
gers from Kavalli came with a packet of letters with one letter written on three
several dates, with several days' interval between, from Jephson, and two notes
from Emin, confirmmg the news in Jephson's You can but imagine the :
interest and surprise I felt while reading the letters by giving you extracts
from them in Jephson's own words : Ansa mes
~ - "DurriL1, NovEmBEr, 7th, 1588.
_._ "DrEar Sir: I am writing to tell you the position of affairs in this country,
and I trust the letter will be delivered to you at Kavalli in time to warn you
to be careful.. On August 18th a rebellion broke out here and the Pasha and
I were made prisoners. 'The Pasha is a complete prisoner, but I am allowed
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 529
to go about the station, but my movements are watched. 'The rebellion has
been got up by some half-dozen Egyptians-officers and clerks-and gradually
others joined, some through inclination, but most through fear. 'The soldiers,
with tlie exception ol those at Labore, have never taken.part in it, but. have
quietly given in to their officers. When the Pasha and I "were on our way to
Regal, two men, one an officer, Abdul Vaal Effendi, and the other a. clerk -
went about and told to the people they had seen you, and that you were only
an adventurer, and had not come from Egypt; the letters you brought: from
the Khedive and Nubar were forgeries; that it was untrue Khartoum had fallen,
and that the Pasha and you, had made a plot to take them, their wives and
children out of the country and hand them over as slaves to the English.
Pp mfg/k INQ
Ws U \\ '( \
\
4 4M
f \p) t
)
fig),
4. "9,
#A)
aM
l a
", \\\\‘ m
myt WNM || Nee:
lp" <
# [
<
ONE OF EMIN'S IRREGULARS DESPERSING A PARTY OF REBELS.
Such words in an ignorant, fanatical country like this acted like fire among the
people, and the result was a general rebellion, and we were made prisoners.
'The rebels then collected the officers from the different stations and held a
large meeting here to determine what measures they should take, and all those
who did not join the movement were so insulted and abused that they were
obliged for their own safety to acquiesce in what was done.
THE VICTORIOUS MAHDL
"The Pasha was deposed and those officers suspected of being friendly 'to
him were removed from their posts, and those friendly to the rebels were put
in their places. It was decided to take the Pasha as a prisoner to Regaf, and
34
530 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
some of the worst rebels were even for putting him in irons, but the officers
were afraid to put their plans into execution, as the soldiers said they - imever
would permit any one to lay a hand on him. Plans were also made to entrap
you when you returned and strip you of all you had. Things were in this
condition when we were startled by the news that the Mahdi's people had ar-
rived at Lado with three steamers and nine sandals and nuggers and had es-
tablished themselves on the site of the old station. Omar Sall, their general,
sent up three peacock dervishes with a letter to the Pasha demanding the in-
stant surrender of the country. 'The rebel officers seized them and put them
in prison and decided on war. After a few days the Mahdists attacked and
captured Regaf, killing five officers and numbers of soldiers and taking many
women and children prisoners, and all the stores and ammunition in the station
were lost. 'The result of this was a general stampede of the people from the
station of Brodons Kirri and Muggi, who fled with their women and children
to Labore, abandoning almost everything. At Kirri the ammunition was aban-
doned, and was seized by natives. 'The Pasha reckons that the Mahdists num-
ber about 1,600. 'The officers and a large number of soldiers have returned to
Muggi and intend to make a stand against the Mahdists. Our position here
is extremely unpleasant, for since the rebellion all is chaos and confusion.
There is no head, and half a dozen conflicting orders are given every diy 'And"
no one obeys. 'The rebel officers are wholly unable to control the soldiers.
The Baris have joined the Madhists. If they come down here with a rush
nothing can save us. - f .
"The officers are all frightened at what has taken place and are anxiously
awaiting your arrival and desire to leave the country with you, for they are
now really persuaded that Khartoum has fallen and that you have come from
the Khedive. We are like rats in a trap. 'They will neither let us act Hor
retire, and I fear, unless you come very soon, you will be too late and our fate
will be like that of the rest of the garrisons of the Soudan. Had this rebel:
lion not happened the Pasha could have kept the Mahdists in check some
time, but now, he is powerless to act. I would suggest, on your arrival at
Kavallis, that you write a letter in Arabic to Shukri Aga, Chief of the
station, telling him of your arrival and telling him you wish to see the Pasha
and myself. Write also to the Pasha or myself telling us what number' of
men you have with you. It would perhaps be better to write to me, as a letter
to him might be confiscated. Neither the Pasha nor myself think there is the
slightest danger now of any attempt to capture you, for the people are now
fully persuaded that you have come from Egypt and they look to you to get
them out of their difficulties. Still it would be well for you to make your
camp strong. If we are not able to get out of the country, please remember
me to my. friends, etc. Yours faithfully, f g
"JEPHSON."
At the time the above letter was written a messenger could not be obtained
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 51I
to carry it over the route to meet Stanley, who was known to be returning to ths
Lake, and Jephson therefore had opportunity to add two postscripts giving ampler
details of the troubles by which they had been surrounded, and also to convey
the pleasanter information of Emin's release. He therefore added the follow-
ing, under date of November 4th.
RELEASE OF EMIN, BUT SAD FOREBODINGS.
"Shortly after I had written you the soldiers were led by their officers to
attempt to retake Regaf, but the Mahdists defended it and killed six officers
and a large number of soldiers. Among the officers killed were some of the
Pasha's worst eneimics. The soldiers in all the stations were so panmi¢-stricken
and angry at what happened that they declared they would not attempt to
fight unless the Pasha was set at liberty. So the rebel officers were obliged
to free him and sent him to Wadelai where he is free to do as he pleases, but
at present he has not resumed authority in the country. He is, I believe, by
fo.. means. anxious to 'do sb,. We Rope in a-dfew days to be at
Station on the lake, two days by steamer from Nsabe, and I trust when we
hear of your arrival that the Pasha himself will be able to come down with
me to see you. We hear that the Mahdists sent steamers to. Khartoum for
re-enforcements. If so they cannot, be up here for another six weeks. If they
come up here with re-enforcements it will be all up with us, for the soldiers
will never stand against them, and it will be a mere walk-over. Every one is
anxiously looking for your arrival, for the coming of the Mahdists has com- -
pletely cowed them. We may just manage to get out if} you do not come
later than the end of December, but it is entirely impossible to foresee what
will happen."
Jephson's second postscript dated December 18th, reads :
"Mogo, the messenger, not having started I send a second postscript. We
were not at Tanguru on November 15. 'The Mahdists surrounded Duffili station
and besieged it for four days. 'The soldiers, of whom there are about 500,
managed to repulse them and they retired to Regaf their headquarters, as
they have sent down to Khartoum for re-enforcements and doubtless will
attack again when strengthened. In our flight from Wadelai, the officers
requested me to destroy our boats and the advances. I therefore: broke it
up.. Duffili is being renovated as fast as possible. The Pasha is unable to
move hand or foot as there is still a very strong party against him, as officers
are no longer in immediate fear of the Mahdists. Do not on any account come
down to us at my former camp on the lake near Kavallis Island, but make
your camp at Kavallis on the plateau above. Send a letter directly you arrive
there, and as soon as we hear of your arrival I will come to you. I will not
disguise facts from you that you will have a difficult and dangerous work be-
fore you in dealing with the Pasha's people. I trust you will arrive before the
Mahdists are re-enforced or our case will be desperate. Yours faithfully,
" JEPHSON."
532 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
STANLEY'S LETTER IN REPLY TO JEPHSON.
Stanley immediately returned a reply to Jephson's letter by the messengers,
in which he wrote: " Be wise, be quick, and waste no-time.. Bring Buila and
your own Soudanese with you. I have read your letters half a dozen times
over, but fail to grasp the situation thoroughly, because in some important -
details one letter contradicts the other. In one you say the Pasha is a close
prisoner, while you are allowed a certain amount of liberty. In the other you
say you will come to me as soon as you hear of our arr1val here, and 'I trust,
you say, ' that the Pasha will be able to accompany me. Bemg prisoners, I
fail to see how you could leave Tanguru at all. All this is not very clear to
us, who are fresh from the bush. If the Pasha can come, send a courier on
your arrival at your camp on the lake below here to announce the fact and I
will send a strong detachment to escort him to the plateau; even to carry him
if he needs it. I-feel too exhausted alter my. 1300 miles of travel since} I
parted from you last May to go down to the lake again. 'The Pasha must
have some pity for me. Don't be alarmed or uneasy on our account.. Nothing
hostile can approach us within twelve miles without my knowing it. I am in
the thickest of a friendly population and if I sound a war note, within four
hours I can have 20006 warriors to assist me to repel any force disposed to
violence, and if it is to be a war, why then I am ready for the cunningest
Arab alive. I have read your letter a half-dozen' times and my opiuion of
% you varies with each reading. Sometimes I fancy you are half Mahdist or
Arabist, then Eminist. I shall be wiser when I see you. Now, don't you be
perverse, but obey and let my order to you be as a frontlet between the eyes,
and all, with God's gracious help, will end well. I want to help the Pasha
somehow, but he must also help me and credit me.'
FASCINATED BY THE SOUDAN. 3
"On January 16th," says Stanley, "I received with this batch of letters
two notes from the Pasha himself, confirming the above. But not a word from
either Jephson or the Pasha indicating the Pasha's purpose; did he still waver
or was he at last resolved? With any man than the Pasha or Gordon one
would imagine that being a prisoner and a fierce enemy hourly expecting to
give the coup mortal, he would gladly embrace the first chance to escape from
the country given up by his government. But there was no hint in the letters
what course the Pasha would follow. 'These: few hints of mine, however, will
throw some light on my postscript, which here follows, and of my state of mind
after reading these letters. I wrote a formal letter, which might be read by
any person, Pasha, Jephson or any of the rebels, and addressed it to. Jephson,
as requested, but on a separate sheet of paper. after we reached Kavalli's, I wrote
a private postscript for Jephson's perusal as follows :
Jan. 18, 3. P. 6
"My DrEar Sir:-I now send thirty rifles and Kavilli's men down to the -
lake with my letters, with my urgent instructions that a canoe should be set
-
n ao i no note moron
3
)
(533
WOMEN AT KAVALLI.
NATIVE BOAT
534 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
off. I may be able to stay longer than six days here, perhaps ten. I will do
my best to prolong my stay until you arrive, without rupturing the peace.
Our people have a good store of beads and couriers' clothes, and I notice that
the natives trade very easily, which will assist Kavalli's resources should he get
uneasy under our prolonged visit. Should we get out of this trouble, I am his
most devoted servant and friend; but if he hesitates again, I shall be plunged
in wonder and perplexity. I could save a dozen pashas if they were willing to
be saved. I would go on my knees and implore the Pasha to be sensible of his
own case. He is wise enough in all things else, even for his own interest. Be
kind and good to him for his many virtues, but do not you be drawn into the
fatal fascination the
«Soudan territory
seems to have for all
Europeans 'in' lite
years. As'they! touch
its ground they seem
to 'be drawn into a
whirlpool, > ~wh ich
sucks. and
devours them» with
its waves.. 'The-only
way to avoid it isto
obey: ¢ blindly,;+sde:
votedly> and unques-
tionably - all: orders
from - the - outside..
The committee said :
''Relieve Emin with -
this ammunition. If
he wishes to come
out, the ammunition
<- e-- --&& _ will- enable "Hin: to
THE COURIER TAKING EMIN'S LETTER. do so. If he elects
l
Qe r
G f
( \ \|/777%/{/ ll n
Io > /////,/ JIM}
to stay, it will be of service to him.' 'The Khedive said the same thing, and
added that if the Pasha and his officers wished to stay they could do so on their
own responsibility. Sir Evelyn Baring said the same thing in clear, decided
words, and here I am after 4100 miles' travel with the last installment of relief.
Let him who is authorized to take it, take it and come. I am ready to lend
him all my strength and will assist him, but this time there must be no hesita-
tion, but positive yea or nay, and home we go.
" Yours sincerely,
"STANLEY,"
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTEINENT 535
THE ARRIVAL OF JEPHSON.
In the course of his correspondence Mr. Stanley says: "On February 6
Jephson arrived in the afternoon at our camp at Kavalli's. I was startled to
hear Jephson, in plain, undoubting words, say : Sentiment is the Pasha's worst
enemy. No one keeps Emin back but Emin himself" . This is the summary
of what Jephson learned during the nine months from May 25, 1888, to February
6, 1889. I gathered sufficient from Jephson's verbal report to conclude that during
nine months neither the Pasha, Casati nor any man in the province had arrived
nearer any other conclusion than what was told us ten months before. However,
the diversion in our favor created by the Mahdist's invasion and the dreadful
slaughter they made of all they met inspired us with hope that we could get a
definite answer at last. Though Jephson could only say: 'I really. can't tell
you what the Pasha means to do. He says he wighes to go away, but will
not move. - No one will move. It is impossible to say what any man will do.
Perhaps another advance by the Mahdists will send them all pell- mell towalds
you, to 'be again irresolute and requiring several weeks' rest." _
COURIER FROM-EMIN. earnt sept ls
Stanley next describes how he had already sent orders to mass the whole of
his forces ready for contingencies. He also speaks of the suggestions he made
to Emin as to the best means of joining him, insisting upon something definite ;
otherwise it would be his (Stanley's) duty to destroy the ammunition and march
homeward. He continues: " February 13 a native courier appeared in camp with
a letter from Emin, and with the news that he was actually at anchor Just below
our plateau camp. But this is his formal letter to me, dated the 13th:
"
dég_"f3 /min.=north if |-**;-.*~
I recollect rightly. . 'The é}; l; nei "
centre of Mbakovia ter- WAKONJU MAN AND WOMAN.
race bears 1 deg. 21 min. 30 sec. magnetic from my first point of observa-
tion. 'This will make his Vacovia about I deg. 15 min. 45 sec., allowing
ro deg. west variation.
"In trying to solve the problem of the infinity of Lake Albert, as sketched
by Baker, and finding that the lake terminus is only four miles south of where
he stood to view it 'from a little hill" and on 'a beautiful clear day," one would
w
Rt
///
540 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
feel almost justified in saying he had never seen the lake. But his position of
Vacovia proves that he actually was there, and the general correctness of his outline
of the east coast of Vacovia to Magungo also proves that he navigated the lake.
VIEWS ABOUT LAKE ALBERT AND MOUNT RUEWENZORL
"When we turn our faces north-east we say that Baker had done exceedingly
well; but when we turn them south-
ward our senses in vain try to pene-
trate the mystery, because our eyes
see not what: Baker: saw.. With
Lieut. _Stairs, Mounteney Jephson,
Surgeon Parke, Emin Pasha, Capt.
Casati, I look with my own eyes upon
the-stene. -I find Baker has made
an error. I am somewhat surprised
also at Baker's altitudes of Lake
Albert and the Blue Mountains, and
J at. the breadth attributed by him' to
the lake. 'The shore opposite Vacovia
is ten and a quarter miles distant, not
forty or fifty miles. 'The Blue Moun-
g tains are nothing else but. a vast
&) upland, the highest cone or hill be-
{E] ing not above 6000 feet above the
level of the sea.. Tlie altitude of
Lake Albert. by the aferoid and the
boiling point will not exceed 2350
feet. f
*Last of all, away to. the south-
f) west, where he has sketched his in-
() finite stretch of the lake, there rises
about forty miles from Vacovia an
immense snowy mountain, a solid,
square-browed mass with an almost
level summit between two lofty ridges.
If it was a beantifully clear day he
should have seen this, being neater
to it by thirteen. geogtaphical miles
than I was. ‘
- - "About the lake discovered by
A WANYANKORI PARADING HIS BRAVERY. mein 1876 I can learn very Aittle from
the natives. At the chief of Kavalli's I saw two natives who came from that region.
One of them hailed from Unyampaka and the other from Usongora. The first
said that the Albert Lake is much larger than that near Unyampaka. 'The other
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 541
said that the southern lake is the larger, as it takes two days to cross it. He
describes it as being a month's march from Kavalli's. Their accounts differ so
much that one is almost tempted to believe that there are two lakes, the smaller
one near Unyampaka and connected by a river or channel with that of
Usongora.
"My interest is greatly excited, as you may imagine, by the discovery of
Ruewenzori, the snowy mountain, and a possible rival of Kilima Njaro.
Remember that we are in north latitude, and that this mountain must be near
or on the Equator itself; that it is summer now, and that we saw it in the latter
part of May; that the snow line was estimated at about 1600 feet below the
summit. _ &
'* Hence, I conclude that it is not Mount Gordon Bennett, seen in December,
1876-though it may be so-which the natives said had only snow occasionally.
At the time I saw the latter there was .
no snow visible. It is a little further
east, according to the position I gave
it, than Ruewenzori. All questions
which this mountain naturally gives
rise to will be settled, I hope, by this
expedition before it returns to the sea.
~If at all near my line of march,
its length,. height and local history
will be ascertained. Many rivers will
be found to issue from this curious
land between the two Muta Nziges.
What rivers are they? Do they be-
long to the Nile or the Congo? 'There
is no river going east or south-east
from this section except the Katonga
and Kafur, and both must receive, if
any, but a very small supply - from _4& 2 iJ
Mount Gordon Bennett and the tam cmmer's amussmurnt wir stantry's
Ruewenzori. The new mountain must, tis
therefore, be drained principally south and west; if south, the streams have
connection with the lake south; if west, Semiliki, a tributary of Lake Albert,
and some river flowing to the Congo must receive the rest of its waters. T hen,
if the lake south receives any considerable supply the interest deepens. Does
the lake discharge its surplus to the Nile or the Congo? If to the former then
it would be of great interest to you, and you will have to admit that Lake Victoria®
is not the main source of the Nile. If to the Congo, then the lake will be the
source of the River Lowa or Loa, since it is the largest tributary to the Congo
from the east between the Aruwimi and Luama.
"For your comfort I will dare to venture an opinion even now that the lake
542 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINEN'E.
is the source of the Lowa, though I know nothing positive of the matter; but I
infer from the bold manner in which the Aruwimi trenches upon the domain that
any one would have imagined that it belonged to the Nile.: It was only ten
minutes' march between the head of one of its streams to the crest of the plateau
whence we looked down upon Albert N'yanza. From the mouth of Aruwimi to
the head of this stream are 390 geographical miles in a straight line. - Well, next
to the Aruwimi in size is the Lowa River, and from the mouth of the Lowa to
the longltude of Ugampaka Post, 111 a dlrect line, it is only 240 geographical mlles
. '* ¥ ours, very smcerely,
STANLEY,"
DISAPPOINTMENTS CROWD FAST ON ONE ANOTHER.
The next letter received from Stanley reads as follows:
"I reached the Albert N'yanza from Banalaya for the third time in 140
days, and found out that
Emin and Jephson had
- both _- been -~ prisoners
since the 18th of August,
1888, being the day
after I made the -dis:
covery that Barttelot's
caravan had been wreck
Sed: The troops 'in the
Equatorial province had
revolted and shaken off
all- allegiance. -~Shortly
'after the:. Mahdists® in-
vaded »the Province.. in
full force. After" the
first battle in May, the
stations yielded and a
panic struck the natives,
who joined the invaders
and assisted in the work
of destruction.
"'The invaders s su0~
sequently - suffered
verses, and dlspatched a steamer to Khartoum for re-enforcements. I found a
letter waiting for me near the Albert Nyanza exposing the dangerous position
of the survivors, and urging the immediate necessity of my arrival before th»
end "of December,. otherwise: it would be too late: F -arrived -there on
of January for the third time.' ~ ‘
Journeying thus back and forth with seemingly endless sufferings, and a
disappointment connected with every return to the Lake, Stanley »became at
VIEW «ON THE SENILIKI RIVER.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 543
iength exasperated, and resolved upon heroic action to prevent his labors from
resulting in failure, which the civilized world might really regard a farce.
Emin was still at Wadelai, and appeared to have no inclination to remove from
that place to join Stanley, though his indefinite letters in reply to Stanley's
requests left it impossible to determine whether he wished to escape or remain.
wily
C
Ta
H
jC.
sulin. zd
NEL
STANLEY BAGGING AN ANTELOPE.
Stanley's anxiety grew greater as the indecision of Emin showed no signs of
changing, and finally led to the transmission of a letter couched in such lan-
guage that it brought a reply from Emin asking Stanley's indulgence for a
time until he could communicate with his people and ascertain whether or not
they desired to leave the Equatorial Province under Stanley's escort. 'This was
the most pointed reply Emin had yet made, although it added little hope to the
544 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT:
situation, for Emin's people were scattered over a large territory, and it would
require months of time to collect them together in the event that they: decided
to leave the country. But Stanley's patience seems to be inexhaustible, and he
concluded to wait, devoting the period of provoking delay to an examination of
the country and to such sport as the great amount of game in the lake districts
afforded.
f A LION HUNT.
Stanley engaged the services of a half-dozen natives who were familiar with
the region to act as beaters, and with Williams, who was an inveterate sports-
man, he enjoyed a season of splendid hunting. Several species of antelopes were
BUFFALO SHOOTING ALONG THE SEMLIKI RIVER
particularly numerous, as were also buffaloes, and these fell to his rifle in great
number. But the hunters thirsted for something more exciting, a desire which was
at length gratified. Lions are scarce on the west side of Albert Lake, but they
are cccasionally seen, and at the time of Stanley's visit some depredations had
been committed which were known to be chargeable to one or more lions, as the
skeletons of bullocks had been found, on the bones of which were unmistakable
tooth-prints of the lordly beast. . Accordingly, arrangements were made to go in
pursuit of the game.: 'The country which they were believed to infest was thor-
oughly examined, but to no avail, and, after beating a district more than twenty
miles in diameter without seeing any evidences of a lion's presence, the hunters
were much discouraged, and would probably have returned but for the alluring
47
rt,
9
y
i
CEF ha
¥
«
Al,
v. € +414".
Sw
Al $
e
ys
a
~CoT
a
s
a fleas“. j
A4
£46 . HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
prospect of the country, which they followed towards the great Ruewenzori
mountain with continual delight at the new wonders that burst one after another
upon their enraptured vision, as will be presently described in one of Stanley's
letters.
At length a villager was met, who gave the hunters the pleasing informa-
tion that two lions had visited the district on the night before, and had been
frightened from the carcass of a giraffe-quite as uncommon in that region as
the lion-which they had more than half devoured. 'This was good news, in-
deed, as the lions were now not only located, but it mlght be certainly depended
upon that they would return to the feast sometime in the night. 'The hunters
accordingly followed a guide to the place where the remains of the carcass lay,
and finding it on the edge of a wooded country, they had no difficulty in seeur-
ing a safe position in neighboring trees.
The moon did not rise until nearly midnight, so that the hunters set up a
piece :of paper on a stick near the carcass, to serve them in definitely docating
the lions in case they made their visit to 'the body while it was) yet-dark.
But this precaut1on was unnecessary, for the hunters spent a very uncomfort-
able four hours in their perches without hearrng any sounds of game whatever.
At length the moon arose in great majesty, flooding the plain and primeval
forest, presenting at once a magnificent and romantic view. A half-hour after-
wards the hunters were greeted with a yet more interesting sight, when they
beheld the forms of no less than three lions, two of which were of immense
size. They made their approach slowly, as 1f expecting an interruption, but-
finding everything still, they came on with more confidence, though the largest
one appeared the most t1n11d evidently taking upon himself the responsibility
of chief watcher. The hunters reserved their fire until two of the great beasts
crouched upon the shoulders of the carcass and began devouring the body. At
this instant two shots rang out almost simultaneously, followed quickly by two
others, and a roaring and growling from two wounded lions that was truly
frlghtful to hear. The one that acted as sentry bounded off, but was evidently
hit in the hind quarters, from the manner in which he dragged his left leg;
another escaped unhurt, but the smallest of the three had been struck by two
bullets and was unable to rise, but it rolled over in agony, clawing at every-
thing in reach, and growling Wlth a savageness that was appalling. From their
perches the hunters poured shot after shot into its body, but apparently to no
effect, nntil at least twenty shots had been . fired before it ceased to -strugole
violently. When at last death was certain, Stanley left his position in the
tree and approached the body, which he found to be bleeding from so many
wounds that the hide was considered useless, every shot, apparently, having
taken effect, and several had passed ent1rely through the body. |
The hunt having terminated so favorably, Stanley and Williams returned
to the camp, bearing as a trophy the head of the royal beast to serve as evi-
dence 'of the truth of their story.
CHAPTER XXIX.
A GREAT HUNT-PREPARATIONS FOR THE HOME JOURNEY,
-4HE success of Stanley's hunt in the regions west of Albert Lake
f led others to attenipt an imitation of his prowess as a hunter,
and the Arab contingent started in quest of the two lions that
had escaped ; but though they were gone more than a week, and
found a great deal of game, including a considerable herd of
elephants they saw no signs of the lions, nor did any of the villagers in the
district where Stanley's successful hunt occurred. Attention was then given
for several days to shooting hippopotami in the Albert Lake, and in the rivers
flowing into it, several being killed and the carcasses glven to the lake natives,
who very greatly enjoy hippopotamus flesh.
About 'the middle of February another hunting party was formed, not so
much for pleasure as for food, since a supply of fresh meat could only be
obtained by purchasing goats of the natives at an exorbitant price, or by shooting
antelopes and buffaloes, which, fortunately, were fairly abundant. Stanley
accompanied the party, carrying a Reilly rifle of large calibre, as it was his
ambition to bag one or more elephants after a sufficient supply of meat had
been secured, and it was his good fortune to meet with success in this desire.
In the regions of the Ruewenzori mountains, south of Albert Lake, is a splendid
range of grass lands, fairly teeming with game of the largest species, and about
the small lakes and ponds, which are not infrequent in that district, elephants
are more numerous than in any other region of Africa, unless it be along the
most fertile stretches of the Congo banks.
"{ was not therefore a difficult matter for Mr. Stanley and his beaters to
find abundant adventure among the vast herds of elephants that make the plains
of this mountainous country their favorite grazing grounds.
| A TERRIFYING SPECTACLE.
The first troop of elephants discovered by the hunters was in an open plateau
near the Rimliki River, where the grass was so high as to cover nearly three-
fourths of their bodies, so that the portions visible bore some resemblance to a
school of giant turtles swimming on the surface of a vast sea of grass; and -
in the distance, the undulations produced by the wind increased the illusion,
making the immense pasturage appear like a vast body of water, rolling wave
after wave towards the shore that lay miles beyond. As both wmd and cover
were favorable, Stanley and his gun-bearers were able to approach the herd
without detection, and to get on their flank, where, in case of a sudden bolt, the
(547)
548 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
elephants would not be likely to run over the hunters, which is really one of
the greatest dangers encountered in stalking these great animals. Whe. in
excellent range, Stanley selected a large tusker and gave it a mortal wound at
the first fire, but the stricken elephant dashed away with the others, and ran
nearly a mule before- it -halted. - from exhaustion.. Tlie 'herd made towards the
jungle on the left, where it was easily followed by sight until all except the
wounded elephant had disappeared in the dense growth. Stanley pushed on in
the wake of the herd until he came near the stricken bull, and then recon
noitered for a position that would enable him to give it a final shot. But the
s i
a ‘u / ‘W/
(AKE, 4
Chl oat
wily
Photoart op
van iy aie ons 20 th ( oot
\ yA Bio- \ lm: SA 4 Y/ P .%/Vh (
Ath g % Ni\ bul? A e AQ] ) a MEE
F: \ \ -= (hig & \ s SSU f w @ | I f \i~ 5 I": fl I Lwt/y/A
Suno asu," a WKU,
s x91 MW 7 Uf wil /l vi .( s #D l '\ Ell' ,//
\ A o - /‘ .‘ a SN s imm SA < l 7 P i"
Ab cessat
das
{\, um
Cop,,
Imt,
\ \\ (s
(]} %
q‘\\« (NM Cee BX} \ N /
\p ALGz slims & . R : g Al T+.
§ A \ is (W, AX N\ i. X $ Sad \‘§: \D -‘_ \\ l gv' \;§ \ >> \\‘ 8 [C /’;/f: xi< 1,1? j
x bss \1\§\\\;\\\\\ A! Alon | iii!”l‘l'l?$~3.vgfif'fi7‘;§ Bs s e ///1 7/4;?";'hl e\
ANTELOPE: SHOOTING IN 'THE SIMLIKI FOREST,
§
elephant was watchful, and while not able to exert itself as before, there was
still sufficient vitality left to make it a dangerous foe. 'The beaters were called.
up, and as they moved forward the elephant again retreated, until it had gained
the forest," where, in apparent exhaustion, it again stopped and trumpeted
shrilly. A fairly close view showed that the great bull had been struck in the
left temple, from which there was a copious flow of -blood that left a well-marked
trail over the two miles which it had now travelled. Stanley continued in
pursu't until he again found his wounded quarry standing under a very large
s
t
{W
uss A
sp
s
32 & \\\\\
al
aSS
a ao \n wet g or dae
/.'.'/ dy
. so
i 3
\) nie Ft i « Am
UX p Mn w nz T
a CH, tr... ts s" > _.. ase
STANLEYS ESCAPE FROM THE CHARGE OF A WOUNDED ELEPHANT.
"4
550 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT:
tree and presenting a spectacle of extraordinary rage, tossing its trunk and head,
frothing at the mouth, waving its tail and, roaring in a voice that startled every-
thing in the forest. 'To shoot at so large an elephant at long range, or without
direction at one of its very few vital spots, would be a mere waste of ammuni-
- tion, so that Stanley gradually approached nearer and nearer in order to secure a
favorable shot; but this effort proved futile, for at a sight of the hunter the great
beast seemed to summon all its remaining strength for a furious charge:; Down
it came, plunging through the brush like a nameless mighty thing pushing
everything before it, marking a route like a cyclone and filling the air with
such shrill trumpetings as pierced the ears and lent frenzy to excitement.
Stanley, being in its path, fired his heavy rifle at the monster's head, but with
no effect other than to bring its anger into yet greater emphasis, and to invite
an attack which the elephant made with an impetuosity truly appalling. After
firing his gun Stanley made a quick retreat, but not so quickly as to throw
the animal from his track, for now he was viciously and pertinaciously pur-
sued. The beaters had scattered in every direction, leaving their master to his
own wits and fortune, which most fortunately served him beneficently. 'The
elephant was gaining rapidly and must surely overtake him, when at the last
moment Stanley leaped to one side and dodged behind a large tree just as the
mighty leviathan went thundering by, blinded with unexampled rage. In
another moment Stanley's rifle was to his shoulder, and another bullet was sent
into the elephant, which now paused and quickly received a third four-ounce
ball in the side of the head near where he was first kit. The first bullet fired
would certainly have proved fatal in a few hours, but it required the fourth shot
to give the great bull his instant quietus. On receiving the last bullet the
great elephant stood still for an instant, then raised his trunk slowly as he
gradually sank down on his forelegs until he plunged heavily forward on his
head, then rolled over on his left side quite dead. He was indeed a fallen
monarch, who had stood nearly eleven feet in height and armed with tusks
which, after extraction, weighed ninety pounds each.
VAST ELEPHANT HERDS IN THE CONGO REGION.
Although the district in which Stanley killed this uncommonly large ele-
phant does not properly belong to the Congo basin, the region is adjoining,
and is a part of the immense grazing lands in which these animals are so
numerous.. Commenting on the great number of elephants in the Congo basin,
and Tipo Tib's enormous collections of ivory, Stanley says:
"Until recently we had heard a great deal about Tipo 'FMib's store of ivory
-an enormous possession. Ward and other officers of the Belgian company
saw it; and some of them counld have related terrible tales of its history.
There were tusks which told their own dark records, blackened with the fire
of the burning villages from which they had been dragged; others stained
by long burial in out-of-the-way places, and only unearthed by their wretched
owners for the ransoming of wives and children. There méfy have been tusks,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT 551
and no doubt there were, which had been obtained in the way of legitimate
trade; but, as actitle, the ivory of the Arab hunter is plunder. -It constitutes
avast store, and of enormous value. - 'There are- said to be about - 200,000 ele-
phants, in about-15,000 herds, in the Congo basin. Each carrying on an aver-
age about fifty pounds of ivory in his head, these represent in the European
market £5,000,000. But of yet greater value than the ivory of Central Africa
is the rubber, palm oil, and orchilla weed which that region produces in most
remarkable abundance. If every warrior living on the immediate banks of the
Congo and its navigable affluents-which are of the aggregate length of 10,800
miles, within easy reach of the trader above Léopoldville-were to pick about a
TWO-HORNED AFRICAN RHINOCEROS.
third of a pound of rubber each day throughout the year, or to melt two-thirds of a
pound. weight of palm oil, and convey it to the trader for sale, £5,000,000
worth of vegetable produce could be obtained without exhaustion of the wild
forest productions. At the same time, although limited as compared with other
products, ivory remains a very valuable article of commerce. If 200 tusks ar-
rived per week at Stanley Pool, or say 520,000 pounds of ivory per annum,
it would still require twenty-five years to destroy the elephants in the Congo
basin, This estimate will enable the reader to realize the value of Tipo Tib's
store, numbering hundreds of tusks, averaging certainly not less than fifty
pounds each in weight."
552 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
Mr. Johnston's experiences on his ascent of the Congo bear out other re-
ports of the "happy hunting ground." 'The elephant seems to be in full and
haughty possession of plain and forest. Canoeing or steaming up the river,
you see, every morning, the previous night's devastations of the elephants, who
oreak and destroy much beautiful vegetation, and often waste more than they
eat. 'They are much more commonly seen during the dry season, at which
time, the smaller streams being exhausted, the elephants have to seek the
Congo for their bath and their drink. "Although they are much more fre-
quently met with above Stanley Pool, still in certain (districts of the lower
river they are common, especially in the cataract region. In the country oppo-
site Isangila elephants were often shot by members of Mr. Stanley's expedi-
tion; and at the Livingstone mission station of Banza Manteka, fifteen miles
from the south bank of the Congo, elephants have at times trooped in long
procession past the door of the mission house, while the awe-stricken mission-
aries shut themselves up securely within." '
PREPARING TO RETURN TO ZANZIBAR. &
When the hunt was concluded with such magnificent success-the game
bagged being twenty-one antelopes, five buffaloes, thirteen springboks, three
zebras, six pallahs, and one elephant-Stanley returned with his party to the
camp, hoping to be able to speedily move with his own and Emin's people
towards home. 'The enforced waiting had not been without very great bene-
fits, for on Stanley's third entry into Kavalli his met were in a pitiable con-
dition from sickness and ulcers, the result of their last hard march, already
described. 'This interval of waiting was employed by Dr. Parke in relieving
the intense sufferings of the afflicted. From the time the expedition left, Fort
Bodo he had attended an average of one hundred sick and afflicted daily. The
effects of this rest and treatment were seen in the fact that wien the expedi-
tion reached Kavalli there were less than 200 fit for service, whereas on
the ist of April there were 280 able-bodied men both ready and willing to
start on the long march to the sea.
Stanley sent his men to assist the. removal of Emin and his people, or
father to bring their effects that had been landed from the steamers,. to. the
plateau camp above Kavalli, from -which. point the start was to- be made.
Selim Bey was sent up to Wadelai to muster the people: about Tangurn and
Duffili, and bring them by steamer to the Kavalli camp, but now the. greater
vexations began, because at the rate that Selim was collecting the Pasha's peo-
ple, it would require three montlis to get them together; besides, the goods
brought down from Wadelai and landed at Kavalli were of a character that
could not possibly be carried so great a distance as lay before them. Without
their effects the people did not want to move, -and. here was at. ounce a dilemma
that exhausted all the vast store of patience that Stanley is credited with.
Emin Pasha had no influence whatever over his people, and with Casati's
efforts to persuade him to remain, the prospects for conducting him out of
HEROES -OF. "IHE DARKK: CONTINENT.. - 553
the country were for a time cheerless indeed. In a few days the Egyptians
in camp promised to leave with Emin and Stanley for the coast, but they soon
changed their minds, after reflecting on the privations of such a march as lay
before them, while the Mahdi enemies were now far away to the north, and
a life of elegant ease was theirs while on the N'yanza Lake.
VIGOROUS MEASURES FOR SUPPRESSING A CONSPIRACY.
Reporting the harassments from which he now suffered, Stanley writes:
olf Os "/ I did not think I should be drawn into this matter at all, having
formed my own plans some time before; but it intensified my feelings greatly
when I was told that, after waiting forty-four days, building their camps for
them, and carrying nearly fourteen hundred loads for them up that high plateau
wall, only a few out of the entire number would follow us. But on the day
after I was informed that there had been an alarm in my camp the night
before; the Zanzibari quarters had been entered by the Pasha's people, and an
attempt made to abstract the rifles. 'This it was which urged me to immediate
action. f
"I knew there had been conspiracies in the camp, that the malcontents
were increasing, that we had many rebels at heart among us, that the people
dreaded the march more than they feared the natives; but I scarcely believed
that they would dare put into practice their disloyal ideas in my camp.
""I proceeded to the Pasha to consult with him, but the Pasha would con-
sent to no proposition-not but what they appeared necessary and good, but he
could not, owing to the want of time, etc. Yet the Pasha the evening before
had received a post from Wadelai which brought him terrible tales of disorder,
distress and helplessness among Selim Bey and his faction, and the rebels and
their adherents. f
"I accordingly informed him that I proposed to act immediately, and would
ascertain for myself what this hidden danger in the camp was, and, as a first
step, I would be obliged if the Pasha would signal for general muster of the
principal Egyptians in the square of the camp.
"The summons being sounded, and not attended to quickly enough to
satisfy me, half a company of Zanzibaris were detailed to take sticks and rout
every one from their huts. Dismayed by these energetic measures, they poured
into the square, which was surrounded by rifles.
"On being questioned, they denied all knowledge of any plot to steal the
rifles from us, or to fight, or to withstand in any manner any order. It was
then proposed that those who desired to accompany us to Zanzibar should step
on one side. 'They all hastened to one side except two of the Pasha's servants.
The rest of the Pasha's people, having paid no attention to the summons, were
secured in their huts, and brought to the camp square, where some were flogged,
and others ironed and put under guard.
"*Now, Pasha,' I said, 'will you be good enough to tell these Arabs that
554 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
these rebellious tricks of Wadelai and Duffili people must cease here; for at the
first move made by them I shall be obliged to exterminate them utterly.
"On the Pasha translating, the Arabs bowed, and vowed that they would .
obey their father religiously. ,
"At the muster this curious result was returned: 'There were with us 134
men, 84 married women, 187 female domestics, 74 children above two years of
age, 35 infants in arms; making a total of 514. I have reason to believe that
the number was nearer 600, as many were not reported from a fear, probably,
that some would be taken prisoners."
« ( /Z
f Q .%,ik={~
CHAPFER XXX.
THE MARCH TO THE SEA.
USTICE to the reputation of Emin Pasha, who has been assailed for
the indifference, perhaps ingratitude, exhibited 'in his couduct
towards Stanley at their first meetings, demands that it be recorded
to his credit that after the march really began, he gave his energies
towards promoting the comfort of all who accompanied the caravan,
and a loyal submission to Stanley as commandant. That he felt a sense of
gratefulness for the relief given we may well believe and which he expressed .
in the following letter : M
"" MSLALA, Angluist 23, 1889.
"Sr reached, under the escort of Mr. Stanley's expedition,
to-day, this place, I cannot but hasten to write just two words to tell you how
deeply we all appreciate the generous help you have sent us. When, in the
stress of adversity, I first ventured to make an appeal to the world asking
assistance for my people, I was well aware of such an appeal not passing
unheard, but I never once fancied the possibility of such kindness as you and
the-subscribers of the Relief Fund have shown us. '
"It would be impossible to tell you what has happened here after Mr.
Stanley's first start; his graphic pen will tell you everything much better than
I could. I hope, also, the Egyptian Government permitting it, some future
day to be allowed to present myself before you, and to express to you then the
feelings of gratitude my pen would be short in expressing in a personal
interview. __ f
"Until such happy moments come, I beg to ask you to transmit to all sub-
scribers of the fund the sincerest thanks of a handful of forlorn people, who,
through your instrumentality, have been saved from destruction, and now hope
to embrace their relatives. 4
"To speak here of Mr. Stanley's and his officers' merits would be inade-
quate. If I live to return I shall make my acknowledgments.
"I am, sir, with many and many thanks,
" Yours very obliged,
» "" Dr. Batts.
"W. Mackinnon, Esq., Chairman of Committee of the
Relief Expedition Fund."
'" On the 10th of April," says Stanley, " we set out from Kavalli in number
about 1500, for 350 native carriers had been enrolled from the district to assist
f (555) f
556 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
in carrying the baggage of the Pasha's people, whose ideas as to what was
essential for the march were very crude. On the 12th we camped at Mazam-
bont's ; but in the night I was'struck down with a severe illness which well-nigh
proved fatal. f
"During my illness-of twenty-eight days-another conspiracy, or rather
several conspiracies were afloat, but only one was attempted to be realized, and
the ringleader of that one, a slave of Awash Effendi's, whom I had made free
at Kavalli, was arrested, and after court-martial, which found him guilty, was
executed. f
THE LOFTY RUEWENZORI RANGE. , C
"'The route I had adopted was one which skirted the Balegga Mountains
at a distance of forty miles or thereabouts from the N'yanza. »The first day was
a fairish path, but the three following days tried our Egyptians sorely, because
of the ups and downs and the breaks of cone-grass. . On arriving at the southern
end of these mountains we were made aware that our march was not to be
uninterrupted, for the King of Unyoro had made a bold push, and had anuexed
a respectable extent of country on the left side of the Semliki River,; which
embraced all the open grass-land between the Semliki River and the forest
region. Thus, without making an immense détour through the forest, which
would have been fatal to most of the Egyptians, we had no option but to press
on, despite Kabba Rega and his Warasura. - 'This latter name is given to the
Wanyoro by all natives who have come in contact with them. alls
"The first day's encounter was decidedly in our. favor, and the effect of it
cleared the territory as far as the Semliki River free of the Warasura.
_©*Meantime we had become aware that we were on the threshold of a region
which promised to be very interesting, for daily, as we advanced to the south-
ward, the great snowy range which had so suddenly arrested our attention and
excited our intense interest (on May 1, 1888) grew larger and bolder into view.
It extended a long distance to the south-west, which would inevitably take us
some distance off our course unless a pass could be discovered to shorten the
distance to the countries south. At Bubhobo, where we had a brief skirmish
with Kabba Rega's raiders, we stood on the summit of the hilly range which
bounds the Semliki Valley on its north-west and south-west sides. On the
opposite side rose Ruewenzori, the Snow Mountain, and its enormous eastern
flank, which dipped down gradually until it fell into the level, and was seem-
ingly joined with the table-land of Unyoro. 'The humpy western flank dipped
down suddenly, as it seemed to us, into lands that we knew not by name as
yet. Between these opposing barriers spread the Semliki Valley-so like a lake
at its eastern extremity that one of our officers exclaimed that it was the lake,
and the female followers of the Egyptians set up a shrill 'Lululus' on seeing
their own lake, the Albert N'yanza, again. With the naked eye it did appear
like the lake, but a field-glass revealed that it was a level grassy plain, white
with the ripeness of its grass. 'Those who have read Sir Samuel Baker's
HEROES: OF: : THE - DARK CONTINENT 557
'Albert N'yanza' will remember the passage wherein he states that to the
south-west the N'yanza stretches 'illimitably.' He might well be in error at
such a distance, when our own people, with the plain scarcely four miles away,
mistook the plain for the N'yanza. As the plain recedes south-westerly the
bushes become thicker; finally acacias appear in their forests, and, beyond these
again, the dead black thickness of an impenetrable tropical forest ; but the plain,
as far. as 'the: cye N 1
could command, con- | | ===> . Mesa. . L
tinued to lie ten to. > <% =- -
twelve miles wide be-
tween these mount-
ain - barriers, - and
through the centre
of it-sometimes in-
clining towards the
south-east moun-
tains, sometimes to
the south-west range
-the Semliki River
pours its waters to-
wards the Albert
N'yanza.
A BRUSH WITH THE
WARASURA.
"In two marches
from - Buhobo -we
stood upon its banks,
and, alas for Mason
Bey and Gessi Pa-
sha! had they. but
halted their steam-
ers for half an hour
to examine this river,
they would have been
sufficient to excite
much geographical
interest; for the &
river is a powerful A WARASURA WARRIOR.
stream from eighty to one hundred yards wide, averaging nine feet depth
from side to side, and having a current from three and a half to four knots
per hour, in size about equal to two-thirds of the Victoria Nile.
"As we were crossing this river the Warasura attacked us from the rear
with a well-directed volley, but, fortunately, the distance was too great. They
558 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
were chased for some miles; but, fleet as greyhounds, they fled, so there were
no casualties to report on either side. l | f
"We entered the Awamba country on the eastern shore of the Semliki, and
our marches for several days afterwards were through plantain plantations,
which flourished in the clearings made in this itrnuly African- forest. * Finally,
we struck the open again immediately under Ruewenzori itself. Much, how-
ever, as we had flattered ourselves that we should see some marvellous 'scenery,
the Snow Mountain was very coy, and hard to distinguish. On most days it
loomed impending over us like a tropical storm-cloud, ready to dissolve in rain
and ruin on us. Near sunset a peak or two here, a crest there, a ridge be-
yond, white with snow, shot into view-jagged clouds whirling and eddying
round them, and then the darkness of night. Often at sunrise, too, Ruewenzori
would appear fresh, clean, brightly pure; profound blue voids 'above and
around it; every line and dent, knoll and turret-like crag deeply marked and
cleatly visible.: But: presently 811 would be 'bririecd utider. mass upon mass of
mist,; 'until the dmmense mountain was no more visible than if we were thou-
sands of miles away. And then, also, the Snow Mountain being set deeply in
the range, the nearer we approached the base of the range the less we saw of
it, for higher ridges obtruded themselves and barred the view. Still, we have
obtained three remarkable views-one from the N'yanza Plain, another from
Kavalli, and a third from the South Point.
SCALING THE MOUNTAIN. .
"In altitude above the sea I should estimate it to be between 18,000 and
19,000 feet. We cannot trust our triangulations, for the angles are too small.
When we were in positions to ascertain it correctly, the inconstant mountain
gathered his cloudy blankets around him and hid himself from view; but a
clear view, from the loftiest summit down to the lowest reach of the snow, ob-
tained from a place called Karimi, makes me confident that the height is be-
tween the figures stated above. wod
"It took us nineteen marches to reach the south-west angle of the range,
the Semliki Valley being below us on our right, and which, if the tedious
mist had permitted, would have been exposed: in every detail. - That part of
the valley traversed by us is generally known under the name of Awamba,
while the habitable portion of the range is principally denominated Ukonju.
The huts of these natives, the Bakonju, are seen as high as 8000 feet above
the sea. A f |
'" all" ofr officers 'had at one time a keen desife to distinguish
themselves as the climbers of these African Alps, but, unfortunately, they were
An a very uufit condition for such a work. The Pasha only managed to get
1000 feet higher than our camp, but Lieutenant Stairs reached the height of
10,677 feet above the sea, but had the mortification to find two deep gulfs be-
tween him and the Snowy Mount proper. He brought, however, a good col-
HEROES OFR THE DARK CONTINENT 559
lection of plants, among which were giant heather, blackberries, and bilberries.
The Pasha was in his element among these plants, and has classified them.
"The first day we had disentangled ourselves of the forest proper, and its
outskirts of straggling bush, we looked down from the grassy shelf below the
Ruewenzori range and saw a grassy plain, level seemingly as a bowling-green, the
very duplicate of that which is seen at the extremity of the Albert Nyanza-
extending southerly from the forest of the Semliki Valley. We then knew that
-we were not far from the Southern Lake discovered by me in 1877.
"Under guidance of the Wakonju I sent Lieutent Stairs to examine the
river, said to flow from the Southern N'yanza. He returned next day, report-
ing it to be the Semliki River, narrowed down to a stream forty-two yards
wide and about ten feet deep, flowing, as the canoe-men on its banks said, to
the N'yanza Utuku, or N'yanza of Unyoro-the Albert N'yanza. Besides native
reports, he had other corroborative evidence to prove it to be the Semliki.
"On the second march from the confines of Awavela we entered Usongora,
-a grassy region as opposite in appearance from the perpetual spring of
Ukonju as a droughty land could well be. 'This country bounds the Southern
N'yanza on its northern and north-western side. f
A VAST SEA OF SALT.
"'Three days later, while driving the Warasura before us, or, rather, as
_ they were self-driven by their own fears, we entered, soon after its evacuation,
the important town of Kative, the headquarters of the raiders. It is situated be-
tween an arm of the Southern N'yanza and a salt-lake about two miles long
and three-quarters of a mile wide, which consists of pure brine of a pinky
color, and deposits salt in solid cakes of salt-crystals. 'This was the property
of the Wasongora, but the value of its possession has attracted the cupidity of
Kabba Rega, who reaps a considerable revenue from it. Toro, Ankori, Mpororo,
Ruanda, Ukonju, and many other countries demand the salt for consumpticn,
and the fortunate possessor of this inexhaustible treasure of salt reaps all that
is desirable of property in Africa in exchange, with no more trouble than the
defence of it. yo f
"Our road from Kative lay east and north-east, to round the bay-like ex-
tension of the N'yanza lying between Usongora and Unyampaka, and it hap-
pened to be the same taken by the main body of the Warasura in their hasty
retreat from the salt-lake. On entering Uhaiyana, which is to the south of
Toro, and in the uplands, we had passed the northern head of the N'yanza, or
Beatrice Gulf, and the route to the south was open-not, however, without
another encounter with the Warasura.
"A few days later we entered Unyampaka, which I had visited in January,
1876. Ringi, the king, declined to enter into the cause of Unroyo, and al-
lowed us to feed on his bananas unquestioned. After following the lake shore
until it turned too far to the south-west, we struck for the lofty uplands of
Aukori, by the natives of which we were well received, preceded, as we had been
"§bo .. :s HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
by the reports of our good deeds in rehevmg the 'salt-lake of the presence of
the universally obnoxious Warasura. f
THE CARAVAN STRICKEN WITH FEVERS. Wea
"If you draw a straight line from the N'yanza to the Uzinja shores of
the Victoria Lake, it would represent pretty fairly our course through ~Ankori,
Karagwe, and Uhaiya to Uzinja. Ankori was open to us, because we had
driven the Wayneyoro from the salt-lake. 'The story was an open sesame.
There also existed a wholesome fear of an expedition which had done that
which all the power of Ankori could not have done. Karagwe was open to
us, because free-trade is the policy of the Wanyambu, and because the Wa-
ganda were too much engrossed with their civil war to interfere with our pas-
sage. Uhaiya admitted our entrance without cavil, out of respect to our num-
bers, and because we were well introduced by the Wanyambu, 'and the Wak-
wiya guided us in like manner to be welcomed by the Wazinja. Nothing
happened during the long journey from the Albert Lake to cause us any regret
that we had taken this straight course, but we have suffered from an unpre-
cedented number of fevers. - We have had as many as 150 cases in one
day. +Anmkori is so beswept with cold winds that the expedition wilted under
them. Seasoned veterans like the Pasha and Captam Casati were prostrated
time after time, and both were reduced to excessive weakness like: ourselves.
Our blacks, regardless of their tribes, tumbled headlong into the long grass to
sleep their fever fits off.. 'Home, after a short illness, died. The daily fatigues
of the march, an ulcer, a fit of ~féver, a touch of bowel complaint, caused the
Egyptians to hide in any cover: along the route; and, being unperceived by
the rear guard of the expedition, were left to the doubtful treatment. of natives
of whose language they were utterly ignorant. In the month of | July we
lost 141 of their number in this manner.
"Out of respect to the first British prince who has shown an interest in.
African geography, we have named the southern N'yanza-to distinguish it .
from the other two Nyanzas-the Albert Edward N'yanza. It is not. a very
large lake. Compared to the Victoria, the Tanganyika, and the Nyassa, it is
small, but its importance and interest lie in the sole fact that it is the receiver
of all the streams at the extremity of the south-western or left Nile basins,
and discharges these waters by one river, the Semliki, into the Albert N'yanza,
in like manner as: Lake Victoria receives all streams from the extremity of the
south-eastern 'or right Nile basin, and pours these waters by the Victoria Nile
into the AlbertsN' yanza: f B
"'These two Niles, amalgamating in Lake Albert, leave this under the
well-known name of Whlte Nile."
A LAND DESOLATED BY PILLAGE.
"'The southernmost stretch of the Ruewenzori range projects like a pro-
montory between two broad extents of the ancient bed of the Albert Edward-
formerly known as the Muta Nziga. 'To avoid the long detour, we cross this
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. s 561
hilly promontory in a south-easterly direction from the Samliki Valley, and
enter eastern Usongora, and are in a land as different from that at the north-
western base of the Ruewenzori as early summer is from mid-winter. As we
contiuue easterly, we have Ruewenzori on our left now, and the strangely
configured Albert Edward N'yanza on our right. 'The broad plains which ex-
tend between were once covered by this lake. Indeed, for miles along its bor-
der there are breadths of far-reaching tongues of swamp penetrating inland.
Streams of considerable volume pour through these plains towards the N'yanza
from Ruewenzori, without benefiting the land in the least. Except for its cov-
ering of grass-at this season withered and dried-it might well be called a
desert; yet in former times, not very remote, the plains were thickly peopled
-the zeribas of milk-weed and dark circles of euphorbia, wherein the shep-
herds herded their cattle by night, prove that, as well as the hundreds of cat-
tle-dung mounds we came across. 'The raids of Waganda and the Warasura
have depopulated the land of the Wasongora, the former occupants, and have
left only a miserable remnant, who subsist by doing " chores" for the Wara-
sura, their present masters. f
*From Usongora we entered Toro, the Albert Edward N'yanza being still
on our right, and our course being now north-easterly, as though our purpose
was to march to Lake Albert again. After about twenty miles' march we turn
east, leave the plains of the Albert Edward, and ascend to the uplands of
Uhaiyana, which, having gamed our conrse is south until we have passed
Unyampaka, Wthh I first saw in 1876.
"South of Unyampaka stretches Ankori, a large country and thickly peo-
pled The plams have an altitude of over 5000 feet above -the sea, but the
mountains rise to as high as 6400 feet. As Ankori extends to the Alexandra
Nile, we have the well-known land of Karagwé south of this river.
A TRADITION OF THE SNOW KING.
-" Since leaving the Albert N'yanza, between Kavalli and the Semliki River,
we traversed the lands of the Wavira and Baregga. On crossing the Semliki
we entered the territory of the Awamba. When we gamed the grassy terrace
at the base of the Ruewenzori range we travelled on the border-line between
the Wakonju, who inhabit the lower slopes of Ruewenzori, and the Awamba,
who inhabit the forest region of the Semliki Valley. 'The Wajonku are the
only people who dwell upon the mountains. 'They build their villages as high
as 8000 feet above the sea. In time of war-for the Warasura have invaded
their country also-they retreat up to the neighborhood of the snows. They
say that once fifty men took refuge right in the snow region, but it was so
bitterly cold that only thirty returned to their homes. Since that time they
have a dread of the upper regions of their mountains.
" As far as the south-west angle of Ruewenzori the slopes of the front line
of chills are extensively cultivated ; the fields of sweet potatoes, millet, eleu-
sine, and plantations of bananas describe all kinds of squares, and attract
36
$62)... HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
the attention; while between each separate settlement the wild banana
thrives luxuriantly, growing at as high an altitude as the summits of the
highest spurs, whereon the Wakonju have constructed their villages. .
"Though we were mutually hostile at first, and had several little skir-
= SJ mishes, we became at last acquainted
|_ with the and very firm,
close friends. - 'The common enemy
were the Warasura, and the flight of
the Warasura upon hearing of our
advance revealed to the Wakonju that
they ought to be friends with all those
who were supposed to be hostile to
their oppressors. Hence we received
goats, bananas, and native honey in
abundance; our loads were carried,
guides furnished us, and every in-
telligence of the movements of the.
Wanyoro brought us. (In their ardor
to. engage= the foe -a band of them
accompanied us across Usongora and
Toro to the -frontier of Uhaiyana.
DESCRIPTIONS OF THE TRIBES. _
f] - "South-west of Awamba, beyond
I| the forest -region of the Semliki
| Valley, begins Usongora. 'This coun-
try occupies the plains bordering the
north-west and north of Lake Albert
Edward. 'The people are a fine race,
but in- no way differing from the
finer types 'of men seen in Kar
agwé and Ankori, and the Wahuma
shepherds of Uganda. - Their food
consists of milk and . meat,; the
latter eaten raw or slightly warmed.
"The Toro natives are a mixture
of the higher class of negroes, somé~
: | whatlike the Waganda. They have
R a wakoNJU WOMAN. become so amalgamated with the
lower Wanyoro that we can find nothing distinctive. The same may be said of the
Wahaiyana. What the royal families of those tribes may be we can only imag-
ine from having seen the rightful prince of Usongora in Ankori, who was as
perfect a specimen of. a pure Galla as could be found in Shoa. But you need
not conclude from this that only the royal families possess fine features.
*%
'\
&
£..
&
NJ
W }
A
\
N
p
, //Z/// 1
Pp
7B
Pe
K \- §
(gum Z >a N
luu'démfiwflfif‘f/I’EN \
ats (aC gyut
Smtp
#5, \ (Cit -22P
\ «---
$ -G
a -z s - ME “Lg. “figs“ s
r ia a NNY
§
- 2 s tons sra N \ \
: “gm” Mast \\\\\\\\\\\\\\§\\\\ \\\\
. w. con 0 Stites. /
To ta!
|\. s
& ‘\‘\‘\\\ §\\\\ bk}: §
0 \ N \
\\k\\\ \\
hed *
firszfit 3
NIN, #22 mot
ss ts ap C
ay $.%>
¥
mame . @ \
fro x
x
A \\\\\
ae a ger 2 * /
"Z
A WAHUMA BAND.
(563)
$e) HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
These Ethiopic types are thickly spread among the Wahuma of these Central
African uplands. Wherever we find a land that enjoys periods of peace, we
find the Wahuma at home, with their herds, and in looking at them one
might fancy himself transported into the midst of Abyssinia.
" Ankori is a land which, because of its numbers and readiness to resist-
ance, enjoys long terms of uninterrupted peace; and here the Wahuma are
more numerous than elsewhere. 'The royal family are Wahuma, the chiefs and
all the wealthier and more important people are pure. Wahuma Their only
occupation, besides warring when necessary, is breedmg and tending cattle.
The agricultural class consists of slaves-at least such is the term by which
they are designated. 'The majority of the Wahuma can boast cf features quite
as regular, fine, and delicate as Europeans. R
"'The countries to the south of the Albert Edward are still unexplored,
and we have not heard much respecting them; but what we have heard differs
much from that which you find illustrated by that irregular sheet of water
called Muta Nzige in the 'Dark Continent' map.
Ruanda bears the name of Unyavingi to the people of Ukonju Uson-
gora, and Ankori, and is a large, compact country, lying between the Alexan-
dra Nile and the Congo water-shed to the west, and reaching to within one
day's long march to the Albert Edward. It also overlaps alportion of the
south-west side of that lake. 'The people are described as being very warlike,
and that no country, not even Uganda, could equal it in numbers or strength.
The late queen has been succeeded by her son, Kigeri, who now governs.
REMARKABLE VICISSITUDES. | |
"Since the commencement of our march homeward from our camp at Ka-
valli, we have undergone remarkable vicissitudes of climate. From the tem-
perate and enjoyable climate of the region west of Lake Albert we descended
to the hothouse atmosphere of the Semliki Valley-a nearly three thousand
feet lower level. Night and day were equally oppressively warm and close, and
one or two of us suffered greatly in consequence. 'The movement from the
Semliki Valley to the plains north of Lake Albert brought us to a dry but a
hot land; the ground was baked hard, the grass was scorched, the sun, but -
for the everlastmg thick haze, would have been intolerable; in addmon to
which the water, except that from the Ruewenzori stream, was atrocious, and
charged with nitre and organic corruption. 'The ascent to the eastern platean
was marked by an increase of cold and many an evil conseqtience-feveps,
colds, catarrhs, dysenteries, and paralysis. Several times we ascended to over
6000 feet above the sea, to be punished with agues, which prostrated black
and | white by scores. In the early mornings, at this altitude, hoar-frost
was common. Blackberries were plentiful along the path in north west An-
l:ori, 52006 feet above the sea-level.
Yours obedlently,
"Henry M. STANLEY 1».
ETD
CHAPTER - XXXL
END OF THE JOURNEY.
r the story of Stanley's last and most wonderful
. expedition, we have now only to add a few facts and
descriptions to carry the narrative of the final great march
from Albert Lake to Zanzibar. As described in the pre-
ceding chapter, the route selected for the journey eastward
was south from Albert Lake along the Ruewenzori range
and Semliki River, thence south-eastward to the shores of Victoria Lake. This
route proved a most fortunate selection, not only because of the valuable
geographical and ethnological discoveries made, but also because the hostile
Wanyoro tribes were thereby avoided. M'tesa, had he been living, would no
doubt have given substantial aid to Stanley, but his successor, Kalema, was
bitterly hostile to Christians, and with the powerful force at his command could
have easily destroyed-as he certainly would had opportunity offered-the
expedition. ~ ‘
EXPERT TREE CLIMBERS.
The many tribes not previously met with by white explorers, which
Stanley came in contact with in the formerly unexplored region of Muta
Nziga Lake, lent a new interest to the expedition, and greatly increases its
value. Among other peoples whom Stanley describes in the letter printed in
the preceding chapter, he found a tribe which added to their other curious
customs and habits a singular propensity for climbing trees and making tem-
porary habitations thereon. 'This practice no doubt grew out of the persecu-
tions to which they were once subject by a more powerful neighboring tribe,
which induced them to make their abode in the loftiest trees, where they would
be at an advantage in repelling attack. Another reason is found in the frequent
inundations of the district, which rendered an altitudinous habitation at certain
seasons a necessity. Neither of these reasons now forcibly remains, for the
people no longer suffer from their cruel neighbors as they once did, and owing
to a gradual filling in of what was formerly a very low valley, the inundations
are less frequent. But old habits, especially when transmitted, are very slowly
abandoned, so that there are still to be occasionally seen these so-called tree-
dwellers, while the tribes continue to retain their expertness as climbers. And
their means for ascending large and lofty trees is quite as curious as were their
former habitations. In scaling large trees the climber provides himself with a
- strong vine, which he throws around the tree, and then seizing the two ends
in either hand he puts his feet against the body of the tree, and by working
(565)
i mop ddan. c.
566 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
the vine in a kind of twisting motion, fairly walks up by a series of leverages.
To see a native thus ascending a tree, one would think the feat an easy one,
but it requires much practice before it can be accomplished.
These people, though : living between. tribes that. liad: fiore or less inter-
course with Arab traders, knew nothing of firearms, and exhibited both curiosity
and alarm when a musket was fired in their midst. While in camp on the
Semliki Plain, Nelson shot an eagle in the sight of some of the natives, and
instantly a singular scene ensued. Scarcely had the bird fallen to the ground
when six athletic men rushed to the spot, and with grimaces, as if half asking
PLUCKING THE EAGLE FOR MAGIC FEATHERS.
the privilege, they set to work to strip the eagle of its quill feathers, and after-
wards cut off the head and feet. 'The purpose of these trophies was presently
understood, when an interpreter explained that the men thought the bird had
been killed by magic, and that possession of the quills or parts would give
influence over spirits of the air.
Further south, and to the east of the Ruewenzori range, the tribes are more
familiar with Arab customs, and many of them are Mohammedans, a fact which
is particularly true of the Wahuma, who affect the use of loin cloths and head
HEROES -OF-THE-~DARK CONTINENXT: -* 567
dresses ornamented with feathers. Their habitations, however, are those of the
savage, being cone-shaped huts flimsily. constructed, and bearing a striking
resemblance to those of our North American Indians. It is stated that upon
certain occasions, which may be designated as public holidays, it is customary
for the daughter of their chief or king to circulate among her people, borne
upon the back of a lusty servant, and scatter small gifts, generally beads, to
the througs that-gather about her way.>> This ceremony is supposed to be a.
symbol of the care and generosity which the ruler feels for his people, and the
blessings that will follow obedience to his commands.
'The chief himself is distinguishable from his subjects only by a peculiar
head-dress, which serves him as a crown, and the more pretentious dwelhng in
which he res1des He Has, like all Afrlcan potentates, a great number of wives,
who minister to his wants with true slavish devotion, even to the absurd extent
of feeding him, and of holding a vessel to his royal lips while he drinks. But.
aside from this custom, in which we observe the badge of abject subordination,
the king exacts no further humiliating subjection from either his wives or his
subjects, his real rule being tempered with justice and moderation. So that,
upon the whole, being blessed with a fertile district and a considerate king, the
Wahuma may in truth be happy people.
INCIDENTS OF THE MARCH.
“After reaching the region along the south shores of Victoria Lake, there
was more or less fighting with the natives, but at no place was the expedition
opposed by a sufficient force to make the contests much more than brief skir-
mishes, in which there were very few casualties. But while there was little
reductlon of the caravan from this cause, other more serious obstacles were
encountered, which depleted the ranks by several scores. - There were occasional
stretches of dense growth to be penetrated, swamps to be passed, streams to be
waded and fever districts to be covered. 'These entailed hardships which brought
on disease from which many never rallied, and died even while being carried
in hammocks. An accident also occurred by which one of the Soudanese boys
had his eyesight destroyed, while another was so severely burned about the
face and body as to require nursing over the remainder of the way. 'Three boys
had obtained some brass shells, from which they attempted to remove the bullets
by -melting out the lead. They placed the shells in a fire one evening "after
camp had been made, and while blowing the coals on which the shells were
laid the cartridges exploded, with the results mentioned.
as the caravan passed by villages, the natives would
rush out with shouts, gesticulations and a display of their singular weapons ;
and wizards would indulge devilish dances in their incantations to oppose the
march, but finding small attention paid to their actions they most frequently
concluded their wild exhibitions by making overtures of friendship; some, how-
ever, were disdainful to the last, and sent imprecations upon the vanishing
caravan after failing to exact a tribute for the privilege of crossing their territory.
bs i
rp
AAD J 4
U
I \\\§\\\
a
Btk an:
ea
m
maa .o
as
af
TP
P
ot
mfg’ 2
Unt a
wi?
7,
697 1
f
a/ /
N
/
rr
Moo
"*a
Red
47,
uc rad.
T
o Nad
A W
#
3
Spm]
sy e YH
hers (d
a
7
¥
a
A.
mr
ZZZ f,
rari
»
m
§ . Lime :e Tr rtp,
f - rene
A% Pes r
[ \ ' mI $15
S Tz /M
* Suck an what"
*%
tom: -
\l "*e e ma vag
Nud. +g Arie _s
PLF
«--a 2
sity
-:
---> "B-
--
*~
Senge
CEREMONY OF SCATTERING BEADS.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 569
- EMIN PASHA'S DAUGHTER.
Among the members of the cavalcade was a daughter of Emin Pasha, a
girl nearly eleven years of age, named Ferida. Upon being introduced to her
by her father, Stanley's curiosity was excited to learn what strange romance
had culminated in the girl before him, and, to his casual inquiries, he learned
the following . interesting facts: Dr. Sehintzer (Emin Pasha) is, by birth, a
Silesian Jew, but his Hebraic origin did not impose a religious prejudice
against Islamism. In fact, the Doctor's long residence among the Moham-
medans of the Soudan and lake regions made him lend a willing ear to the
teachings of the Prophet, though possibly not so much from conviction as from
self-interest:-for no one save a Mohammedan can live in peace in that region.
But at all events Emin embraced the Moslem faith, outwardly at least, and ac-
cepted its teachings and practices The Koran permits every man to have
more than one wife, provided he is able to support a plurality, and as it was
the universal custom of those about him to live in polygamy, Emin had no
wish to be a conspictious exception, which might reflect upon his sincerity as
a Mohammedan, and thereby destroy his influence; accordingly, he lived as did
his people, and supported more than a single consort The result of this union
was the birth of: a daughter, Ferida. 'This girl, though not the most beauti-
ful of her sex, possesses a lovely disposition, and between her and the father
there: is an attachment really delightful to behold. Born amid savage sur-
roundings, she had no refining influence about her save that exercised by her
father; but through his constant care and patient instruction, she was taught
in the several branches, and now has a fairly good educat1on which will be
further advanced by all the advantages that can be secured for her in the best
colleges of Europe.
NEWS OF STANLEY'S RETURN.
_The first reliable news received of Stanley's approach to civilization was
transmitted by Stanley himself to the British Consul at Zanzibar. The dis-
patch was written at Mpwapa, November 11th, 1889, and announced his arrival
there on the fifty-fifth day after his departure from Victoria Lake, and the one
hundred and eighty-eighth day after leaving Kavalli. In addition to making the
glad announcement of his arrival at the German station of Mpwapa, he wrote
thus ruefully: '
"Every previous expedition has seen the lightening of its labors upon
nearing the sea. But the long string of hammock bearers with us now tells
a idiffefent tale.. Till we can place the poor things in our company on ship:
board there will be no rest for us. 'The worst of it is that we have not the
pr1v1lege of showing you at Zanzibar the full extent of our labors. After car-
rying some of them a thousand miles, and fighting to the right and left of
the sick, dfiving the Warasura from their prey over rauge alter range of
mountains, with every energy on full strain, they slip through our hands and
dix "iit. their hammocks. One lady, 75. years old, mother of Vakiel; :died in
this manner. ’ f
570 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
"In North Usukuma, south of the Victoria N'yanza, we had as stirring a time
for four days as anywhere on our route. There was continuous fighting during
the. greater part of the daylight Hours. 'The foolisit natives took an unaccount-
able prejudice against Emin's people. T hey insisted that they were cannibals,
and had come for no good purpose. Talking was useless, as any Attempt 'to
disprove their impression only drove them into a white-hot rage, and in their
mad hate, flinging themselves on us, they suffered severely.
"I am advised that the Semba and Mwene route is the: best for securing
an abundance of food, and therefore I propose to adopt it; but as regards
danger. from attacks by the natives, one 'road seeins to. be as bad as the
other." ;
RECEPTION AT BAGAMOYO,
At Mpwapa Stanley was greeted by several friends who ministered greatly
to his comfort, and who helped him on his jeurney to Bagamoyo, which was
a distance of three weeks' march. After resting two days the caravan con-
tinued on, and on December 3d Major Wissmann met Stanley, Casati and
Emin at the head of the long procession, as it fled futo the small village of
Atoni, on the Kinghani River. ' anes ’
Having . heard of the approach of Stanley's expedition, Wissmann had
provided horses for Stanley, Emin and the lieutenants, in order to relieve
the march of hardships at the latter end, and had these ready when the en-
trance into Atoni was made. |
THE MIRTH THAT A SNAKE PRODUCED.
But the expedition was in great need of horses long before the meeting
with Wissmann, for every one was both weary and footsore, while the high-
way, though bearing the semblance of a road, was rough and thorn bestrewed.
But it was not every one in the expedition who could ride a horse,. for:. .to
many of those belonging to Emin's party such an animal was a novelty, while
even Stanley's assistants had lost much of their equestrianship in the now com-
moner practice of cavalry service on donkeys, oxen and goats, which latter
animals Ward affirms served to bear both packs, and light men occasionally.
But after leaving Kavalli there was no kind of riding animal in the expedition.
One of the horses supplied by Wissman was not exactly a Rozinante, but. it
was no less distinguished for its quiet demeanor, on which account 'its services
were the more in demand, as there was not much confidence shown by any of
the party in their ability to keep company with a spirited horse. However, it
fell to the lot of Jephson to bestride this promising "beast," and off he set in
good glee, at first distancing his followers, and keeping a goodly pace until he
met with a most unexpected mishap. While moving at a slow trot, sud-
denly his horse reared with a spasmodic effort that all but unseated him, and
dashed away with a spirit that might wreck windmills and opposing phantoms,
giving Mr Jephson barely time to see a large snake crawling along with some
excitement in the road, and thus to surmise the cause. ,
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT. 571
When Jephson finally returned to the roadside from gathering up his
accoutrements he was met by Stanley and Wissmann trudging along on slower
horses near the centre of the caravan, and on relating his adventure he became
the object of a mirth that echoed along the line from one end to the other,
and which brought upon him so many good-natured jibes that he could not
again be induced to mount a horse even after his own was recaptured.
A LETTER DISPLAYING STANLEY'S MODESTY.
The next halting place after leaving Atoni, was at a small village called
Msuwah, where the expedition was met by several correspondents, among the
nuinber being a representative of the New York Herald. - As Stanley had
made his first great reputation as. an African explorer while in the service of
that journal, at the solicitation of the correspondent he wrote the following
letter, in which he gives a summary of his three years' journeyings and the
wonderful discoveries made: s | f
’ MsuwAx, Nov. 30th, 1889.
[Tots or Tur Ngw, Your HUrrilo: - The Herald coffe.
spondent, who found us during our days' halt at Msuwah, five days from the
coast, has made it a point that I should write . you.s_ L- beg you to: believe
that I should be most willing -to do so did*I know what subject would be par-
ticularly gratifying to you; but as the Zerald correspondent cannot suggest
a subject, you will perhaps consider that it would be scarcely fair to expect
me to know matters your readers would be most interested in.
"I find then most convenient to imagine you able to tell my friends
much that I should like to say to them. First of all I am in perfect .health
and feel like a laborer of a Saturday evening returning home with his week's
work done, his week's wages in his pocket and glad that to-morrow is the
Sabbath.
"Just about three years ago, while lecturing in New England, a mes-
sage came from under the sea bidding me to hasten to take a. commission to
relieve Enin Pasha at Wadelai; but, as people generally do with faithful
pack-horses, numbers of little trifles, odds and ends are piled on over and above
the proper burden. Twenty various little commissions were added to the princi-
pal ofice, each requiring due care and thought. Well, looking back over what
has been accomplished, I see no reason for any heart's discontent. We can say
we shirked no task, and that good will, aided by steady effort, enabled us to
complete every little job as well as circumstances permitted.
GEOGRAPHICAL DISCOVERIES.
"Over and above the happy ending of our appointed duties, we have not
been unfortunate-in geographical discoveries. ~ 'The 'Aruwimi is now known
from its source to its bourne. 'The great Congo forest, covering as large an
area as France and the Iberian Peninsula, we can now certify to be an
absolute fact. The mountains of the moon this time, beyond the least doubt,
er- mse
D O LCD COULD Z ODOC OOC COOLED
572 HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT
have been located, and Ruewenzori, 'the Cloud King,' robed in eternal snow,
has been seen and its flanks explored and some of its shoulders ascended,
Mounts Gordon Bennett and Mackinnon Cones being but giant sentries
warding off the approach to the inmer area of 'the Cloud -King:
"On the southeast of the range the connection between the Albert Edward
N'yanza and the Albert N'yanza has been discovered, and the extent of the former
lake is now known for the first time. Range after range of mountains has been tra-
versed, so covered by such tracts of pasture land as would make your
cowboys out West mad with envy. And right under the burning equator we
have fed on blackberries and pilberries and quenched our thirst with crystal
a"
water fresh fron suow beds. We have also. been able to add nearly 6,000
square miles of water to the Victoria N'yanza.
"Our naturalist will expatiate upon the new species of animals, birds and
plants he has discovered. Our surgeon will tell what he knows of the climate
and its amenities; It will take us all we know how to say what new store of -
knowledge has been gathered from this unexpected field of discoveries: I
always suspected that in the central regions between the equatorial lakes
something worth seeing would be found, but I was not prepared for such a
harvest of new facts. ;
' AN EXTRAORDINARY EXPEDITION.
"This has certainly been the most extraordinary expedition I have ever
led into Africa. A veritable divinity seems to have hedged us while we journeyed.
I say it with all reverence. It has impelled us whither it would, effected its
own will, but nevertheless guided and protected us. f
"What can you make of this, for instance?. On August 17, 1887, all the
officers of the rear column are united at Yambuya. 'They have my letter of
instructions before them, but instead of preparing for the morrow's march and
following our track, they decide to wait at Yambuya, which decision initiates
the most awful season any community of men ever endured in Africa or else-
where. 'The results are that- three-quarters of - their force die of slow poison..
Their commander is murdered, and the second officer dies soon after of sickness
and grief.. Another officer is wasted to a skeleton. and obliged to return home.
A fourth is sent to wander aimlessly up and down the Congo, and the survivor
is found in. such q fearful pest hole that we dare not describe its horrors.
"On the same date, 150 miles away, the officer of the day leads 333 men
of the advance column into the bush, loses the path and all consciousness of
his whereabouts, and every step he takes only leads him further astray. His
people become frantic. His white companions, vexed and irritated by the sense
of evil around them, cannot devise any expedient to relieve him. 'They are
surrounded by cannibals, and poison-tipped arrows thin their numbers. - Mean-
-time, I, in command of the river column, am anxiously stirring up and down
in the river in four different directions. Through forests my scouts are seek-
ing for them, but not until the sixth day was I successful in finding them.
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT - - 573
DISASTER AND DEATH.
*'Taking the same month and the same date in 1888, a year later, on
August 17, I- listen,: horror-stricken, to the tale of the last surviving officer
of the rear column at: Banalya, and. am told of. nothing. but death -and
disaster, disaster and death, death and disaster. I see nothing but horrible forms
of men smitten with disease, bloated, disfigured and scarred, while the scene in
the camp, infamous for the murder of poor Barttelot, barely four weeks before,
is simply sickening. On the same day, 600 miles west of this camp, Jameson,
wort out with fatigue, sickness and sorrow, breathes his last.
"On the next day, August 18, 600 miles east, Emin Pasha and my officer
Jephson, are suddenly surrounded by infuriated rebels, who menace them Wlth
loaded rifles and instant death, but fortunately they relent and only make them
prisoners to: be delivered to the Mahdists.
Having saved Bonny out of the jaws of death, we arrive a second: time
at Albert N'yanza, to find Emin Pasha and Jephson prisoners, in daily expecta-
tion of their doom.
"Jephson's own letters will descrlbe his anxiety. Not until both were in
.and the Egyptian fugitives under our protection did I begin ito see
that I was only carrying out a higher plan than mine. My own designs were con-
stantly frustrated by unhappy circumstances. I endeavored to steer my course
as direct as possible, but there was an unaccountable influence at the helm.
"*I gave as much good will to my duties as the strongest honor would
compel: ~My faith that 'the purity. of my motive deserved sncecess was firm,
but I have been conscious that the issues of every effort were in other hands.
"Not one officer who was with me will forget the miseries he has endured,
yet everyone that started from his home destined to march with the advance
column and share its wonderful adventures is here to-day safe, sound and
well, and the ZZerald correspondent may interview them to his heart's content.
This is not due to me.
e ' A POISONED SHAFT.
"Lieut. Stairs was pierced with a poisoned arrow like others, but others
died, and he lives. 'The poisoned tip came out from under his heart eighteen
months after he was pierced. Jephson was four months a prisoner with guards -
witlh loaded rifles around him.. That they did not murder him is. not due
to me.
officers have had to wade through as many as seventeen streams,
and broad expanses of-mud and swamps in a day. 'They have endured a sun
that scorched wherever it touched. A multitude of impediments have ruffled
their tempers and harassed their hours. They have been maddened . with
agonies of fevers; they have lived for months in an atmosphere that medical
authority declared to be deadly ; they have faced dangers every day, and their
diet has been all through what legal serfs would have declared to be infamous
and abominable, and yet:they live. - This is not due -to me any more than-the:
574 HEROES .OF. THE DARE CONTINENT:
courage with which they have borne all that was imposed upon them by their
surroundings, of the cheery energy which they bestowed on their work, or the
hopeful voices which rang in the ears of a deafening multitude of blacks and
urged the poor souls on to their goal.
TO WHAT WAS IT DUE?
' The wulgar will call it Iuck. ~»Unbelievers will call it chance; but deep
down in each heart remains the feeling that, of verity, there are more things in
heaven and earth than are dreamed of in common philosophy. '
""I must be brief. Numbers of scenes crowd the memory.
"Could one but sum them up into a picture, it would have grand interest.
The uncomplaining heroism of our dark followers, the brave manhood, the
attention to such uncouth disgnise, the tenderness we have seen issue from
nameless entities, the great love animating the ignoble, the sacrifice made by
v == ls o
dase
i sige"
tor s upt" Lf
TTV RA a der ay;
®
THE EXPEDITION CROSSING A STREAM
the unfortunate, the reverence we have noted in barbarians, who, even as our-
seives, were inspired with nobleness and incentives to duty; of all these we could
speak if we would, but I leave that to the ZHZera/ld correspondent, who, if he has
eyes willing to see, will see much for himself, and who, with his gifts of com-
position, may present a very taking outline of what has been done and is now
near ending, thanks be to God forever and ever. f
" Yours faithfully,
"*HExrxy
ARRIVAL AT BAGAMOYO. -
Aside from the mishap to Jephson, there was no trouble experienced with
the horses, so kindly provided by Wissmann, and a triumphal entry into Baga-
HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENTC: 575
moyo was made at eleven o'clock, Wednesday morning, December 4. - The town
was profusely decorated in expectation of their coming, carriers having gone on
in advance; and as the cavalcade came in sight of the coast, the German man-
of-war Sperber fired a salute of twelve guns. 'There were several vessels lying
in the roadstead, and all of these were handsomely decked in flags, giving a
beautiful appearance to the channel between Bagamoyo and Zanzibar island.
At three o'clock Wissmann entertained Stanley and Emin at a luncheon,
at which several Europeans were present, among others the captain of the
Sperber, who welcomed Stanley, and then congratulated Emin on behalf of
Emperor William. In the evening there was a champagne banquet, attended
by several representatives of foreign powers, chiefly consuls. 'The German
consul toasted the Queen, which was followed by a toast to Stanley by Wiss-
mann, which brought forth a most eloquent reply from the great explorer. In
the course of his remarks, he gave praise to God for all that had been accom-
plished and most feelingly referred to those soldiers who had accompanied him
and left their bones, as an evidence of their devotion, bleaching in the forest.
His speech throughout was eloquently reverential and modest, and gave a new
exhibition of his true greatness.
AN ACIDENT TO EMIN PASHA.
The joyful festivities that were thus inaugurated to' -manifest 'a gladsome
welcome to the returned explorers were continued to a late hour, and until they
were suddenly interrupted by a> most deplorable accident, which came very
near ending the life of Emin Pasha, turning mirth into instant mourning. -
Considerable wine was consumed during the ceremonies of jollification,
Emin Pasa indulging to an extent which rendered him nearly unconscious of
his surroundings. He had taken lodging at a typical Zanzibarian caravansary,
in which all the windows are 'so low that the sills are nearly on a level. with
the floor. They are thus made in order to allow a. fuller sweep of air, so
necessary in a tropical country, and also to serve as a doorway ieading out onto
the veranda which invariably surrounds the second stories of the large build-
ings. When Emin retired to his room it was after midnight, and being very
warm, as well as confused by the potations he had indulged in, he walked out
through the long open window and seated himself on the railing of the balcony
to catch the fresh air for a few moments before taking his repose. While thus
seated, receiving the cooling night breeze, he lost his balance and fell to the
ground below, a distance of nearly twenty feet. He struck with such force
upon his side that he lost consciousness, but his groans attracted the attention
of others who were sitting on a porch on the first floor, and who hastened to
his relief. The other members of the expedition were notified immediately,
and in a few moments tender hands carried the unconscious body to a bed in
the hotel, and Dr. Parke was hurriedly summoned, as were also physicians con-
nected with the English and German fleets in the harbor. A brief examination
§76 ° HEROES OF THE DARK CONTINENT.
physicians except Dr. Parke gave it as their opinion that his injuries would
prove mortal. Blood was flowing from his mouth, nose and ears, while there
appeared to be equally dangerous body hurts. His physical condition, too, was
much depleted by the long march and fevers from which he had been suffering
for two months before, so that his chances for recovery appeared very small.
For nearly a week be remained unconscious, with a slightly blood-tinged
serum running all the while from his ears, and other symptoms of brain con-
cussion manifest. In the mean time telegrams of sympathy from Germany and
England came two and three times on each day, concluding with requests for
knowledge of Emin's condition. Anxiety was intense as it appeared that through
his death the world would be deprived of a report of his services and discoveries
in the Equatorial Provinces, but at length reason regained its shattered throne
and the Doctor awoke from his death-like stupor. Hope revived as did the dis-
tinguished patient, and after four weeks he was pronounced out of danger.
During all this time he could fot be removed, . and it was two montlis
after the accident before he was able to leave Bagomoyo for Zanzibar. But
though Emin received the very best attention, his injuries mended so slowly
that it has not been thought advisable to send him either to Cairo or Europe,
and on the 14th of January he suffered a relapse that leaves his condition still
critical, at this writing, January 20th. f '
HONORS TO STANLEY.
On the: sixth of December Stanley crossed over to Zanzibar where he
was received with loud acclamations and a hundred public receptions were ten-
dered him, while telegram after telegram from Queen Victoria, Emperor Wil-
liam, the Khedive of Egypt, and great men of Europe poured in upon him
until a less democratic and less sensible head would have been turned by a
vanity such wealth of applause and honor most frequently excites. . Vessels
in the roads were a flutter with flags, bands serenaded him, toasts were drunk
in his honor, decorations were bestowed upon him, governments placed their
best ships at his service to. convey him whither he wished to go, and he was
feted, with untiring attentions, for a month. before he left: for. Cairo
in a British vessel specially appointed to carty him... Arfiving at
Cairo he was received by a distinguished delegation of British officers
and residents, who, after giving him a magnificent banquet, conducted him.
to the palace of the Khedive, where he received a no less hearty welcome at the
hands of the Egyptian ruler, a banquet being given him at the palace on the third
day after his arrival. 'Three days later he was likewise honored by Sir Evelyn
Baring, while floods of invitations continued to pour in upon him from scientific
and distinguished social bodies in London. f
Owing to his long continuance in a tropical country, and his emergence in
the winter season, Stanley wisely concluded to defer his return to England
until some time in the early spring, thus having to disappoint for while the
expectations of his admirers, who had hoped to extend him a hearty welcome.
RETURN CIRC
ULATION DEPARTMENT
- 202 Main Library
LOAN PERIOD 1 12 >
HOME USE |
4 a 6
ALL BOOKS MAY BE
1-month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405
RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS
-month loans may be recharged by bringing books to Circulation Desk
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW
RET'D MAR 3
p 1982
MAR 0&5 10an
"C T TVT
may 22 1987 -
Bf; gig-xi. CECG I E $99
UTO 4 5
472 f
3 +~+.4$ 7 JANLAME1 _C
g- 2227 |_ jan1g 1993
AIS AUG 2 61997
_may 09 1989 _
p>
3
*
bubeasered
Lea
¥»
L2
ACS
we
s
6 2 1989
ia /t f
§;.¢\!
AA! MC film}
FORM NO. DD6, 60m, 12/80
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
BERKELEY, CA 94720
©@s
F
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES
iment NIU
BO003015191
neve nemen come tele ve hereon rge icp ny
ee
J
m
ptr ay
Ladd
higޤa
crads
a
es s A